Kaleidox 16

User’s Manual
M770-2800-120
10 July 2013
Copyright & Trademark Notice
Copyright © 2007–2013, Miranda Technologies Partnership. All rights reserved.
Belden, Belden Sending All The Right Signals, and the Belden logo are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Belden Inc. or its affiliated companies in the United States and
other jurisdictions. Miranda, Kaleido-X, iControl, NVISION, and Densité, are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Miranda Technologies Partnership. Belden Inc., Miranda
Technologies Partnership, and other parties may also have trademark rights in other terms
used herein.
Terms and Conditions

Please read the following terms and conditions carefully. By using Kaleido multiviewer
documentation, you agree to the following terms and conditions.
Miranda Technologies Partnership (“Miranda”) hereby grants permission and license to
owners of Kaleido multiviewers to use their product manuals for their own internal
business use. Manuals for Miranda products may not be reproduced or transmitted in any
form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, for
any purpose unless specifically authorized in writing by Miranda.
A Miranda manual may have been revised to reflect changes made to the product during its
manufacturing life. Thus, different versions of a manual may exist for any given product.
Care should be taken to ensure that one obtains the proper manual version for a specific
product serial number.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a
commitment on the part of Miranda.
Warranty information is available in the Support section of the Miranda Web site
(www.miranda.com).
Title Kaleido-X User’s Manual
Part Number M770-2800-120
Revision 10 July 2013, 11:20 am
ii
Table of Contents
1 New Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2 Getting Started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
About this Document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Kaleido-MX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Kaleido-Modular-X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Kaleido-XQUAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Kaleido-IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Kaleido-Modular KMV-3901/3911 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Kaleido-X16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Kaleido-X (4RU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Kaleido-X (7RU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Kaleido-X (14RU) Expansion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Cascade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Detailed Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Verifying your System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Loading a Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Cabling Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
RS-422 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
XEdit Application Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
3 Operation of the Monitor Wall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Key Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Logging on to the Monitor Wall Using a Remote Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Using On-Screen Wall Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Displaying the Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Hiding the Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Loading Layouts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Displaying a Source in Full Screen Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Changing a Source’s Aspect Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Video Cropping/Zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Toggling Safe Area Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Displaying Subtitles and Closed Caption Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Editing UMD Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Selecting an Input Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Assigning Sources to Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Changing Crosspoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Using Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
iii
Table of Contents
Triggering Actions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Triggering GPI Output Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Acknowledging Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Triggering Audio Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Setting a Display Monitor’s Output Resolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Changing the IP Address of a Multiviewer from the Monitor Wall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
4 Managing Kaleido-X Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Key Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Opening the XEdit Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Using XEdit Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Importing a Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Exporting a Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Creating a Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Restoring a Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Creating a Single Multiviewer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Creating a Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Configuring the System Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Restoring Factory Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Managing Multiple Databases Efficiently . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
5 Calibrating the Kaleido-X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Key Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Detailed Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Multiviewer Output Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Multiviewer Input Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Router Output Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
GPI/Genlock Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
6 Configuring Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Key Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
General Status Manager (GSM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Alarm Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Alarm Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
External Alarm Provider. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Lookup Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Alarm Debouncing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Alarm Suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Global Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Virtual Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Sub-Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Alarm Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Teletext, Subtitles, and Closed Captions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Dolby E/AC-3 Metadata. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
iv
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual

Configuring Alarm Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Configuring Alarm Debouncing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Managing Alarm Providers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Managing Virtual Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Managing Alarm Logging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Publishing Alarms to SNMP Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
7 Logical Sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Key Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Creating and Configuring Logical Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Monitoring Internal-Router Outputs on the Monitor Wall (Sample Scenario) . . 170
8 Setting Up Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Key Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Managing Rooms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Configuring Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Managing Display Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
9 Creating Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Key Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Managing Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Configuring Video Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Configuring Audio Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Configuring Audio Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Configuring Time Code Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Configuring Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Configuring UMDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Configuring Alarm Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Configuring Subtitling Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Configuring Metadata Monitors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Configuring V-Chip Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Configuring Clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Working with Composite Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Using the Region Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Format Painting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Managing Widget Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
10 Creating Actions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Key Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
v
Table of Contents
Creating Monitor Wall Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Creating Background Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
11 Managing RCP Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
XEdit Quick Start Task List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Key Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Kaleido-RCP2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
RCP-200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Managing RCP Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Managing Room Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Setting Room Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Setting RCP User Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
12 Routers & Kaleido-X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Key Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Router Control Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Router Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Serial Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Q&A ...................................................................... 300
Importing Router Configurations from an NV9000 System Controller. . . . . . . . . 302
Configuring an External Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Configuring a Router Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Configuring a Multiviewer’s Internal Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Router Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
13 Tally Interface Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Key Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Configuring Serial Tally Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Ross Video Production Switcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Sony Production Switcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Kahuna Production Switcher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Kayak Production Switcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Kayenne Production Switcher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Zodiak Production Switcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Serial Port Test Agent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
14 Kaleido Remote Control Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
vi
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
15 Using the Serial to TCP/IP Dispatcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
16 Administration and Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

Key Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Default IP Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Hardware and Software Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Dashboard Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Network Considerations & Port Usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Assigning an IP Address to Each Device in Your System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Enabling Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Configuring Power Supply Redundancy on a Kaleido-X16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Installing XEdit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Registering your Multiviewer's Security Credentials with your Browser . . . . . . . 421
Enabling the Compatibility View in Internet Explorer 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Obtaining EDID Data From Displays When Using the DXF-100 Interface . . . . . . 430
Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Restarting and Shutting Down a Kaleido-IP Multiviewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Upgrading your Multiviewer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Contact Us . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
vii
New Features
This chapter describes new features in Kaleido-X version 7.00.
New Features and Enhancements in Kaleido-X Version 7.00

Kaleido-X version 7.00 is a major release, introducing support for the Kaleido-MX and
Kaleido-Modular-X multiviewer models, and is available for these new multiviewer models
only.
The new features and enhancements are listed below. Refer to the Release Notes for more
information.
• New multiviewer models: Version 7.00 introduces support for the new Kaleido-MX,
and Kaleido-Modular-X multiviewer models. Available in two form factors (1 RU, and
3 RU), the standalone Kaleido-MX systems support up to 48 video inputs, and up to four
multiviewer outputs. The Kaleido-Modular-X features FlexBridge coax cable bridging
between the input and output modules, which can be installed in different housing
frames, allowing support for up to 64 video inputs, and up to four multiviewer outputs.
In XEdit, and XAdmin, both are identified as Kaleido-MX.
Note: With the current version of the Kaleido-X software, Kaleido-MX, and
Kaleido-Modular-X systems are subject to a number of known issues and
limitations. Refer to the Release Notes, for details.
• [Ref. #KX-6589] Kaleido-MX, Kaleido-Modular-X: The status and value of all LTC time
code signals, including URS time code, are published to the multiviewer’s GSM, and
they are available from the filtered System list associated to the sources table in XEdit.
Notes
In XEdit, for a Kaleido-MX, the LTC text is available under the input cards and
the URS time code is available under the output cards.
The text value shows the hours, minutes, and seconds, but not the frame
count, which implies that, in the case of a count-down LTC, you cannot see
the last second of the countdown (i.e. the last 30 frames). The text “--:--:--”
means that the time code source is unavailable.
• [Ref. #KX-6425] Clock reference: Clocks can be configured to fall back to the multiviewer’s
internal clock for reference, should their assigned LTC or DVITC time code become
unavailable. See Configuring Clocks on page 251.
• [Ref. #F34499] GPI-1501: Support for the Densité GPI-1501 General Purpose Interface I/O
Module, which provides 20 dedicated GPI inputs and 8 terminals that can be
individually configured as either a GPI input or GPI output. The GPI-1501 card is used as
1
a GPI to Ethernet interface between a multiviewer and other devices. The multiviewer
publishes GPI and card status information to the multiviewer’s GSM.
• [Ref. #KX-6477] Loudness/dialnorm calibrations: The range of the Max. lower deviation
parameter has been extended down to -64 dB, which allows you to configure your
system so that the Loudness/Expected alarm is not triggered when silence is detected.
Getting Started
Welcome to the Kaleido-X! This chapter provides an overview of the different multiviewer
models and their initial configuration process.
Summary
System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Detailed Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Cabling Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
RS-422 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
XEdit Application Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
About this Document

The Kaleido-X User’s Manual is intended to help you leverage the full working potential of
the Kaleido-X software and XEdit application for controlling and monitoring audio, and
video broadcast signal paths for interfacing, routing distribution and other peripheral
devices.
The Kaleido-X series hardware—including the Kaleido-IP, Kaleido-Modular, Kaleido-X16,
and Kaleido-X multiviewer models—and the associated software products are designed
and produced by Miranda Technologies Inc.
For installation instructions, refer to the Quick Start Guide that shipped with your
multiviewer. Once you have completed your multiviewer’s initial installation, perform a
system verification (see Verifying your System Configuration, on page 11), load a layout on
the monitor wall if you haven’t done so already (see Loading a Layout, on page 18), and
then review the more advanced topics in Administration and Servicing, on page 381, to
fine-tune your initial system configuration.
After you have established that your basic configuration works as expected, move on to the
other chapters in this manual, to complete your system configuration until it meets your
actual monitoring requirements.
Note: In line with our commitment to environmental preservation, only the

Release Notes, the Quick Start Guide for your multiviewer model, and some
ancillary documents (e.g. welcome letters, warranty cards) are distributed in
printed form. All manuals are available on the Kaleido-X DVD. You can obtain
the latest version of the manuals, the Release Notes, as well as software and
useful data, from the Software and documentation section of Miranda’s
support portal.
3
Getting Started
System Overview
System Overview
This section reviews the different multiviewer models that support the Kaleido-X software:
• For the Kaleido-MX, see Kaleido-MX, on page 4.
• For the Kaleido-Modular-X, see Kaleido-Modular-X, on page 4.
• For the Kaleido-XQUAD and Kaleido-XQUAD-DUAL, see Kaleido-XQUAD, on page 4.
• For the Kaleido-IP X300 and Kaleido-IP X100, see Kaleido-IP, on page 5.
• For the KMV-3901, and KMV-3911, see Kaleido-Modular KMV-3901/3911, on page 5.
• For the Kaleido-X16 (single head) and Kaleido-X16 (dual head), see Kaleido-X16, on
page 6.
• For the Kaleido-X, see
• Kaleido-X (4RU), on page 8,
• Kaleido-X (7RU), on page 8, and
• Kaleido-X (14RU) Expansion, on page 9.
• For a configuration combining several multiviewers operated as a single system, see
Cluster, on page 10.
• For a system combining inputs from two or three multiviewers on a single monitor wall
display, see Cascade, on page 11.
Kaleido-MX
The Kaleido-MX standalone multiviewer system is ideal for production control rooms,
trucks and outside broadcast operations. Available in two form factors (1 RU, and 3 RU), the
Kaleido-MX supports up to 48 video inputs, and up to four multiviewer outputs.
Kaleido-Modular-X
The Kaleido-Modular-X offers a flexible and scalable multiviewer solution for TV
production optimized for the space, power and weight considerations found in studios and
outside broadcast trucks. FlexBridge coax cable bridging between the input and output
modules allows for the installation of the input stage next to the router or sources, and the
output stage next to displays, for simpler, cost-effective cabling with none of the risk
associated with HDMI extenders. The Kaleido-Modular-X supports up to 64 video inputs,
and up to four multiviewer outputs.
Kaleido-XQUAD
The Kaleido-XQUAD is a standalone quad-split multiviewer that is ideal for truck and studio
monitoring. It is available in two versions: the Kaleido-XQUAD features four 3Gbps/HD
inputs and a single multiviewer output (HDMI/HD-SDI), and the Kaleido-XQUAD-DUAL
offers eight 3Gbps/HD inputs and two multiviewer outputs. Both versions offer exceptional
display flexibility and outstanding space and energy efficiency, using a 1RU half width
frame with silent ventilation for installation within studios. The multiviewer can be used for
small installations with one or two displays, and in much larger configurations using
multiple Kaleido-XQUADs.
4
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Kaleido-IP
The Kaleido-IP can monitor and display HD and SD television programs distributed over IP,
across two HDTV displays. It supports MPEG-2 and H.264/AVC compressed video, and the
AAC, AC-3, MPEG-1, MPEG-2, MPEG-4 AAC LC, and MPEG-4 HE-AAC compressed audio
formats, within unencrypted DCII, DVB, or ATSC streams. In the case of HD signals, the
Kaleido-IP X300 models support concurrent decoding of up to 24 MPEG-2, or up to
16 H.264 video programs. In the case of SD signals, they support concurrent decoding of up
to 64 MPEG-2, or up to 32 H.264 programs. The compact Kaleido-IP X100 model supports
concurrent decoding of up to 8 HD MPEG-2, up to 6 HD H.264, up to 24 SD MPEG-2, or up to
12 H.264 programs.
Kaleido-Modular KMV-3901/3911
The Kaleido-Modular KMV-3901/3911 is an expandable, 8-input, dual-output multiviewer
(3Gbps/HD/SD) on one Densité Series card. Hosted in a Densité 3 frame, the
KMV-3901/3911 is the most space- and energy-efficient multiviewer system, with up to
20 multiviewer outputs per 3 RU frame, or up to 288 multiviewer outputs when connected
to an upstream router.
Overview of single card functionality
Kaleido-Modular KMV-3901/3911 Features

With its unmatched space and energy efficiency, Kaleido-Modular is ideal for production
monitoring in trucks. The multiviewer system integrates tightly with the highly space-
efficient NVISION 8288 Truck router (288 × 576 in 10 RU), as well as Densité signal
processing cards, and third-party production switchers. Control of a highly integrated
system is simplified with the RCP-200 panel, which can operate the router and multiviewer,
as well as signal processing and distribution cards.
The KMV-3901/3911 provides a subset of the features of the Kaleido-X (4RU) and (7RU)
models:
• Four or eight auto-sensing 3Gbps/HD/SD video inputs, one or two independent HDMI
outputs
5
Getting Started
Kaleido-X16
• Video signals can be repeated in up to eight windows, and scaled up to 1920 × 1200
pixels
• Audio signal, and video time code data can be extracted for on-screen display
• A reference signal from a REF-1801 Densité card can be used to minimize processing
delay, and reference clocks on the monitor wall
• Expansion through combination with upstream router
• DXF-200 extension module simplifies long runs to monitors from Densité frame, and is
a single fiber solution for supporting high-resolution (1920 × 1200) displays over
distances of up to 1000 m (3280 ft)
• Choice of multiviewer remote control panels: simple Kaleido-RCP2 and advanced RCP-
200 with router control
• Control by NVISION control panel and NV9000 system controller
• Super silent for installation within studios and control rooms
Kaleido-X16
The Kaleido-X16 is a compact, ultra-quiet multiviewer with 16 inputs, and one or two HDMI
outputs. It offers the highest level of image quality, and can be used with 3Gbps/HD/SD and
Analog video. It is ideal for small control rooms, although it can also be paired with routers
to create the very largest combined multiviewer and routing systems.
There are two models: Kaleido-X16-S (single head) and Kaleido-X16-D (dual head).
6
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Kaleido-X16-D system overview
The 1RU Kaleido-X16 is ideal for smaller monitoring facilities, such as call letter television
station master control rooms, mobile trucks and production fly cases, as well as community
television. The Kaleido-X16’s super silent design is highly appreciated for use within studios
and control rooms.
Kaleido-X16 provides a subset of the features of the Kaleido-X (4RU) and (7RU) models:
• 1RU non-modular frame
• 16 auto-sensing 3Gbps/HD/SD/Analog video inputs, one or two independent HDMI
outputs
• Two 3Gbps/HD/SD router outputs
• 3Gbps with 3D support (SMPTE ST 425-1 Level A & B)
• Expansion through combination with upstream router
• 4 analog channel, 2 digital channel audio monitoring
• One or two HD-SDI monitoring outputs with support of 3Gbps signals
• DVI and compressed (MPEG) video accepted with optional interfaces
7
Getting Started
Kaleido-X (4RU)
• DXF-100 optical DVI extension module simplifies long runs to monitors from frame, and
is a single fiber solution for supporting high-resolution (1920 × 1200) displays over
distances of up to 1000 m (3280 ft)
• Choice of multiviewer remote control panels: simple Kaleido-RCP2 and advanced RCP-
200 with router control
• Internal router control by NVISION control panel and NV9000 system controller
• Super silent for installation within studios and control rooms
Kaleido-X (4RU)
The Kaleido-X (4RU) is a multi-room, multi-image display processor and router in a single,
expandable chassis. Its unique mix of capabilities represents the most integrated
monitoring and routing solution. As a multi-image processor, it offers the highest level of
signal flexibility. Each chassis can display 32 HD, SD or Analog inputs any number of times,
across 4 displays of any resolution and orientation.
Kaleido-X (4RU) system overview
Kaleido-X (7RU)
The Kaleido-X (7RU) is a multi-room, multi-image display processor and router in a single,
expandable chassis. Its unique mix of capabilities represents the most integrated
8
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
monitoring and routing solution. As a multi-image processor, it offers the highest level of
signal flexibility. Each chassis can display 96 HD, SD or Analog inputs any number of times,
across 8 displays of any resolution and orientation. As a router, it offers switching of 96
unprocessed inputs to 48 HD/SD outputs for feeding monitors, test equipment and master
control or production switchers.
Kaleido-X (7RU) system overview
Kaleido-X (14RU) Expansion

Since version 3.00 of Miranda’s Kaleido-X software, it is possible to expand the input
connectivity of one Kaleido-X (7RU) frame to include that of a second. The two frames, each
with its own expansion (KXO-EXP) card, are connected by a high bandwidth cable, such
that all the output (KXO) modules on each frame (up to 6 in total) have access to all inputs
(KXI) on each frame (up to 192 in total) without any blocking or bandwidth limitations.
Using XEdit, the two frames can be configured as a single system, allowing rooms to share
input modules from either frame. The expansion card allows seamless sharing of video,
audio monitoring output, time code inputs, reference input, metadata information (CC,
XDS, alarms, etc.), and audio level meter data. Refer to the “Kaleido-X (7RU) Expansion”
chapter in the Kaleido-X (7RU) Hardware Description & Installation Manual for more
information.
9
Getting Started
Cluster
Kaleido-X (14RU) expansion system overview
Cluster
As of version 4.00 of the Kaleido-X software, it is possible to configure a cluster system,
allowing operation of layouts sharing output signals from multiple multiviewers fed by a
router, while using only one mouse, and one Kaleido-RCP2 or RCP-200. Refer to Creating a
Cluster, on page 81, for more information.
10
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Cluster system overview
Cascade
It is possible to configure up to three Kaleido-X16 or KMV-3901/3911 multiviewers as a
cascade system. Unlike the cluster, whose purpose is to increase the number of output
heads in a room, the cascade increases the maximum number of inputs that can be
displayed to a single monitor wall display. It is also possible to configure a hybrid cascade
system, involving one Kaleido-IP and one Kaleido-X, or one Kaleido-IP and one Kaleido-X16,
to monitor both baseband and IP sources at once, on the same monitor wall display. For
more information, refer to the appropriate Cascade Step-by-Step Configuration guide,
available on the Kaleido-X DVD, and from Miranda’s support portal.
Detailed Directions
Verifying your System Configuration
Verifying a Multiviewer’s Internal Statuses and Options

To perform a system verification
1 You can check internal system statuses via the Web-based XAdmin application. There
are two ways to access XAdmin:
Method 1: Use XEdit on a client PC to start the XAdmin application (see Installing XEdit,
on page 415). On the Configure menu, click Use XAdmin. This will open your default
Web browser.
Method 2: From a workstation on the same subnet, open a Web browser window and
type the multiviewer’s IP address in the address bar.1
11
Getting Started
The Kaleido-X home page appears.
Firefox users:
If you see a security warning instead of the home page, then refer to
Registering your Multiviewer's Security Credentials with your Browser, on
page 421.
2 Click the XAdmin button.

XAdmin’s Status and Options page appears, displaying a list of all modules and their
statuses.
1.The multiviewer must have Kaleido-X software version 2.10 or later.
12
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Internet Explorer users:

• If the page remains blank, then refer to Enabling the Compatibility View in
Internet Explorer 10, on page 429.
• If you see a certificate error message instead of the Status and Options
page, then refer to Registering your Multiviewer's Security Credentials
with your Browser, on page 421.
For example, in the case of a Kaleido-X multiviewer, the heading rows show the card
type, serial number, firmware and safemode versions, a card status indicator, and input
signal status indicators. The card status indicator shows whether the card is running
normally (green) or in safe mode (red). The signal status indicators reveals the presence
of a valid input signal at the corresponding connector.
Note: In the case of a Kaleido-IP multiviewer, this page does not yet provide
status information.
3 Move the pointer to an input signal status indicator to view the associated signal
format.
13
Getting Started
Status indicator Card type Serial number
Version information
Input signal status
Input signal format
4 Click the arrow button at the end of a module’s heading row to view more detailed
information about this module.
Expand details
Refresh
Reset card
• At any time you can click the Refresh button to make sure the data displayed for
the selected module is up to date.
• In the case of a Kaleido-X multiviewer, click the “Reset card” button at the end of a
card’s heading row to reset the card remotely, directly from your Web browser.
• In the case of a Kaleido-X16 or Kaleido-Modular multiviewer model, click the
“Reset multiviewer” button at the end of the multiviewer’s heading row to reset the
multiviewer remotely, directly from your Web browser.
• In the case of a Kaleido-IP multiviewer, clicking the arrow button does not yet
reveal any further details, and clicking the “Reset multiviewer” button is equivalent
to the procedure described under Restarting a Kaleido-IP Multiviewer, on
page 439, except that, in the first case, you get no feedback from XAdmin.
5 Review the enabled options for each module, and make sure that no error is reported.
14
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Note: In the case of a Kaleido-IP multiviewer, there are currently no options

that can be enabled via XAdmin. See Hardware and Software Options on
page 383 for more information on the options available for the different
multiviewer models.
6 If your system supports a GPI interface, you can check the main system statuses of the
multiviewer, to make sure that there are no errors or alerts related to system
temperature, power supply status, fan operation, or other card fault conditions.
15
Getting Started
Temperatures
PSU statuses
Fan statuses
The other system-related statuses should all be normal, although if you left the door
open when checking a GPI/Genlock card’s LEDs, you may see a warning under Chassis
Door Open Status.
Note: The KXA-GPI-GEN card, with support for GPI, is standard on the
Kaleido-X (7RU), and optional for the Kaleido-X (4RU). GPI support is built-in
on the Kaleido-X16, and Kaleido-Modular multiviewers. Not available on the
Kaleido-IP.
If you have a Kaleido-X (4RU) without a KXA-GPI-GEN card, then you will find the fan
and power supply statuses listed with the master output card’s information.
Fan statuses
PSU statuses
Temperatures
16
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
In the case of a Kaleido-X16 or Kaleido-Modular multiviewer, the relevant indicators are

found under the SYSTEM module.
Verifying a Kaleido-RCP2
To verify that the Kaleido-RCP2 is functioning normally
1 Log on to the appropriate room the Kaleido-RCP2 (see Logging on to the Kaleido-RCP2,
on page 408).
2 Test various operations using the Kaleido-RCP2 keyboard and the mouse (e.g. load
layout presets).
Verifying an RCP-200
To verify that the RCP-200 is functioning normally
• Log on to the appropriate room from the RCP-200 (see Logging on to the RCP-200, on
page 403).
On the RCP-200’s right-hand screen, you should see a thumbnail view of the room
displays in the Room View navigation pane, with one of the displays selected, and a
view of the monitor wall layout as it appears on the selected display.
Verifying an Audio Bridge Terminal

To verify that the ABT is functioning normally
• Inspect the ACTIVITY and front panel LEDs on the unit to make sure there are no error
conditions.
The ACTIVITY indicator is located on the right-hand side of the rear panel. This LED
reports the status of the Ethernet connection as follows:
Color Board Status

Off No link detected
Green Normal (good link)
17
Getting Started
Loading a Layout
Color Board Status

Orange Activity
Red Hardware fault
Flashing red Upgrading firmware
Two LEDs are visible on the front panel, one for each power supply. When lit, they both
indicate the same status:
Color Board Status

Green Normal
Flashing green Normal, rebooting
Orange Warning
Flashing Orange Warning, rebooting
Red Hardware fault
Flashing red Upgrading firmware
When the ABT is powered up, all three LEDs will be orange until the boot sequence is
terminated. This is a visual indicator that the LEDs are functioning properly.
Loading a Layout
If your system was configured prior to shipment, then the designated layout will show up
on all displays. Otherwise, a gray screen will appear with the following message in the
middle:
“No layout has been assigned to this room. Please load a layout.”
To load a layout on the monitor wall

1 Connect a mouse to the Kaleido-RCP2 or RCP-200 (if available) and log on to the
multiviewer from the control panel, if you have not already done so (see Logging on to
the Monitor Wall Using a Remote Control Panel, on page 29).
Alternatively, connect the mouse directly to one of the USB ports on the multiviewer.
2 Right-click anywhere on the monitor wall, point to Monitor wall (if you clicked a layout
element), and then click Load layout on the shortcut menu.
Monitor wall shortcut menu
18
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
A layout browser appears on the displays associated with the current room.
Note: By default, each room is associated with one multiviewer output or

output card. Most predefined layouts are configured to show all video
streams for a given input card (in the case of the Kaleido-X multiviewer
models) or all video streams connected to the multiviewer’s inputs (in the
case of a Kaleido-X16 or Kaleido-Modular multiviewer model).
3 Choose a default layout from the layout browser.

The video sources should appear on the room displays.
Example of a default layout showing 16 video streams
Note: You can also use the 10 LAYOUT PRESETS buttons on the Kaleido-
RCP2 to load the preconfigured default layout to the monitor wall.
19
Getting Started
Cabling Diagrams
Cabling Diagrams
Kaleido-IP
Cabling diagram for a Kaleido-IP X100 or X300 with two network adapters.
The Kaleido-IP X300 model may have two, or four additional DATA ports (LAN3 – LAN6).
KMV-3901/3911
Cabling diagram showing KMV-3911 rear panel.
20
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Kaleido-X16
Kaleido-X (4RU)
21
Getting Started
RS-422 Connection Diagram
Kaleido-X (7RU)
Kaleido-X (14RU)
Refer to the “Kaleido-X (7RU) Expansion” chapter in the Kaleido-X (7RU) Hardware
Description & Installation Manual.
RS-422 Connection Diagram

Note: For information on the KMV-3911 multiviewer’s RS-422 interface,
refer to the KMV-3911 Guide to Installation and Operation, available on the
DVD that shipped with your system, and from Miranda’s support portal.
In the case of a Kaleido-X multiviewer, each output card supports one RS-422 port over an
RJ-45 connector. The Kaleido-X16 supports two RS-422 serial inputs over RJ-45 connectors.
22
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
These inputs allow the multiviewer to connect to external serial devices such as a router,
production switcher, or router controller.
Note: The RS-422 ports each have an RJ-45 connector in order to preserve
space on a busy panel. The RS-422 interface specifies a DE-9 connector, so if
you are using this interface, you will require a DE-9-to-RJ-45 adapter.
Miranda supplies two adapter models, correctly wired for this application: a
straight adapter (part no. 1737-3000-102), and a crossover adapter (part no.
1792-3700-100).
The pinout for the RS-422 signals at the RJ-45 connectors on a Kaleido-X16—or on the
output cards’ rear panel, in the case of a Kaleido-X—, and the wiring diagrams for the
appropriate adapters, are shown here:
Pinout of each RS-422 RJ-45 DE-9 male DE-9 female

port’s RJ-45 connector Pinout of straight adapter Pinout of RS-422
on the multiviewer (Miranda part no. 1737-3000-102) connector on SMPTE
slave device
Standard wiring between multiviewer and devices wired to SMPTE “slave” specification (e.g. most
routers, Ross Synergy switchers, Nevion ETH-CON)
Pinout of each RS-422 RJ-45 DE-9 male DE-9 female

port’s RJ-45 connector Pinout of crossover adapter Pinout of RS-422
on the multiviewer (Miranda part no. 1792-3700-100) connector on SMPTE
master device
Standard wiring between multiviewer and devices wired to SMPTE “master” specification (e.g. Philips
Jupiter router control system, Miranda Presmaster PCS)
Note: The two RS-422 ports on the multiviewer side have no ground pin.
Using the appropriate DE-9S-to-RJ-45 adapter, an external device should be
able to communicate with a multiviewer despite the lack of a ground.
23
XEdit Application Shortcuts
The following is a list of shortcut keys available in XEdit to execute specific actions.
Action Shortcut key

Save Ctrl+S
Import sources from spreadsheeta Ctrl+I
Toggle the status bar Ctrl+Shift+B
Toggle the layout navigator Ctrl+Shift+N
Toggle the grid Ctrl+Shift+G
Toggle the Tools pane Ctrl+Shift+T
Toggle the Properties pane Ctrl+Shift+P
Toggle the Tips pane Ctrl+Shift+H
Restore the factory audio scales Ctrl+Shift+A
Restore the factory calibrations Ctrl+Shift+C
Restore the factory resolutions Ctrl+Shift+E
Restore the factory widget libraries Ctrl+Shift+L
Undo last operation Ctrl+Z
Redo last operation Ctrl+Y
Cut Ctrl+X
Copy Ctrl+C
Paste Ctrl+V
Delete selection Delete
Duplicate Ctrl+D
New Ctrl+N
Open Ctrl+O
Save as Ctrl+Shift+S
Close Ctrl+W
Create grid-type layout based on Ctrl+M
selection (Auto-layout)
Select all Ctrl+A
Send to back Ctrl+B
Send to front Ctrl+R
Unlock composite F2
Zoom in Ctrl+plus sign
Zoom out Ctrl+minus sign
a. Available for Kaleido-IP only (see Importing a Stream
Lineup, on page 88).
Operation of the Monitor Wall
This section introduces the Kaleido-X monitor wall features.
Key Concepts
Monitor wall The monitor wall refers to the group of display screens that are connected to
the output modules of a specific Kaleido-X system.
Room A room is a visual grouping of display screens. A room represents the physical
displays, positioned and sized as viewed by the user in an actual room.
Rooms can include full screen zones, and are defined and configured by using
the XEdit application. See Logging on to the Monitor Wall Using a Remote
Control Panel on page 29.
Automatic Automatic resolution detection eases the initial setup of a new display monitor
resolution by automatically determining the best resolution supported by the display.
detection This ensures that the multiviewer will be configured for the best video
quality. When a new display is connected, the multiviewer will detect the
EDID of the display on boot-up, and will set the correct resolution
accordingly. This means that displays can be hot-swapped. If an existing
display is replaced by a new one, the Kaleido-X will automatically change the
resolution without the need for a system restart. See Setting a Display
Monitor’s Output Resolution on page 58.
Note: The Kaleido-IP does not yet support automatic output resolution
detection.
Layout A layout refers to a visual grouping of monitors on the monitor wall. Layouts
are specific to a room, and created by using the XEdit application. Full screen
layouts, also defined in XEdit, are specific to a full screen zone within a
particular room. See Loading Layouts on page 34, and Displaying a Source in
Full Screen Mode, on page 36.
Dashboard The dashboard is a window that contains the system name, IP address and
software build version. It also displays error messages. The dashboard is
displayed at the bottom right of each display, on the monitor wall:
See Displaying the Dashboard on page 32, and Hiding the Dashboard, on
page 33.
Monitor A monitor (also called a widget) is an element that is part of a layout. XEdit
supports several types of primary elements (clocks, timers, video monitors,
audio monitors, UMDs, time code monitors, alarm monitors, etc.), that can be
grouped into composite monitors.
25
Key Concepts
Logical source A logical source (called a channel, in earlier versions of the documentation)
refers to a group of physical audio, video, or metadata sources, and text
attributes. A logical source can be used as a whole, and assigned to a virtual
monitor. See Assigning Sources to Monitors on page 44.
Video monitor A video monitor is a layout element used to define an area for displaying a
video signal. Within a video monitor, the video window is the active area
where the video signal is displayed.
Composite A composite monitor (also referred to as a composite, a monitor or a tile) is a
monitor group of primary elements that can be seen as a single object within a layout.
Composite monitors typically include a video window, one or more audio
level meters, and a UMD with two tallies.
Safe area The safe area is a configurable region inside a video window. The safe area
markers delimit this region (e.g. a 4:3 region inside a 16:9 window). See
Toggling Safe Area Markers on page 39.
Audio monitor An audio monitor (also called audio level meter or ALM) is a layout element
that provides a visual representation of sound. See Triggering Audio
Monitoring on page 56.
UMD An under monitor display (UMD) has a text label that can be static or
dynamically updated by a peripheral device. It can also have left and right
tally indicators. The UMD typically indicates the name of the video source
seen in a video monitor. You can edit static labels directly on the monitor
wall: see Editing UMD Text, on page 43, and Selecting an Input Method, on
page 44.
Time code A time code monitor displays the Ancillary Time Code (ATC) from an HD video
monitor signal, or the time code found in an embedded SDI video signal, part of the
vertical interval of an analog signal (VITC), or other external Linear Time Code
(LTC). This monitor also supports time code information from external
providers. Time code monitors can be used for monitoring the duration of
programs.
Timer A timer monitor is based on a timer defined within the Kaleido-X system.
Three timer modes are available: (1) UP: timer counts up starting from zero
up to a preset time, (2) DOWN: timer counts down from a preset time to zero,
and (3) REMAINING: timer counts down from the current time until it reaches
a preset time.
Timers are defined and configured in XEdit. They can be slaved to production
timers, assigned to logical sources, assigned to rooms or specific RCP users,
and controlled from the Kaleido-RCP2. See Using Timers on page 51.
Clock A clock is the visual representation of time in a video or display. It can be
based on a reference LTC signal or on the Kaleido-X system time. Clocks can
be in a digital or analog format.
Note: The KMV-3901/3911 supports digital clocks only.
26
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Subtitling A subtitling monitor defines an area for displaying subtitles extracted from a
monitor video signal. By using a subtitling monitor you can monitor subtitling from a
specific DVB stream, independently from the associated video stream.
Requires the CC/XDS option (see Hardware and Software Options, on
page 383). See Setting the DVB Subtitling Language from the Monitor Wall
on page 42.
Note: With the current version of the Kaleido-X software, the subtitling
monitor only supports DVB subtitles from Kaleido-IP sources.
V-chip monitor The V-chip monitor provides a visual indication of the V-chip rating from the
CC (608) metadata in an SD video signal, or from the CC (608) legacy caption
data, when such data is present within an HD video signal. Requires the
CC/XDS option (see Hardware and Software Options, on page 383).
Metadata A metadata monitor defines an area for displaying XDS data and digital
monitor content advisory descriptors extracted from a video signal. Requires the
CC/XDS option (see Hardware and Software Options, on page 383).
Action An action is an operation automatically performed in response to a specific
trigger. Monitor wall actions are directly associated with layout elements.
Background (floating) actions are actions that are global to the Kaleido-X
system. Unlike monitor wall actions, background actions are always available.
See Triggering Actions on page 54.
Trigger A trigger is an event that triggers an action. An example of a trigger could be
a double click on a monitor. Background actions are triggered by alarms or
by Gateway commands. In XEdit, when defining an action for a layout
element, you could specify, for instance, that a specific full screen layout be
displayed on the monitor wall in response to the trigger.
Alarm monitor Alarm monitors help you see the status of global and virtual alarms, but their
use is not limited to this type of alarms. When any alarm level is assigned to
an alarm monitor, the status of this alarm will be shown. When using the
global alarm at the text label level, it will display the text value of the alarm,
which is a readable name.
Alarm latch To prevent operators from missing temporary alarms on the monitor wall,
layout elements that are capable of displaying an alarm status (e.g. video
monitors, subtitling monitors, UMDs, alarm monitors) can be configured with
a latching mechanism. An alarm latch will keep the error state visible until
someone acknowledges the associated alarm. See Acknowledging Alarms on
page 55.
When you acknowledge an alarm, latched or current, the latched status is
reset to normal (i.e. unlatched). If the alarm is acknowledged while its status
indicates an error condition, the latched status is reset to normal, and will
only go back to error if the alarm status returns to normal and then to error
again.
Note: If you have an iControl application server, you may use its GSM alarm
browser to configure an acknowledgement snooze duration, which defines the
period during which alarm status changes detected by your multiviewer are
ignored, immediately after an alarm is acknowledged. Such a snooze period is
typically not desirable in the context of multiviewer alarms. Therefore, a
multiviewer’s GSM has its acknowledgement snooze duration set to 0 ms, by
default.
27
Key Concepts
Video monitors can provide alarm status information through their borders’
color and blinking behavior, and show the latched state as small indicators in
each corner of the video window. UMDs (text and tallies) and alarm monitors
can change their text or background color and blinking behavior, to reflect
the alarm status and show the latched state through their borders.
Red border indicates

current alarm state
Red corners indicate

latched state
See Configuring a Video Monitor’s Alarm Reporting Behavior on page 222,

Configuring a UMD’s Alarm Reporting Behavior, on page 240, and
Configuring Alarm Monitors, on page 244, for details on configuring the
alarm reporting and latching attributes for these layout elements.
The Kaleido-X system tracks the latched state of all alarm levels in a logical
source at all times, even when alarms are not being monitored on the wall, or
via SNMP traps or background actions. It could thus happen that some layout
elements will show a latched status indicator after a layout is loaded, even if
the current state of the corresponding alarm is normal and the alarm was not
monitored in the previous layout (the alarm occurred on the feed while the
feed was not monitored).
• Latching only occurs when an alarm severity is above normal (i.e. minor,
major, or critical). All other alarm states (unavailable, unassigned, pending,
unknown, etc.) are not latched.
• Unlatching a global alarm unlatches all its contributing alarms. Unlatching
the last alarm contributing to a global alarm unlatches the global alarm
itself.
• The color of the latch indicator reflects the highest level of alarm received
since the corresponding alarm was last unlatched.
Crosspoint A multiviewer can control upstream routers, and it can also be controlled as a
router itself. In addition, some multiviewer models—Kaleido-X16, Kaleido-
X (7RU), and Kaleido-X (14RU)—can have optional router outputs. A
crosspoint is the link inside a router between a source (input) and a
destination (output). See Changing Crosspoints on page 47.
Note: As of Kaleido-X version 5.20, the preferred method of controlling
sources, regardless of whether they are sources from an upstream router or
physical multiviewer inputs, is to configure logical sources.
28
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Detailed Directions
This section describes the actions you can perform on the Kaleido-X monitor wall.
Logging on to the Monitor Wall Using a Remote Control Panel

As network devices, the RCP-200 advanced remote control panel, and the Kaleido-RCP2
control panel provides access to any room, from any Kaleido-X system on the network. As a
security measure, access is controlled by a login procedure. Multiple RCP-200 and Kaleido-
RCP2 can be used by different users to access the same room concurrently. When multiple
RCP users are active in the same room, they each control a separate pointer on the monitor
wall, and can use the monitor wall menu independently, as long as they limit their actions
to separate displays.
In a default system configuration, a multiviewer’s video outputs are assigned to specific
rooms:
• On a Kaleido-X (7RU), the two DVI/VGA outputs from each of the dual-head Output
cards A, B, C and D are assigned to ROOM1, ROOM2, ROOM3 and ROOM4 respectively.
• On a Kaleido-X (4RU), the two DVI/VGA outputs from each of the dual-head Output
cards A and B are assigned to ROOM1 and ROOM2 respectively.
• On a Kaleido-X (14RU) expansion system, the two DVI/VGA outputs from each of the
dual-head Output cards A, B and C of each of Frame A and Frame B are assigned to
ROOM1, ROOM2, ROOM3, ROOM4, ROOM5 and ROOM6 respectively.
• On a Kaleido-X16-D, the HDMI outputs from each of the Output modules are assigned
to ROOMX16.
• On a Kaleido-X16-S, the HDMI output is assigned to ROOMX16.
• On a KMV-3901/3911, Kaleido-XQUAD, or Kaleido-XQUAD-DUAL, the HDMI outputs are
assigned to ROOM1.
• On a Kaleido-IP, the multiviewer outputs are assigned to ROOM.
• On a Kaleido-MX, or Kaleido-Modular-X, the HDMI outputs are assigned to ROOM1.
Logging on to the Monitor Wall Using the Kaleido-RCP2

To log on to a Kaleido-X room from the Kaleido-RCP2
1 On a Kaleido-RCP2 with an active connection to the network, press and hold the ENTER
button until the ESC button lights up. The Configuration menu appears, with the
ROOM SELECTION option displayed.
2 Press ENTER again to obtain the list of rooms from the Kaleido-X systems that are
currently available on the network.
The rooms are listed in the form [multiviewer name]/[room name]. If a room belongs to
a cluster system, its name appears once for each of the member multiviewers (e.g. if
two multiviewers, KX1 and KX2, are configured as a cluster, and ROOM1 includes
displays fed by both multiviewers, then both KX1/ROOM1 and KX2/ROOM1 will be
listed. You may select either one.
3 In the room list, select the room you wish to access by pressing the 2 key (to move up in
the list) or the 8 key (to move down the list).
29
Logging on to the Monitor Wall Using a Remote Control Panel
4 When the appropriate room name is highlighted, press ENTER to accept the new
selection, and then press ESC to exit the Configuration menu.
5 Press the LOGIN key.
The following message will appear on the LCD display:
LOGIN Position
Admin
6 Select your user name by pressing the 2 key (to move up in the list) or the 8 key (to
move down the list).
7 When you user name is highlighted, press ENTER.
8 When prompted, type the password for this user name, then press ENTER.
Note: By default, the user “Admin” has no password.
The message “Access granted” will appear on the LCD display if the login is successful. If
a mouse is connected to the Kaleido-RCP2, then you should be able to see and move
the mouse pointer on the monitor wall. Alternatively, use the Kaleido-RCP2’s mouse-
function keys.
Notes
• If at any time the message “Target system is offline” or “No login list
available” appears on the LCD display, press the ESC, ENTER and DEL keys
simultaneously and go back to step 1.
• If the room you were logged on to is part of a cluster system, try accessing
it from a different multiviewer (e.g. select KX2/ROOM1 instead of
KX1/ROOM1, from the room list).
• The pointer may flicker when two RCP users access displays fed by the
same multiviewer output.
• Two users accessing the same display will be limited to sharing a single
pointer.
For more information on the Kaleido-RCP2, please refer to the Kaleido-RCP2 Guide to
Installation and Operation, available on the DVD that shipped with your system, and from
Miranda’s support portal.
Logging on to the Monitor Wall Using the RCP-200

To log on to a Kaleido-X room from the RCP-200
1 On an RCP-200 with an active connection to the network, press the LIST button.
All devices, and Kaleido-X rooms, detected by the RCP-200 appear on the left screen.
Kaleido-X rooms are listed in the form [multiviewer name]\[room name].
If a room belongs to a cluster system, its name appears once for each of the member
multiviewers (e.g. if two multiviewers, KX1 and KX2, are configured as a cluster, and
ROOM1 includes displays fed by both multiviewers, then both KX1\ROOM1 and
KX2\ROOM1 will be listed. To determine the one you should select, review the
following:
30
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
• Has the RCP user configuration you wish to use been replicated on every member
of the cluster (see Replicating RCP Users Across a Cluster System, on page 86)?
• Do you need to control an external router whose configuration is available only
from one or some specific members of the cluster?
• Does your system configuration include actions that were configured only on one
or some specific members of the cluster?
• Do you need to control a timer from the monitor wall in a cascade room?
If any of the above elements is available only from one or some specific members, then
make sure you select the room name prefixed with the appropriate multiviewer name.
In the case of a cascade room, unless you remember which multiviewer you were
connected to when you added the timer you need to control, you will have to proceed
by trial and error.
2 Touch the room you wish to access (press the DOWN or UP soft keys to scroll the list as
needed).
3 If the list of users assigned to this room appears on the right-hand screen, touch the
user name under which you wish to log on, enter your password, and then touch LOG
IN.
The room’s monitor wall control panel appears on the right-hand screen, with the
ASSIGN CHANNEL category selected. If a mouse is connected to the RCP-200, then after
touching WALL MOUSE you should be able to see and move the mouse pointer on the
monitor wall.
Notes
• If the ROUTER SELECT category becomes selected instead of ASSIGN
CHANNEL, showing the following message on the right-hand screen:
“Please select a router from the left-hand screen,” then you still need to
complete the correlation between some monitor wall destinations and the
representation of the corresponding KX Router logical router. See
Correlating Monitor Wall Destinations and KX Router Logical Routers for
the RCP-200 on page 405.
• The RCP-200 will remember your user credentials until you log out
explicitly (by touching LOG OUT at the upper-right corner of the control
panel).
pointer.
For more information on the RCP-200, please refer to the RCP-200 Guide to Installation and
Operation, available on the DVD that shipped with your system, and from Miranda’s support
portal.
31
Using On-Screen Wall Control
Using On-Screen Wall Control
Locating the Mouse Pointer on the Monitor Wall

If you have a cluster system, the monitor wall may comprise a large number of display
screens, where the mouse pointer location is not always obvious.
To locate the mouse pointer on the monitor wall
• Click the middle mouse button.
A more recognizable square shape appears around the pointer.
Note: Configuring a larger pointer may also help. See Enabling the Large
Mouse Pointer for a Room on page 281, for details.
Using On-Screen Wall Control from the RCP-200

Once you have logged on to a room from the RCP-200 control panel, a mouse connected to
one of the panel’s USB port automatically switches to the monitor wall, while the RCP-200’s
touch screen features remain available. You can alternate using the mouse between the
RCP-200’s right-hand screen, and the monitor wall.
To use the mouse on the RCP-200’s right-hand screen
• Touch the WALL MOUSE category.
The category’s background turns a darker shade (purple), and the mouse pointer
appears on the RCP-200’s right-hand screen.
To use the mouse on the monitor wall
• Touch the WALL MOUSE category.
The category’s background turns a lighter shade (mauve), and the mouse pointer
appears on the monitor wall.
Synchronizing the RCP-200’s Head View with the Monitor Wall

The RCP-200’s Kaleido-X control panel does not automatically reflect changes to the current
layout that were not performed from the RCP-200—for example, someone may have
loaded a different layout, or changed assignments, from another control panel, from XEdit,
or by using the monitor wall mouse.
To synchronize the RCP-200’s head view with the monitor wall
• Press the REFRESH knob.
Displaying the Dashboard

Whenever your Kaleido-X detects an error, it will automatically display the dashboard on
every monitor of the monitor wall. When all errors are resolved, then the system
automatically closes the dashboard on every monitor. You can also display the dashboard
32
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
as needed, to view the Kaleido-X system name, IP address, software version and current
error messages. In such cases you must close the dashboard manually.
Note: It is possible to disable the automatic display of the dashboard on

specific displays. See Disabling the Dashboard on page 188 for details on
how to configure this option.
To display the dashboard

1 Right-click a monitor. On the shortcut menu, point to Monitor wall, and then click
Show dashboard to display the dashboard associated with the current head.
Show dashboard
Monitor wall shortcut menu (from composite monitor shortcut menu)
Note: If you right-click the monitor wall background directly, then the
monitor wall shortcut menu appears immediately, and you can click Show
dashboard directly:
After a brief delay, the dashboard appears at the bottom-right corner of the display
monitor, and the command Hide dashboard replaces Show dashboard on the menu.
Dashboard on the monitor wall
Hiding the Dashboard

To hide the dashboard
• Click the × button at the bottom-right corner of the dashboard. Alternatively, right-click
anywhere on the monitor wall, point to Monitor wall on the shortcut menu (if you
33
Loading Layouts
clicked a layout element), and then click Hide dashboard to hide the dashboard on the
current display.
Hide dashboard
Note: Clicking the × button closes the dashboards on every display

monitor in the room if they were displayed automatically.
To hide all the dashboards

• Right-click anywhere on the monitor wall, point to Monitor wall on the shortcut menu
(if you clicked a layout element), and then click Hide all dashboards to hide the
dashboard on every display in the room.
Hide all dashboards
Note: When a dashboard is closed while the system is in an error condition,

it will automatically reappear after 60 minutes, or when a new error occurs.
Loading Layouts
Note: Due to a limitation in XEdit’s support for drag-and-drop operations,

when you first load a new layout on the monitor wall, you may notice that a
monitor’s source or destination assignment is incorrect. Open the layout in
XEdit, click the corresponding monitor, verify the Source and Monitor wall
destination attributes indicated in the Properties pane, and correct them as
needed. See Assigning Logical Sources or Monitor Wall Destinations to
Monitors on page 209.
Loading a Layout by Using the Mouse

To load a layout on the monitor wall, by using the mouse
1 Right-click anywhere on the monitor wall, point to Monitor wall (if you clicked a layout
element), and then click Load layout on the shortcut menu.
Load layout
The layout chooser appears.
34
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
2 Select the layout you wish to load, from the set of layouts defined for this room, and
then click OK.
The new layout appears on the monitor wall.
Loading a Layout by Using the Kaleido-RCP2

To load a layout on the monitor wall, by using the Kaleido-RCP2
1 Press LOAD on the Kaleido-RCP2.
The layout chooser appears.
2 Select the layout you wish to load, from the set of layouts defined for this room, and
then click OK.
The new layout appears on the monitor wall.
Using Layouts Presets

To load a layout using the Kaleido-RCP2’s preset buttons
• Press the appropriate preset button (1-10) on the Kaleido-RCP2.
The layout associated with the preset button for the current user appears on the
monitor wall. See “Assigning Room Layouts to an RCP User’s Presets” on page 280 for
more details.
35
Displaying a Source in Full Screen Mode
Loading a Layout by Using the RCP-200

To load a layout on the monitor wall, by using the RCP-200
1 Touch LAYOUT SELECT on the RCP-200’s right-hand screen.
The layout chooser view appears.
2 Rotate the TAKE knob to locate the layout you wish to load, scrolling the list as needed.
3 Once you have selected the layout you wish to load, press TAKE.
After a moment, the new layout appears on the monitor wall, and the RCP-200’s right-
hand screen returns to the ASSIGN CHANNEL panel.
Refreshing a Layout
To refresh a layout
• Right-click anywhere on the monitor wall, point to Monitor wall (if you clicked a layout
element), and then click Refresh on the shortcut menu.
Refresh
Displaying a Source in Full Screen Mode

To display a source in full screen mode from the Kaleido-RCP2
1 Move the pointer over the video source you wish to display in full screen mode.
2 Press FULL SCREEN on the Kaleido-RCP2.
The full screen layout assigned to the current user is loaded into the full screen zone.
To display a source in full screen mode from the RCP-200
1 Touch the WALL MOUSE category if it is not already selected, and then move the
pointer over the video source you wish to display in full screen mode on the monitor
wall.
2 If you have yet to assign the FULL SCREEN wall function to one of the programmable
knobs, rotate the knob you wish to program until FULL SCREEN is selected, and then
press the knob.
FULL SCREEN appears above the programmed knob.
3 Press the FULL SCREEN knob.
The full screen layout assigned to the current user is loaded into the full screen zone.
To close the full screen view
• Move the pointer over the full screen zone, and then press FULL SCREEN again, on the
Kaleido-RCP2 or RCP-200.
Note: A full screen layout can also be loaded by configuring actions in

XEdit. See Managing Layouts on page 200, for information on creating a full
screen layout, and refer to Creating Actions, on page 267, for detailed
instructions.
36
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Changing a Source’s Aspect Ratio

To change the aspect ratio using the Kaleido-RCP2
• Move the pointer over the video source whose aspect ratio you wish to change, and
then press ASPECT RATIO on the Kaleido-RCP2. Continue pressing ASPECT RATIO to
alternate between the available aspect ratio options (4:3, 16:9, and possibly a third
custom aspect ratio if one was defined in XEdit for the monitor).
To change the aspect ratio using the RCP-200
pointer over the video source whose aspect ratio you wish to change on the monitor
wall.
2 If you have yet to assign the ASPECT RATIO wall function to one of the programmable
knobs, rotate the knob you wish to program until ASPECT RATIO is selected, and then
press the knob.
ASPECT RATIO appears above the programmed knob.
3 Press the ASPECT RATIO knob.
The video source’s aspect ratio changes. Continue pressing ASPECT RATIO to alternate
between the available aspect ratio options (4:3, 16:9, and possibly a third custom
aspect ratio if one was defined in XEdit for the monitor).
To change the aspect ratio using the mouse
1 Right-click the video source.
2 On the shortcut menu, point to Aspect Ratio, and then click 4:3 or 16:9.
Note: There may be one more choice on the menu if you set a custom
aspect ratio in XEdit, for this monitor. See Setting a Video Monitor’s Aspect
Ratio on page 214.
The video is resized accordingly within the layout.
Video Cropping/Zooming
To toggle the cropping mode using the Kaleido-RCP2
• To change the current cropping mode, move the mouse pointer over the video source
whose cropping mode you wish to change, and then press the UNDERSCAN button on
the Kaleido-RCP2. Continue pressing UNDERSCAN to alternate between underscan and
overscan mode.
37
To toggle the cropping mode using the RCP-200

pointer over the video source whose cropping mode you wish to change on the
monitor wall.
2 If you have yet to assign the UNDERSCAN wall function to one of the programmable
knobs, rotate the knob you wish to program until UNDERSCAN is selected, and then
press the knob.
UNDERSCAN appears above the programmed knob.
3 Press the UNDERSCAN knob.
The video source’s cropping mode changes. Continue pressing UNDERSCAN to
alternate between underscan and overscan mode.
To toggle the cropping mode using the mouse
• Right-click the video source.
If the video is in underscan mode, then the shortcut menu will allow you to change to
overscan.
Overscan
If the video is in overscan mode, then the shortcut menu will allow you to change to
underscan.
Underscan
Notes
• The Kaleido-IP does not yet support cropping.
• The overscan margins are set to 5% by default. They can be customized in
XEdit (see Cropping Mode, on page 197).
38
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Notes (continued)
• Safe title area and aspect ratio markers follow the video signal (e.g. if the
safe title area is within 5% of top, left, right and bottom, then when the
video is in default overscan mode, the safe title area markers will not
appear).
Toggling Safe Area Markers

To toggle the safe area markers on a video using the Kaleido-RCP2
• Move the pointer over the video source, and then press SAFE AREA on the Kaleido-
RCP2. Continue pressing SAFE AREA to toggle the markers.
To toggle the safe area markers on a video using the RCP-200
pointer over the video source whose cropping mode you wish to change on the
monitor wall.
2 If you have yet to assign the SAFE AREA wall function to one of the programmable
knobs, rotate the knob you wish to program until SAFE AREA is selected, and then press
the knob.
SAFE AREA appears above the programmed knob.
3 Press the SAFE AREA knob.
The safe area markers appear inside the video window. Continue pressing SAFE AREA
to toggle the markers.
To toggle the safe area markers on a video using the mouse
1 Right-click the video source, and then click Safe Area on the shortcut menu.
Safe area
The safe area markers appear inside the video window.
2 Click Safe Area again on the shortcut menu, to hide the markers.
39
Displaying Subtitles and Closed Caption Text
Notes
• The KMV-3901/3911 does not support extraction of subtitles and closed
captions.
• Only the Kaleido-IP supports extraction of DVB subtitles.
• The Kaleido-IP supports extraction of CEA-608 and CEA-708 closed
captions, in addition to DVB subtitles.
Setting the Text Mode

To change the text mode for a video monitor
1 Right-click the appropriate video monitor on the monitor wall.
2 If the current text mode indicator is Text (CC/subtitling), then click Enable text on the
shortcut menu, to first enable the display of subtitles and closed captions, and then
right-click the video monitor again.
3 On the shortcut menu, point to the text mode indicator —either Text (CC/subtitling),
CC (608), CC (708), DVB subtitling, or Teletext & subtitling, then point to Text mode,
and click the text mode you wish to apply.
40
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
To prevent the menu from being too crowded by CC (608), CC (708), DVB subtitling, and
Teletext/subtitling options, its content (label, icon and available choice) changes,
depending on the current video format:
Signal type Text Mode Indicator Label Available choices

SD-SDI/CVBS 525, Auto CC (608) Off, CC1, Text mode sub-
MPEG-2, H.264 menu
Any CC (608)
SD-SDI/CVBS 625 Auto Teletext & Off, Page A, Edit pages,
subtitling Text mode sub-menu
Any Teletext &
subtitling
HD-SDI, MPEG-2, Auto CC (708) Off, Service 1 to Service
H.264 63, Text mode sub-menu
Any CC (708)
MPEG-2, H.264 Auto DVB subtitling Off, available language
services, Text mode sub-
Any DVB
menu
subtitling
Other / Unknown Auto Text Enable text, Auto sense,
(CC/subtitling) CC (608), CC (708),
Teletext & subtitling,
DVB subtitling.
Switching Closed Captioning On/Off

To switch CC (608) closed captioning on/off
• Right-click the appropriate composite or video monitor on the monitor wall, point to
CC (608), and then click either CC1 or Off.
To switch CC (708) closed captioning on/off

• Right-click the appropriate composite or video monitor on the monitor wall, point to
CC (708), and then click either the appropriate service number or Off.
41
Note: The shortcut menu displays Service 1 to Service 6. Use the Extended
services sub-menu to select from the Service 7 to Service 63 range. When
an extended service is enabled it is added to the shortcut menu below
Service 6.
Setting the DVB Subtitling Language from the Monitor Wall

To set the decoded DVB subtitling language for a monitor on the wall
• Right-click the appropriate composite, video, or subtitling monitor, point to DVB
subtitling, and then click the language you wish to monitor.
Note: When monitoring a program that includes DVB subtitling based on a

non-supported version of ETSI EN 300 743, the Kaleido-IP raises the DVB
subtitle invalid alarm and no subtitling appears on the monitor wall.
To switch DVB subtitling off

• Right-click the monitor, point to DVB subtitling, and then click Off.
Selecting a Teletext/Subtitling Page from the Monitor Wall

To change the decoded teletext/subtitling page for a composite or video monitor
• Right-click the monitor, point to Teletext & Subtitling, and then click Page A ([page
number]) on the shortcut menu.
42
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
The shortcut menu displays Page A (###) where “###” is the number of the actual page
being monitored (from 100 to 899).
It is possible to change the assignment using the Edit pages sub-menu. This menu
allows you to configure the page selection for the current input.
To switch teletext/subtitling off
• Right-click the monitor, point to Teletext & Subtitling, and then click Off.
Editing UMD Text

To edit the text on a UMD
1 Right-click the UMD whose text label you wish to modify, and then click Edit text on
the shortcut menu.
The UMD text area becomes editable.
2 Type the new text, and then press ENTER on the Kaleido-RCP2, RCP-200, or external
keyboard.
The UMD displays the new text.
43
Selecting an Input Method
Selecting an Input Method
Note: In the case of a KMV-3901/3911 multiviewer, the current version of

the Kaleido-X software does not support input methods on the monitor
wall. As a workaround, you can use XEdit, open the layout that contains the
text you wish to modify (e.g. static UMD text, logical source text level), and
then use the appropriate input method from your client PC or laptop.
To select an input method

1 Click the appropriate composite or video monitor on the monitor wall.
2 Press left Alt+Shift+1 on the external keyboard.
The Select Input Method menu appears.
3 On the Select Input Method menu, click the appropriate input method.
You can now type text in your language of choice, using an external keyboard
connected to the Kaleido-RCP2.
Assigning Sources to Monitors

Any monitor in a layout can be assigned a logical source in XEdit. It is possible to change
the logical source assignment directly on the monitor wall.
Note: Logical source assignments can also be changed by configuring

actions in XEdit. See Creating Actions on page 267 for more information.
Assigning a Logical Source to a Monitor by Using the Kaleido-RCP2

To assign a logical source to a monitor, by using the Kaleido-RCP2’s CHANNEL button
1 Move the pointer over the monitor that is to be assigned a logical source, and then
press CHANNEL on the Kaleido-RCP2.
The Assign Source window appears.
Current assignment
44
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
The label of each category/index button in Assign Source is based on recurring strings
found in the logical source names available for your system. The Src box shows the
current assignment.
2 Click through the categories until the Pst box shows the logical source you wish to
assign to the selected monitor. For example, if you wish to assign the logical source
named “/Input B/Channel 16” to the monitor, click Input B, 1, and then 6.
3 Click Take.
The selected logical source is now assigned to the monitor.
4 Click the × button to close the Assign Source window.
Assigning a Logical Source to a Monitor by Using the RCP-200

Although logical source assignments can be accomplished via the CHANNEL monitor wall
function (see page 45), you may find the RCP-200’s category/index router view more
convenient. To use the RCP-200’s category/index panel, your multiviewer system must have
been configured to be controlled as a router. In a layout, the RCP-200 can only control
monitors that have been assigned a monitor wall destination.
To assign a logical source to a monitor, by using the RCP-200’s Category/Index panel
1 Select the appropriate head from the room view, by rotating the HEAD knob (or by
touching the DISPLAY SELECT category, and then touching the desired room display), if
needed.
2 Touch the monitor whose source assignment you wish to change.
The monitor’s border turns yellow, indicating that this monitor is a monitor wall
destination, and the RCP-200’s category/index panel appears on the left-hand screen.
The label of each category/index button is based on recurring strings found in the
logical source names available for your system. The Src and Dst areas show the current
source assignment and the monitor wall destination number for the selected monitor.
3 Touch through the categories until the Pst area shows the logical source you wish to
named “/Input B/Channel 16” to the monitor, touch Input B, 1, and then 6.
4 Press Take.
To assign a logical source to a monitor, by using the RCP-200’s CHANNEL knob
pointer over the composite or video monitor whose source assignment you wish to
change.
45
Assigning Sources to Monitors
2 If you have yet to assign the CHANNEL wall function to one of the programmable
knobs, rotate the knob you wish to program until CHANNEL is selected, and then press
the knob.
CHANNEL appears above the programmed knob.
3 Press the CHANNEL knob.
The Assign Source window appears on the monitor wall.
Current assignment
current assignment.
5 Click Take.
Assigning a Logical Source to a Monitor by Using the Mouse

To assign a logical source to a monitor, by using the mouse
1 Right-click the monitor that is to be assigned a logical source.
2 On the shortcut menu, point to Assign source to [component] (where [component]
will be monitor, video, UMD, tally, audio meter, status alarm, time code, metadata
display, subtitling, or clock, depending on the monitor you clicked).
46
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
The Assign Source window appears.
Current assignment
current assignment.
4 Click Take.
Changing Crosspoints
Changing Logical Sources Assignments on a Kaleido-X Configured as a

Router
To change a monitor’s source assignment by using a router control device or application
• Apply a crosspoint change to route the desired Kaleido-X logical source to the video
monitor whose source assignment you wish to change on the monitor wall, in the same
way you would do for any router controlled by the device or application you have.
47
The video from the first video level assignment within the selected logical source
appears in the video window.
When the current layout is reloaded, either of the following two situations may apply.
• No logical source: If there was no logical source associated with the monitor, then
the Kaleido-X will remember the new source assignment.
• Not a monitor wall destination: If the monitor was not already configured as a
monitor wall destination, then the layout will be reloaded in its initial state, as it
was configured in XEdit.
Viewing Assignment Information

To view the current assignment information for a video monitor
• Right-click the video monitor, and then point to Info on the menu.
Monitor-wall destination
Current logical source
Physical source ID
The following information appears, as a submenu:
Dest Name associated with this monitor when considered as a

destination in the context of the KX Router logical router
Src Name of the logical source currently assigned to this
monitor.
Phy Identifier associated with the physical multiviewer input
providing the current signal to this monitor.
Notes
• In the case of a Kaleido-IP, the physical input information (Phy) is not
relevant.
• The information shown is not dynamic. To view the latest information,
close the menu, and then open it again.
• The physical input information (Phy) indicates “Unassigned” when there
are no logical source assigned to the monitor, or when the current logical
source does not include any video level.
48
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Notes (continued)
• The physical input information (Phy) may indicate “Unresolved” in
situations such as the following:
• the router that provides the current source to the multiviewer is not
configured properly;
• the router interconnections are not configured properly;
• there is no communication between the router and the multiviewer;
• an input card was removed (in the case of a Kaleido-X multiviewer
model);
• there are not enough multiviewer inputs connected to the router to
handle all the signals being routed to monitor wall destinations.
Changing an Internal Router Crosspoint
Notes
• This feature is only available on Kaleido-X (7RU), Kaleido-X (14RU), and
Kaleido-X16 multiviewers, with the SDI Router Output option, and whose
internal router is properly configured within the first level of the KX Router
logical router See Configuring a Multiviewer’s Internal Router, on page 326
for more details.
• In the case of a Kaleido-X (14RU) expansion system, to be able to send a
video signal to a router output on either frame, the internal routers must
be connected by expansion cables, and router expansion must have been
properly configured in XEdit. Refer to “Configuring Router Card Expansion”
in the Kaleido-X (7RU) Hardware Description & Installation Manual, for
more information.
To change a crosspoint in the internal router

1 Right-click the appropriate composite or video monitor on the monitor wall.
2 On the shortcut menu, point to Send to [router] output (where [router] will be the
name of the first logical router mapped to your multiviewer’s router outputs), navigate
to the appropriate logical output, and then select it.
49
The source signal displayed on the monitor is routed to the selected destination.
Changing an External Router Crosspoint
Note: As of version 5.20 of the Kaleido-X software, when a multiviewer

manages an upstream router, you should manage the router’s physical
sources as logical sources within the multiviewer system (see page 157).
Router sources can thus be assigned to monitor wall elements transparently,
just as sources connected directly to the multiviewer’s inputs (see Assigning
Sources to Monitors, on page 44). The KMV-3901/3911 multiviewers do not
support the procedure described below.
To change an external router crosspoint

1 Right-click a composite or video monitor on the monitor wall.
2 On the shortcut menu point to Assign [router] input (where [router] will be the name
of a logical router whose outputs are connected to the multiviewer inputs), navigate to
the input you wish to assign to the monitor, and then select it.
50
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
The multiviewer requests the specified source signal from the router.
Note: What you see on the wall is not a list of physical inputs, but of logical
inputs (labels). Once you have established your configuration in XEdit, you
always work with logical devices/levels.
Using Timers
Timers can be assigned to timer monitors in a layout. Any user can control such timers by
using the timer monitor’s buttons and shortcut menu. An RCP user can be assigned a
specific timer. This allows using the numeric keypad on an external keyboard connected to
the Kaleido-RCP2 to control the timer.
Controlling a Timer by Using the Timer Monitor’s Buttons and the Shortcut
Menu
Reset Start/Stop Timer mode End behavior
51
Using Timers
Stop Down
Overrun Up
Remaining
Loop
Notes
• Timer monitors display time in HH:MM:SS format. Even if the monitor is
synchronized with an LTC source, frame count is not displayed.
• Using a timer monitor’s Reset, Timer mode or End behavior buttons will
stop the timer, if it was running.
To configure an interactive timer monitor on the monitor wall

1 Right-click the timer you wish to configure.
2 On the shortcut menu, point to Mode, navigate to the appropriate timer mode, and
then click the desired end behavior.
Alternatively, you can set the mode and behavior directly, by clicking the timer
monitor’s Timer mode, and End behavior buttons:
• Click the Timer mode button to select one of three modes: Overrun, Stop or Loop.
• Click the End behavior button to select one of three modes: Down, Up or
Remaining.
52
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
The timer monitor is updated accordingly.
3 Use the Preset controls to set a new preset time.
4 Click the Reset button to reset the timer to its initial value (based on timer mode and
preset time).
5 Click the Start button to start the timer.
Controlling a Timer by Using an External Numeric Keypad

If a timer is assigned to the current RCP user, or else if a timer is assigned by default for the
room, then the external keyboard’s numeric keypad controls this specific timer.
Note: The reserved keys are always enabled, whether Num Lock is set or
not.
53
Triggering Actions
To configure your assigned timer, by using a numeric keypad

• Press the slash key (“/”) to set the timer mode and end behavior. Keep pressing the key
to cycle through all the available options, until the buttons show the appropriate
settings.
• Press the plus key (“+”) to reset the timer. (This will also stop the timer if it was running.)
• Press the Enter key to start/pause the timer.
• Use the number keys to set or modify the preset time.
Triggering Actions
Notes
• An Action’s trigger is determined when the Action is created in XEdit. See
Creating Actions on page 267 for more information.
• To create background actions that can be triggered from the RCP-200’s
programmable knobs, refer to Creating an Action that can be Triggered
via a Gateway Command, on page 273.
Triggering an Action from the RCP-200

To trigger a background action from the RCP-200’s programmable knobs
1 If you have yet to assign the action you wish to trigger to one of the programmable
knobs, rotate the knob you wish to program until the action is selected, and then press
the knob.
The action’s name appears above the programmed knob.
2 Press the knob to trigger the action.
Triggering an Action from the Monitor Wall

To trigger a monitor wall action
1 Move the pointer over a monitor associated with the action you wish to trigger.
The pointer changes to a hand icon.
2 If the action is not triggered automatically, click or double-click the monitor.
Triggering GPI Output Events
Note: This topic does not apply to the Kaleido-IP.
To trigger a GPI output event

1 In XEdit, configure the appropriate GPI line’s direction as an output (system calibration).
2 Create an action to toggle the GPI output on/off state, and assign it to a monitor.
3 Export the database to the Kaleido-X.
4 Trigger the action by clicking the monitor.
54
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
The GPI line’s state changes.
Note: GPI lines configured as outputs can have their state set manually for
test purposes in XEdit’s System tab:
Acknowledging Alarms
Acknowledging Alarms on the Monitor Wall

To acknowledge an alarm, by using the Kaleido-RCP2
• Move the pointer over the monitor whose alarm state you wish to acknowledge, and
then press the UNLATCH STATUS button on the Kaleido-RCP2.
To acknowledge an alarm, by using the RCP-200
pointer over the monitor whose alarm state you wish to acknowledge on the monitor
wall.
2 If you have yet to assign the UNLATCH STAT wall function to one of the programmable
knobs, rotate the knob you wish to program until UNLATCH STAT is selected, and then
press the knob.
UNLATCH STAT appears above the programmed knob.
3 Press the UNLATCH STAT knob.
To acknowledge an alarm, by using the mouse
• Right-click the monitor whose alarm state you wish to acknowledge, and then click
Unlatch/Acknowledge on the shortcut menu.
Unlatch/Acknowledge
To acknowledge all current alarms in a room

• Right-click the monitor wall, point to Monitor wall (if you clicked a monitor), and then
click Unlatch/Acknowledge all on the shortcut menu.
55
Triggering Audio Monitoring
Unlatch/Acknowledge all
This will acknowledge every alarm monitored in the current room.
Acknowledging Alarms by Using an Action

To acknowledge alarms, by using an action
• Create a Unlatch/Acknowledge all action. This action can be assigned to a monitor on
the monitor wall, it can be triggered by loading or unloading a layout, or it can be a
background action. See Creating Actions on page 267 for details.
Triggering Audio Monitoring
Note: Before connecting a display or AV receiver to a Kaleido-IP

multiviewer, make sure the multiviewer is powered off. In the advent that
you have connected such a device while the multiviewer was running, you
must restart the multiviewer for audio monitoring to be functional. See
Restarting and Shutting Down a Kaleido-IP Multiviewer on page 437.
Triggering Audio Monitoring by Using the mouse, the RCP-200, or the

Kaleido-RCP2
Note: If you have yet to assign the AUDIO MONITOR wall function to one of
the RCP-200’s programmable knobs, rotate the knob you wish to program
until AUDIO MONITOR is selected, and then press the knob. AUDIO
MONITOR appears above the programmed knob.
To trigger audio monitoring, by using the mouse, the RCP-200, or the Kaleido-RCP2
• Move the pointer over an audio monitor, and then
• click the monitor
• press AUDIO MONITORING on the Kaleido-RCP2
• press the AUDIO MONITOR programmable knob on the RCP-200
This will route the monitor’s audio source to the monitoring output assigned to the
current RCP user.
• Move the pointer over a video monitor, and then
56
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual

This will route the specific audio level associated with the video monitor, based on the
assigned logical source.
• Move the pointer over any other monitor, and then
This will route the first audio level of the associated logical source to the monitoring
output.
Audio monitors that have an audio monitoring indicator (see Configuring Audio
Monitors, on page 227) and that are currently assigned the same audio level, will turn
the color associated with the current display (see Calibrating the Audio Monitoring
Color, on page 120), showing that someone is listening at this specific display.
Audio monitoring indicator
If multiple users are listening to the same audio source at the same time, then the
indicator will show one color only: (1) the color associated with a display in the same
room (2) the color associated with the display at the monitoring output that was
enabled last in the room.
Controlling the Audio Monitoring Volume from the Kaleido-RCP2

• Adjust the audio volume for your assigned monitoring output by using the up and
down volume buttons on the Kaleido-RCP2.
• Mute the audio by pressing the Mute button on the Kaleido-RCP2.
• Attenuate the volume by 20 dB by pressing the -20 dB button on the Kaleido-RCP2.
Controlling the Audio Monitoring Volume from the RCP-200

Pressing the VOL knob repeatedly alternates between the normal, mute, and -20 dB audio
output mode.
• Adjust the audio volume for your assigned monitoring output by rotating the VOL
knob.
• Mute the audio by pressing the VOL knob until MUTE appears above the knob.
• Attenuate the volume by 20 dB by pressing the VOL knob until -20 dB appears above
the knob.
57
Setting a Display Monitor’s Output Resolution
Triggering Audio Monitoring by Using an Action
Note: All audio and video monitors are configured by default, with a
Monitor audio action triggered by a single click.
To trigger audio monitoring, by using an action

• Create a Monitor audio action, for the audio source you wish to monitor. This action can
be assigned to a monitor on the monitor wall, or it can be a background action. See
Creating Actions on page 267 for details.
Setting a Display Monitor’s Output Resolution
Note: This section does not apply to the KMV-3901/3911, Kaleido-XQUAD,

Kaleido-MX, and Kaleido-Modular-X, which do not support setting a display
output resolution from the monitor wall. For these multiviewers, you can set
your displays’ output resolution by using XEdit, the Densité controller’s local
control panel (or a control panel in iControl, if available). See Configuring
Displays on page 180, or refer to the Quick Start Guide for your multiviewer,
for details.
With a Kaleido-IP, Kaleido-X, or Kaleido-X16, you can set a display’s output resolution from
the monitor wall. This is useful if you don’t have access to another computer. If there is no
output on a display, you can reset the output resolution to 1280 × 1024 @ 60 Hz, by using a
keyboard shortcut: hold down the Ctrl and Alt keys, and then press R.
• In the case of a Kaleido-X, connect the keyboard to a USB port on the output card
associated with the display. If two displays are connected to this output card, then the
resolution is applied to both. Alternatively, use a keyboard connected to the Kaleido-
RCP2.
• In the case of a Kaleido-X16, connect the keyboard to one of the USB ports on the
multiviewer. If two displays are connected to the multiviewer, then the resolution is
applied to both. Alternatively, use a keyboard connected to the Kaleido-RCP2 (if
available).
Note: If the keyboard is connected to a Kaleido-RCP2, the Keyboard

attribute for the current RCP user must have been set to “US” in XEdit,
otherwise the shortcut may not work (i.e. it could be parsed and converted
to a special character, depending on the selected locale). In the case of a
Kaleido-X, the shortcut will reset the resolution on the active display (the
one where the mouse pointer is located) and on the other display connected
to the same output card, if any.
Specifying a Display Output Resolution from the Monitor Wall

To set your display output resolution from the Monitor Wall
1 Right click the monitor wall background, and then click Display Resolution on the
menu.
58
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
2 Choose a value from the Default DVI resolution list.
3 Click OK.
Enabling EDID Auto-Detection from the Monitor Wall
Notes
• The Kaleido-IP multiviewers do not yet support automatic output
resolution detection.
• The monitor EDID auto-detection feature is enabled by default in order to
facilitate the initial setup of a Kaleido-X system. Setting an output head to
a specific resolution, from a multiviewer service panel in iControl (if
available), from the monitor wall (Kaleido-IP, Kaleido-X, Kaleido-X16), or
from a Densité controller’s local control panel (Kaleido-MX,
Kaleido-Modular-X, KMV-3901/3911, Kaleido-XQUAD) disables the EDID
auto-detection for this head.
To enable EDID auto-detect for a display

1 Right-click the monitor wall background, and then click Display Resolution on the
shortcut menu.
2 Select the Use detected monitor resolution check box.
59
Changing the IP Address of a Multiviewer from the Monitor Wall
3 Click OK.
Changing the IP Address of a Multiviewer from the Monitor Wall
Notes
This section does not apply to the KMV-3901/3911, Kaleido-XQUAD,
Kaleido-MX, and Kaleido-Modular-X. For these multiviewers, you can
configure the network settings by using XAdmin, the Densité controller’s
local control panel (or a control panel in iControl, if available). See
Configuring a Multiviewer’s IP Settings on page 395, or refer to the Quick
Start Guide for your multiviewer, for details.
In the case of a Kaleido-IP, changing the multiviewer’s network settings from
the monitor wall is not yet supported.
With a Kaleido-X, or Kaleido-X16, you can set the IP address, system name, and other
parameters via a control panel on the monitor wall.
To change the IP address of the multiviewer from the monitor wall
1 Right-click anywhere on the monitor wall, point to Monitor wall, and then click System
configuration.
The System Configuration window appears.

2 Click the Ethernet tab.
3 Type the required Frame IP address, network mask, and gateway address in the
appropriate boxes.
4 Type the required addresses for all outputs.
5 Click OK.
6 When prompted to restart the system to apply your changes, click Yes.
The new configuration will become effective once the system restart has completed.
60
Managing Kaleido-X Systems
This section explains what constitutes a Kaleido-X system, and the related workflow.
Key Concepts
Term Description
System A Kaleido-X system represents a grouping of equipment, including one or
more multiviewers that have the Kaleido-X software, and a number of
peripheral devices such as routers, production switchers, UMD
controllers, or automation systems. In XEdit, you work against one
system at a time. Each system is stored as a separate database.
Kaleido-X The Kaleido-X multiviewer is a multi-room, multi-image processor and
router in a single, expandable frame. The compact Kaleido-X (4RU)
multiviewer supports 32 inputs and 4 multi-image outputs. The
Kaleido-X (7RU) multiviewer can display 96 inputs over up to 8 displays
of any resolution and orientation. The Kaleido-X (7RU) built-in routing
capability offers switching of 96 unprocessed inputs to 48 HD/SD
outputs for feeding monitors, test equipment, master control or
production switchers, ISO recorders, or other multi-image processors.
Expansion system By using a mid-plane expansion module, two Kaleido-X (7RU) frames can
be connected to display up to 192 video inputs over up to 12 displays. In
XEdit, an expansion system is identified as Kaleido-X (14RU).
Kaleido-X16 The Kaleido-X16 is a compact, ultra-quiet multiviewer in a 1RU frame,
with 16 inputs and two outputs. It provides a subset of the features of
the Kaleido-X 4RU and 7RU models. There are two types of Kaleido-X16:
Kaleido-X16-S (single head) and Kaleido-X16-D (dual head).
KMV-3901/3911 The KMV-3901, the first member of the Kaleido-Modular series, is a
multiviewer on a single Densité card, with eight inputs and two outputs.
Designed to address production-type applications, it supports a subset
of the features offered by the other Kaleido-X series multiviewer models:
• Processing: Video scaling, Video cropping, 3Gbps (level A only)
support, KXI-DVI-Bridge support.
• Probing: Display of audio levels (up to 16 audio signals per head), time
codes (based on URS signal from a REF-1801 Densité card, or on
embedded reference signal), video format and audio format.
• GPIO interface: Support for 8 GPI inputs and 2 GPI outputs.
In addition to the features listed above, the KMV-3911 multiviewer
supports up to two HD-SDI monitoring outputs. In XEdit, all
KMV-3901/3911 models, with any number of inputs and outputs are
identified as Kaleido-Modular. In XAdmin they are identified as Kaleido-
Modular KMV-3911, or Kaleido-Modular KMV-3901.
61
Key Concepts
Term Description
Kaleido-IP The Kaleido-IP can monitor and display HD and SD television programs
distributed over IP, across two HDTV displays. It supports MPEG-2 and
H.264/AVC compressed video, and the AAC, AC-3, MPEG-1, MPEG-2,
MPEG-4 AAC LC, and MPEG-4 HE-AAC compressed audio formats, within
unencrypted DCII, DVB, or ATSC streams. In the case of HD signals, the
Kaleido-IP X300 models support concurrent decoding of up to 24 MPEG-
2, or up to 16 H.264 video programs. In the case of SD signals, they
support concurrent decoding of up to 64 MPEG-2, or up to 32 H.264
programs. The compact Kaleido-IP X100 model supports concurrent
decoding of up to 8 HD MPEG-2, up to 6 HD H.264, up to 24 SD MPEG-2,
or up to 12 H.264 programs. In XAdmin and XEdit, a Kaleido-IP X100 or
Kaleido-IP X300 with two network adapters is identified as Kaleido-IP-2,
while a Kaleido-IP X300 with four network adapters is identified as
Kaleido-IP-4, and a Kaleido-IP X300 with six network adapters is
identified as Kaleido-IP-6.
Kaleido-XQUAD The Kaleido-XQUAD is a standalone quad-split multiviewer that is ideal
for truck and studio monitoring. It is available in two versions: the
Kaleido-XQUAD features four 3Gbps/HD inputs and a single multiviewer
output (HDMI/HD-SDI), and the Kaleido-XQUAD-DUAL offers eight
3Gbps/HD inputs and two multiviewer outputs. Both versions offer
exceptional display flexibility and outstanding space and energy
efficiency, using a 1RU half width frame with silent ventilation for
installation within studios. The multiviewer can be used for small
installations with one or two displays, and in much larger configurations
using multiple Kaleido-XQUADs. In XEdit, the Kaleido-XQUAD and
Kaleido-XQUAD-DUAL are identified as Kaleido-Modular. In XAdmin they
are identified as Kaleido-Modular KMV-3911.
XEdit XEdit is the Kaleido-X layout editor, a software intended to be run on a
remote computer. Its purpose is to define your Kaleido-X system
components, including external devices, create rooms, logical sources,
layouts, and RCP user definitions, and perform all the configurations
required for successful operation of the multiviewer. XEdit has two
modes of operation: you can work offline in a local workspace and then
apply your changes by exporting them to the multiviewer, or you can
connect to a multiviewer and work in online mode, directly on the
system. Changes made in online mode take effect immediately on the
monitor wall.
Database Layouts and related configurations for your Kaleido-X system are created
in XEdit. All this information is stored in a database. When you work in
offline mode, your load the appropriate database in a local workspace
on the PC where XEdit is used. XEdit can export such a database to a
multiviewer, or import the current layouts and configurations from a
multiviewer into the local workspace on your PC. For changes you make
in offline mode to take effect on the monitor wall, you must export the
database to a multiviewer. Conversely, any configuration change you
make in online mode must be imported from the multiviewer into your
local workspace if you wish to be able to make further changes in offline
mode.
62
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Term Description
Cluster A cluster refers to multiple multiviewers, configured so that they can be
operated as a single system from a room comprising up to 48 displays
fed by the different multiviewers’ outputs. The complete cluster system
can include up to 128 displays. See Creating a Cluster on page 81.
Cascade A cascade refers to up to three Kaleido-X16 or up to three KMV-3901/3911
multiviewers, configured so that they can be operated as a single system
from a room. The cascade makes it possible to monitor up to 48 video
inputs—in the case of a Kaleido-X16 cascade—, or up to 24 video
inputs—in the case of a KMV-3901/3911 cascade—, on a single monitor
wall display. Depending on your purposes, you may wish to monitor
both baseband and IP sources at once, on the same monitor wall display.
This can be achieved by configuring a hybrid cascade system, involving
one Kaleido-IP multiviewer and one Kaleido-X or Kaleido-X16 multiviewer.
Refer to the Cascade Step-by-Step Configuration guide for your
multiviewer model, for more information.
Logical source A logical source (called a channel, in earlier versions of the software and
documentation) refers to a group of physical audio, video, or metadata
sources, and text attributes. A logical source can be used as a whole, and
assigned to a virtual monitor. See Logical Sources on page 157, for
details.
Cards Cards are added to, and removed from a Kaleido-X (7RU) or
Kaleido-X (4RU) multiviewer. There are different, specialized types of
cards: input cards, output cards, a GPI/genlock card, expansion cards and
internal router cards. Refer to the appropriate Hardware Description &
Installation Manual available on the DVD that shipped with your system,
and from Miranda’s support portal, for more information.
Virtual card slots The Kaleido-X16 introduced the concept of virtual card slots that
represent a set of hardware features directly on the multiviewer’s main
board. In XEdit, the Kaleido-X16 virtual card slots contain
representations of GPI/genlock, input, output, and internal router cards
that are equivalent to their physical counterparts on the Kaleido-X (4RU)
and Kaleido-X (7RU) models. Likewise, the KMV-3901/3911 multiviewers
have virtual card slots with representations of GPI/genlock, input, and
output cards.
There are, however, some differences in the Kaleido-X16 and
KMV-3901/3911 multiviewer models are presented in XEdit, compared
to the Kaleido-X models:
• Cards in virtual slots are always present by default, and cannot be
removed in XEdit.
• There are no status icons next to a virtual card slot (e.g. inserted or
empty card slot icon).
63
Detailed Directions
Term Description
In XAdmin the virtual slot/card concept is represented as follows:
• Cards in virtual slots have no name.
• There is no reset button associated with each card. Instead, there is a
single multiviewer reset button that sends a reboot command to the
multiviewer.
• Cards in virtual slots have no serial number. Instead, there is one serial
number for the multiviewer.
• Cards in virtual slots do not have individual IP addresses. There is only
one IP address, which is associated with the multiviewer.
Calibration Calibration refers to the configuration of different card attributes. For
example, an output card’s Brightness and Contrast attributes can be
calibrated, or an input card’s Silence threshold attribute. See Calibrating
the Kaleido-X on page 111, for details.
Peripheral devices A peripheral device is an external piece of equipment, such as a router or
production switcher, that can be connected to the multiviewer.
Detailed Directions
Creating and maintaining a Kaleido-X system involves a number of file management tasks,
including backup and restore operations. The XEdit software is used to perform these tasks.
Some tasks are done online, others in offline mode. Most are available in both modes.
A local database is used as a workspace to save layouts and related configuration data
temporarily while you are building your Kaleido-X system in offline mode. If you need to
build more than one system, you can keep working with the same database, and use the
backup tool to save the data for each system separately. To further work on a specific
system you would then use the restore backup tool. See Managing Multiple Databases
Efficiently on page 108 for an overview of the recommended workflow.
Opening the XEdit Software

When using XEdit offline, you work inside a workspace located on your client PC. When you
first open XEdit, a window will prompt you for the location for this workspace. It is
recommended to consider this workspace as a sandbox into which you will always first
import the database you wish to work on during the current session, and from which you
will export the database at the end of the session.
To open XEdit
1 Double-click the XEdit icon on your desktop: .
A startup screen appears, followed by the Database Location window.
64
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
2 When prompted to specify the database location, click Browse.
3 From the window that opens, locate an appropriate directory for your workspace, and
then click Open to close the Select the database location window.
If it is not the first time you open XEdit, and you are satisfied with the location of your
local workspace, then select the Don’t ask next time check box, to avoid being
prompted every time you open XEdit.
4 Click OK to close the Database Location window.
The XEdit main window appears. This may take a few seconds.
65
Opening the XEdit Software
When first opening XEdit in offline mode, the database contains the default
configuration for a Kaleido-X (7RU) system, including a fully-populated frame (all cards
present) and a set of predefined logical sources.
To customize the layout of the XEdit application window
• Resize the window, and its three panes, by dragging the window’s borders, corners, and
pane splitters.
• Move the Tips, Tools, and Properties tabs between the left and right panes, and
reorder them, by clicking their handle and dragging to the desired location.
• Close the Tips, Tools, and Properties tabs by clicking their × button.
• Undock the Tips, Tools, and Properties tabs from the main window, by clicking their
square button.
× button Handle Square button
Splitter
To restore the default application layout

1 Dock the Tips, Tools, and Properties tabs, if they are undocked, by clicking their ×
button.
66
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
2 On the View menu, point to Panes and tabs, and then click Restore default window
settings.
To close XEdit
• On the File menu, click Exit. Alternatively, click the × button in the upper right corner of
the main application window.
Using XEdit Online

When using XEdit in online mode, any changes made are applied and stored directly on the
multiviewer. When using XEdit in offline mode, all changes are stored locally on the user’s
PC, and the database must be exported to the multiviewer for the changes to take effect.
When connected to a multiviewer, any change you make to your system’s configuration
takes effect immediately on the multiviewer itself; your local database is not involved. The
online mode is not limited to basic system configuration; changes can also be made to
existing logical sources, rooms, layouts, RCP users, etc.
Note: In the case of a Kaleido-IP, you must work in online mode, at least
once, to obtain the list of programs and elementary streams under each
transport stream.
Connecting to a Multiviewer
To connect to a multiviewer
1 On the Configure menu, click Connect.
The Connect to Multiviewer window appears.
IP addresses for all the multiviewers that are on the same subnet as your PC are
included in the list.
2 If your PC and the multiviewer are on the same subnet, then you can select the IP
address of the multiviewer you wish to connect to from the list. Otherwise type the
appropriate IP address in the box.
3 Click OK.
4 If access control is enabled for this multiviewer, then XEdit prompts you for a password.
Type the password associated with the RCP user “Admin”, and then click Log on.
67
Using XEdit Online
The selected system’s hierarchical list appears in XEdit’s main pane, showing the
multiviewer model, system name and IP address, and the status bar shows the
connection status.
Connection status Multiviewer model System name System IP address

It is also possible to verify which version of the Kaleido-X software is installed on this
multiviewer, by moving to pointer to the system name in the System list. A tip appears,
showing this information.
In the case of a cluster system, cluster members are listed in alphabetical order based
on the system name, which appears first, and the multiviewer you are currently
connected to is highlighted.
Bold text indicates the

cluster member to which
XEdit is currently connected.
Connection status System name Multiviewer System IP address

model
68
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Notes
• When using XEdit in online mode, some database functions, such as
Export, Import, and Restore backup, are not available. Any changes made
by the user are not kept locally on the user’s PC, but applied directly on the
multiviewer. To retrieve the data set from the multiviewer, either
disconnect from the multiviewer, and then use the Import function, or use
the Create backup function to save a copy of the database. A database
can be restored from a backup repository to your local workspace later.
See Managing Multiple Databases Efficiently on page 108 for a
description of the recommended workflow.
• It is not recommended to have two or more users simultaneously
connected online to the same multiviewer system for editing.
Disconnecting from a Multiviewer

To disconnect from a multiviewer
• On the Configure menu, click Disconnect.
XEdit switches to its local workspace, and displays the OFFLINE status on the status bar.
Enabling Access Control

XEdit supports a simple authentication mechanism to prevent unauthorized users from
connecting or exporting to a multiviewer. When access control is enabled, the password
associated with the RCP user Admin (see Changing an RCP User’s Name and Password, on
page 287) is enforced.
To enable access control
1 Connect to the multiviewer you wish to protect (see Connecting to a Multiviewer, on
page 67).
2 On the Configure menu, click Access control.
XEdit prompts you for a password.
3 Type the password associated with the RCP user Admin, and then click Log on.
69
Importing a Database
Access control is now enabled for this multiviewer.
Disabling Access Control

To disable access control
1 Connect to the multiviewer you wish to unprotect (see Connecting to a Multiviewer, on
page 67).
XEdit prompts you for a password.
2 Type the password associated with the RCP user Admin, and then click Log on.
3 On the Configure menu, click Access control.
Access control is now disabled for this multiviewer.
Importing a Database
To import a database
1 On the Configure menu, point to Database, and then click Import.
A window appears, prompting you for the IP address of the multiviewer whose
database you wish to import.
70
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
address of the multiviewer from the list. Otherwise type the appropriate IP address in
the box.
3 Click OK.
A window appears, prompting you to confirm that you really want to import data from
the multiviewer.
4 Click Yes.
A progress window appears, followed by a message stating whether the import
succeeded or not.
5 Click OK.
The imported data has replaced the former content in your local workspace. The
originating system’s multiviewer model and IP address now appear in the System list.
Multiviewer model IP address

In the case of a cluster system, the System list shows cluster members in alphabetical
order based on their system name, which appears first and is followed by the
multiviewer model and IP address.
71
Exporting a Database
Bold text indicates the

cluster member to which
XEdit is currently connected.
Connection status System name Multiviewer System IP address

model
Exporting a Single-Multiviewer Database

To export a single-multiviewer database
1 On the Configure menu, point to Database, and then click Export.
The Export to Multiviewer window appears, prompting you for the IP address of the
multiviewer to which you wish to transfer the database.
72
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
the box.
3 Click OK.
A window appears, prompting you to confirm that you really want to export data to the
multiviewer.
4 Click Yes.
5 If access control is enabled for this multiviewer, then XEdit prompts you for a password.
A progress window appears, followed by a message stating whether the export

succeeded or not.
6 Click OK.
All data on the remote system is now replaced with content from the local workspace.
Exporting a Cluster Database

To export a cluster database
1 On the Configure menu, point to Database, and then click Export.
The Export Cluster window appears, prompting you to confirm the set of multiviewers
to which you wish to apply the database.
73
If you were working in offline mode, against a database imported from your existing
cluster system, and all cluster members are currently available, then click OK to
proceed.
On the other hand, if a cluster member happens to be unavailable, or if you are cloning
a cluster configuration to a different set of multiviewers, you may need to remove
members from the selection and change IP addresses.
IMPORTANT
Partial exports should be limited to cases where you had to replace a
defective cluster member and need to bring its replacement into service
without disrupting operations.
Before performing a partial export, you must verify that the cluster
configuration has remained unchanged between your local version and the
online version currently on the system.
a To change an IP address, double-click an IP address, and then type the IP address of

the actual multiviewer that is to receive this database.
b To remove a cluster member that is currently not available from the selection, clear
the corresponding check box.
Similarly, you may remove members if your target cluster does not have as many, or
if you wish to update members that were previously unavailable with the same
database you already exported to other cluster members.
c Once the selected IP addresses match the actual multiviewers that are to receive
the database, click OK.
In the case of a partial export, a warning appears prompting you to confirm you
intention; click OK to proceed.
A window appears, prompting you to confirm that you really want to export the
database.
2 Click Yes.
3 If access control is enabled for a multiviewer, then XEdit prompts you for a password.
74
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
A progress window appears, followed by a message stating whether the export

succeeded or not.
4 Click OK.
All cluster members now have the latest configuration from the local workspace.
Creating a Backup
Use the Create backup and Restore backup functions to manage copies of your system
database. This is equivalent to the usual Save as and Open functions, and is useful not only
for security purposes but also on sites where more than one system must be maintained.
Backing Up the Current Database

To back up the current system database
1 On the Configure menu, point to Database, then to Create backup and click All.
The Create Backup window appears.

2 In Create Backup, select the location where you wish to save a backup copy of the
current database content, and then click Save.
The database is saved as a ZIP file.
Backing Up Resolutions
To back up resolutions from the current system
1 On the Configure menu, point to Database, then to Create backup and click
Resolutions.
75
Restoring a Backup

resolutions from the current database, and then click Save.
The resolutions are saved as an XEdit collection file, with a .xcol extension.
Backing Up Audio Scales

To back up audio scales from the current system
1 On the Configure menu, point to Database, then to Create backup and click Audio
scales.
audio scales from the current database, and then click Save.
The audio scales are saved as an XEdit collection file, with a .xcol extension.
Restoring a Backup
Restoring a Database from a Backup
Note: When XEdit restores a database backup, it replaces the content of the
local workspace with data from the backup. This cannot be undone. Always
create a backup of the current data before restoring data from a different
source. See Managing Multiple Databases Efficiently on page 108 for an
overview of the recommended workflow.
To restore a backup database

1 On the Configure menu, point to Database, and then click Restore backup.
The Select Backup window appears.

2 In Select Backup, navigate to the appropriate backup file (a ZIP archive, in the case of a
full database backup), select it, and then click Open.
A message appears prompting you to confirm your intention.
76
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
3 Click Yes.
4 Click OK to dismiss the message that appears once the operation has completed.
The former content of the local workspace is entirely replaced with data from the
backup.
Restoring Resolutions or Audio Scales from a Backup

To restore resolutions or audio scales from a backup
The Select Backup window appears.

2 In Select Backup, navigate to the appropriate backup file (an XEdit collection file, with
a .xcol extension), select it, and then click Open.
The content of the local workspace is updated with data from the backup.
Note: XEdit will not prompt for confirmation.
Creating a Single Multiviewer System

When first opening XEdit in offline mode, the database contains the default configuration
for a Kaleido-X (7RU) system, including a fully-populated frame (all cards present) as a
starting point. If you have a different multiviewer model—i.e. a Kaleido-IP, a Kaleido-
Modular, a Kaleido-X16, a Kaleido-X (4RU) or an expansion system—, then you must replace
this initial configuration with one that matches your actual system.
Notes
• For the purpose of creating a system, an expansion system—
Kaleido-X (14RU)—is considered as a single multiviewer.
• For instructions on creating a cluster system, see Creating a Cluster, on
page 81.
• For instructions on creating a cascade system, refer to the appropriate
Cascade Step-by-Step Configuration guide, available on the Kaleido-X DVD,
and from Miranda’s support portal.
To create a system with a single multiviewer

1 Open XEdit.
2 In the main window, click the System tab, and then click Description/Calibrations on
the second-level tab bar.
77
The main pane displays the System hierarchical list, and the Tools pane displays the
equipment library when the root of the System list is selected.
3 Right-click the current multiviewer in the System list, and then select the appropriate
multiviewer model—Kaleido-X16-S, Kaleido-X16-D, Kaleido-X (4RU), Kaleido-X (7RU),
Kaleido-X (14RU), Kaleido-Modular, Kaleido-MX, Kaleido-IP-2, Kaleido-IP-4, or
Kaleido-IP-6—, from the “replace with...” options on the menu.
78
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Notes
If you are working in online mode, the set of multiviewer models available
from the menu varies according to the current model. If the current model is
a Kaleido-IP, then only the other Kaleido-IP models are available for
selection.
Conversely, if the current model is not a Kaleido-IP, then none of the

Kaleido-IP models are available for selection.
Select... To represent a...

Kaleido-X16-S Kaleido-X16 (single output)
Kaleido-X16-D Kaleido-X16 (dual output)
Kaleido-X (4RU) Kaleido-X (4RU)
Kaleido-X (14RU) Two Kaleido-X (7RU) frames, with expansion cards
Kaleido-Modular Any KMV-3901/3911, Kaleido-XQUAD, or Kaleido-XQUAD-DUAL
Kaleido-MX Any Kaleido-MX, or Kaleido-Modular-X
Kaleido-IP-2 Kaleido-IP X100, or Kaleido-IP X300 with two network adapters
Kaleido-IP-4 Kaleido-IP X300 with four network adapters
Kaleido-IP-6 Kaleido-IP X300 with six network adapters
A message appears, prompting you to confirm your intention.
79
4 Click Yes.
The next message prompts you about populating the database with a factory-default
configuration for the selected multiviewer model.
5 Click Yes to have the system populated with factory defaults for the selected
multiviewer model. See Restoring Factory Defaults on page 102, for details.
Alternatively, click No, if this system is based on an existing multiviewer system whose
room and layout configurations you wish to reuse. (For instance, you could be
converting two 7RU multiviewers to an expansion system. Refer to the “Kaleido-X (7RU)
Expansion” chapter in the Kaleido-X (7RU) Hardware Description & Installation Manual for
more information.)
IMPORTANT
Databases created for different multiviewer models are not fully compatible
with each other. It is important to select the proper model at this stage.
6 Select the relevant peripheral devices in the equipment library and drag them onto the
root of the System hierarchical list in the main window. Alternatively, right-click the list
root, and then select the appropriate peripheral device from the “insert...” options on
the menu.
All peripheral devices added to the system appear in the System list.
7 If you are going to control the multiviewer, from a device using one of the supported
TCP/IP router protocols (SW-P-02, SW-P-08, Network Modular, or NVISION Ethernet
protocol - Compact router), then configure the router level to be controlled: click the
multiviewer in the System list, and then, in the Properties tab, specify the logical router
and level you wish to control, by selecting the appropriate values in the Router and
Router level lists under TCP/IP Router control.
Notes
• As of version 5.00 of the Kaleido-X software, the router selected by default
for TCP/IP control is the KX Router logical router
• To control the KX Router logical router from an external device or
application, this device or application must support the NVISION Ethernet
protocol - Compact router protocol (see Built-in Communications Protocols,
on page 298, for more information).
8 On the File menu, click Save. Alternatively, click the Save button on the toolbar.
Changes to the system are saved.
80
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Creating a Cluster
As of version 6.50 of the Kaleido-X software, clusters can be created and configured in
offline mode, in addition to the previously supported online mode. Creating a cluster
involves the following steps:
1 add multiviewers to your system
2 configure new rooms that include displays fed by the different multiviewers
3 create layouts for the new rooms
4 replicate RCP users from one multiviewer to all other systems that are part of the cluster
5 replicate custom display resolutions from one multiviewer to all others
6 make a backup of your cluster configuration
IMPORTANT
It is important to follow the indicated sequence: first add the cluster
members, then create new rooms, and only then create the layouts.
Although first copying the same single-multiviewer database to the
multiviewers you wish to join in a cluster may look like an option, this is not
supported.
Adding Multiviewers to a Cluster
Notes
• Any multiviewer you wish to add to a cluster must have the Kaleido-X
software version 4.00 or later, and all members of a cluster must have the
same Kaleido-X software version.
• Each multiviewer you wish to add to a cluster must have a unique name.
• If you change the system name or IP address of a cluster member while
another cluster member is offline or otherwise unavailable, the cluster’s
integrity will be broken. If you attempt to make such a change, XAdmin will
alert you of the situation, prompting you to cancel the operation and try
again later, when all cluster members are available. If you choose to force
the change, then you will need to repair the cluster (see Repairing a Cluster
System, on page 86).
• Changing the system name or IP address of a KMV-3901/3911 multiviewer
associated with a cluster, by using the card’s control panel on the Densité
housing frame, or by using the KMV-3901/3911 control panel in iControl, is
not supported. If this happens, then you will need to repair the cluster (see
Repairing a Cluster System, on page 86).
• A multiviewer can only be part of one cluster system at any time. XEdit will
not let you add a multiviewer that is already included in a different cluster
system.
Creating a Cluster in Online Mode

To create a system with multiple multiviewers in online mode
1 Open XEdit, and then click Connect on the Configure menu, to access one of the
multiviewers you wish to be part of a cluster system. See Connecting to a Multiviewer
81
Creating a Cluster
on page 67.
You are now ready to add more multiviewers to the system.
2 In the equipment library, select any multiviewer model, and then drag it onto the root
of the System hierarchical list.
The Add Multiviewer to Cluster window appears.
IP addresses for all the multiviewer systems that are on the same subnet as your PC are
3 If your PC and the multiviewer you wish to add are on the same subnet, then you can
select the multiviewer’s IP address from the list. Otherwise enter the appropriate IP
address in the box.
The multiviewer is added to the System list.
Note: The appropriate multiviewer model is automatically selected, based

on the actual target system.
4 Repeat from step 2 until you have added all the required devices to the cluster.
82
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
5 If further system configuration is required on the individual members of the cluster,

start with the current system (i.e. the one you are connected to). See Configuring the
System Representation on page 87, for detailed instructions on adding cards to a
Kaleido-X (4RU, 7RU, or 14RU), or on adding streams to a Kaleido-IP configuration. Refer
to Routers & Kaleido-X, on page 291, and Tally Interface Devices, on page 337, for
instructions on adding other routing and control devices.
Note: Each member of a cluster has its own database where both common
information about the cluster and information local to the individual cluster
member are stored. Room and layout definitions are automatically
replicated to all cluster members, whereas the logical sources and the
configuration of devices connected to a specific cluster member are only
stored in this member’s database.
6 Once you have completed the current system’s specific configuration, save it, and then
connect to the next cluster member you need to configure: right-click the appropriate
multiviewer node and then click Connect to this system.
Once the connection is established, the selected system becomes highlighted in the
System list, and the message “Connected to...” appears in the status bar.
7 Repeat from step 5 until all cluster members are configured.
Note: In the hierarchical list for a cluster, an unavailable system is indicated

by a dimmed icon and cannot be expanded. It can take up to 15 seconds
before a multiviewer’s status icon is updated in the System list.
Creating a Cluster in Offline Mode

To create a system with multiple multiviewers in offline mode
1 In the equipment library, select the appropriate multiviewer model—Kaleido-X16-S,
Kaleido-X16-D, Kaleido-X (4RU), Kaleido-X (7RU), Kaleido-X (14RU), Kaleido-
Modular, Kaleido-MX, Kaleido-IP-2, Kaleido-IP-4,or Kaleido-IP-6—, and drag it onto
the root of the System hierarchical list.
Alternatively, right-click the list root, and then click the appropriate multiviewer model
on the “insert...” menu.
83
Creating a Cluster
2 A multiviewer of the selected model is added to the System list.
3 On the File menu, click Save.

A progress window appears while XEdit applies default settings to your new cluster
configuration.
4 Repeat from step 1 until you have added all the required devices to the cluster.
84
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
5 If further system configuration is required on the individual members of the cluster,

start with the current system (i.e. the one that is highlighted). See Configuring the
System Representation on page 87, for detailed instructions on adding cards to a
Kaleido-X (4RU, 7RU, or 14RU), or on adding streams to a Kaleido-IP configuration. Refer
to Routers & Kaleido-X, on page 291, and Tally Interface Devices, on page 337, for
instructions on adding other routing and control devices.
Note: Each member of a cluster has its own database where both common
information about the cluster and information local to the individual cluster
member are stored. Room and layout definitions are automatically
replicated to all cluster members, whereas the logical sources and the
configuration of devices connected to a specific cluster member are only
stored in this system’s database.
6 Once you have completed the current system’s specific configuration, save it, and then
switch to the next cluster member you need to configure: right-click the appropriate
multiviewer node and then click Switch to this system.
The selected cluster member becomes highlighted in the System list.

7 Repeat from step 5 until all cluster members are configured.
Eventually, you will want to export this cluster configuration to the appropriate set of
multiviewers. See Exporting a Cluster Database on page 73 for details.
85
Creating a Cluster
Creating Rooms for a Cluster System

Create rooms for the cluster system, by adding displays associated with the different
multiviewers as appropriate. See Setting Up Rooms on page 173, for details.
Notes
• Each room must have a unique name across the cluster system. XEdit will
not let you use a name if there is already a room with this name associated
with one of the multiviewers within the cluster.
• All multiviewers associated with the cluster system must be available. If
one of the member multiviewers becomes unavailable while you were
configuring a room for the cluster system, then XEdit will not let you save
the room. If you wish to save the room anyway, first remove any
unavailable system from the cluster.
Creating Layouts for a Cluster System

It is possible to create a partial layout for a cluster system in offline mode, and then export it
to the appropriate multiviewer for further online configuration. When configuring a layout
for a room that is associated with a cluster system, you only work on one part at a time: the
part that is associated with the current multiviewer’s output heads. See Creating Layouts on
page 195 for detailed instructions.
Note: Each layout must have a unique name across the cluster system.
XEdit will not let you export a layout to a cluster system if there is already a
layout with this name associated with one of the multiviewers within the
cluster. As a workaround, you could make a copy of one of the conflicting
layouts under a different name, and then delete the original before
proceeding with the export (see Copying layouts, on page 208, Deleting
Layouts, on page 205).
Replicating RCP Users Across a Cluster System

Currently, RCP Users are not automatically propagated to all multiviewers. Before a user can
log on to a room associated with a cluster system, the corresponding RCP user
configuration must be manually replicated on all member multiviewers across the cluster.
Repairing a Cluster System
Note: In the procedure below, System A refers to the system whose name or
IP address was changed while another cluster member, referred to as System
B, was unavailable.
To repair the cluster configuration

1 In XEdit, connect to System B, the multiviewer that was unavailable when the change
was made, once it is available again.
2 In the Description/Calibrations tab, remove System A from the cluster, and then add it
back to the cluster.
3 If other cluster members were unavailable when the change was made (e.g. if System A
is a KMV-3901/3911 whose name or IP address was changed from the Densité frame’s
86
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
control panel, or from the KMV-3901/3911 control panel in iControl, then repeat the
previous steps for each.
If only the IP address was changed then no further action is required. Otherwise, if the
system name was changed, then proceed as follows.
4 Connect to System A.
5 Change something in every room (e.g. move a display and then bring it back to its
initial position) to enable the Save button.
6 Save the room.
This will replicate the proper room configuration to the other members of the cluster.
(At the same time, the layouts will also be updated on all multiviewers in the cluster.)
Configuring the System Representation

• The Kaleido-IP has two, four, or six network adapters, depending on the model, and
two multiviewer outputs. Configuring your Kaleido-IP’s system representation in XEdit
includes adding or removing transport streams until the representation matches the
set of transport streams you wish to monitor. See Managing Transport Streams in a
Kaleido-IP System Representation below, for details.
• In the case of a Kaleido-X (4RU), Kaleido-X (7RU), or expansion systems, configuring
your system’s representation in XEdit includes adding or removing cards until the
representation matches the hardware configuration of your actual multiviewer. See
Managing Cards in a Kaleido-X System Representation on page 100, for details.
• This section does not apply to the Kaleido-X16, Kaleido-XQUAD, and KMV-3901/3911,
which have a set number of virtual card slots that represent hardware features
integrated within their main board. In XEdit, these virtual card slots are, for the most
part, equivalent to their physical counterparts on the Kaleido-X models (see page 63).
Managing Transport Streams in a Kaleido-IP System Representation

Although it is possible to partly configure your Kaleido-IP system by using XEdit in offline
mode, you must work in online mode, at least once, to obtain the list of programs and
elementary streams under each transport stream (see Using XEdit Online, on page 67). The
supported stream types are source-specific multicast, source-filtered multicast (filtering
limited to a single source IP in include mode only), any-source multicast, and unicast.
If you need to monitor a large number of programs, you may find it convenient to import
related configuration information, from a spreadsheet in XLS or XLSX format. At the same
time, the logical sources associated with the programs specified in the spreadsheet will be
automatically added to the sources table. A sample spreadsheet is available on the DVD
that shipped with your system, and from Miranda’s support portal.
• To prepare your spreadsheet, see Preparing a Spreadsheet with Stream Lineup
Information, on page 90.
• Once you have prepared your spreadsheet, refer to Importing a Stream Lineup, on
page 88.
• To add SSM or SFM transport streams, manually, see Adding a Source-Specific or
Source-Filtered Multicast Transport Stream, on page 92.
• To add ASM transport streams, manually, see Adding an Any-Source Multicast
Transport Stream, on page 94.
87
• To add unicast transport streams, manually, see Adding a Unicast Transport Stream, on
page 96.
• To modify transport stream information, see Modifying a Transport Stream, on page 98.
• To remove transport streams from your system configuration, see Removing Transport
Streams, on page 99.
Importing a Stream Lineup
WARNING
Miranda recommends making a backup of your system before importing
stream configuration information from a spreadsheet. When you import
streams from a spreadsheet, this erases all previously imported streams and
associated logical sources. It may also overwrite streams that you had
manually added (and logical sources) if they have the same name or index as
a stream whose configuration is being imported.
To import a set of streams from a spreadsheet file

the second level tab bar.
2 On the File menu, click Import.
XEdit prompts you for confirmation.
3 Click OK to dismiss the warning, if you are confident that you have all the information
to recover your system configuration if needed.
4 Navigate to the spreadsheet file you wish to import, select it, and then click Open.
XEdit validates the following: IP address range, network adapter number, protocol,
consistency of stream name vs. stream information (group and source IP addresses +
port), duplicate stream names, duplicate logical source information (category + name),
duplicate logical source index, and will report any error. If no errors were found, then
the following message appears.
5 Click OK to dismiss the message.

The streams appear under the specified network adapters.
88
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Imported streams
Example showing streams imported from the sample spreadsheet file.
After a few minutes, if XEdit is connected to the multiviewer, all programs included in
the transport streams are discovered.
Note: The set of discovered programs does not necessarily match the
programs listed in the spreadsheet. The discovery being a dynamic process,
it may find more (or less) programs.
In addition, logical sources for the programs listed in the spreadsheet you imported are
automatically added to the sources table. If XEdit is not connected to the multiviewer,
then the new sources’ video levels appear in red in the sources table. In such case, the
sources table will be updated when you work in online mode once you have exported
the database to the multiviewer.
Logical sources created

from imported programs
Should you wish to add audio, dynamic text, alarm and time code levels to these logical
sources, you may complete all desired physical assignments for one logical source,
which you can then designate as the template. By applying the template, you will be
able to populate the remaining levels in a single operation. See Defining Physical
Assignments on page 165, for more information.
89
Preparing a Spreadsheet with Stream Lineup Information

The spreadsheet file must contain the following:
• information about the programs you wish to monitor, and the transport streams to
which they belong,
• information about the logical sources that will be added to the sources table for these
programs, including any static text levels you may wish to add.
The spreadsheet is organized as follows:
• Two heading rows. The first heading row divides the spreadsheet into four main areas:
• Programs. This area occupies the first column (A).
• Transport streams. This area spans columns B – G.
• Logical sources. This area spans columns H – J.
• Additional static text levels (optional). This area starts at column K, and can extend
to as many columns as you need. Text you enter on the second heading row in this
area will be imported.
• One row for every program you wish to monitor.
To prepare the spreadsheet file
1 Using your spreadsheet software, either open a copy of the sample spreadsheet file or
create a new spreadsheet.
2 Enter the information about a program, and the transport stream to which it belongs:
In this column... Enter this information...

A Program number The program number (MPEG ID), for the program you wish to
monitor.
B Stream name A name to identify the transport stream that includes this
program. Alternatively, you can leave this cell blank, in which
case a default name will be created.
C Multicast group The multicast group IP address. In the case of a unicast stream,
IP address leave the cell blank.
D Port number The appropriate port number.
E SSM/SFM source In the case of a source-specific multicast (SSM) or source-filtered
IP address multicast (SFM) transport stream, enter the source IP address.
F Protocol RTP, or UDP.
G NIC The network adapter identifier: LAN2 – LAN5, for a high-bitrate
stream; LAN1, for a low-bitrate stream. The number of network
adapters varies, depending on the Kaleido-IP model (see Kaleido-
IP, on page 62).
90
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Sample spreadsheet: Programs, and Transport streams areas
3 Enter the information that will be used to create the logical source associated with this
program:
In this column... Enter this information...

H Index If your system involves a control panel from which you control
your multiviewer as a router, set a source number for the logical
source associated with this program to be available through the
KX Router logical router, by entering the appropriate number in
this column. Source numbers must be unique.
I Category Text in this column can be used to group related logical sources
together, when you sort the sources table in XEdit (see Sorting
the Sources Table, on page 169).
J Name The name of the logical source. Names are limited to 48
characters. Logical source names that only contain digits must be
preceded with an apostrophe in the spreadsheet.
Sample spreadsheet: Logical sources area
91
4 Optionally, use the columns, starting at column K, to add static text levels. Enter the
level name on the second heading row.
Sample spreadsheet: Additional static text levels area
5 Repeat this procedure until you have added the required information for all the
programs you wish to monitor.
Adding a Source-Specific or Source-Filtered Multicast Transport Stream

To add a source-specific multicast (SSM) or source-filtered multicast (SFM) transport
stream
2 Expand the System hierarchical list, and then click the appropriate network adapter
element, for the stream you wish to add:
• NETWORK ADAPTER 2 for a high-bitrate stream;
• alternatively, NETWORK ADAPTER 3, 4, 5, or 6, for a high-bitrate stream, in the case
of a four-port or six-port Kaleido-IP model;
• optionally, NETWORK ADAPTER 1 for a low-bitrate stream.
The supported stream types (Multicast, Unicast) are listed in the Tools pane.
92
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
3 Drag Multicast from the Tools pane onto the network adapter.
The Multicast Stream Configuration window appears.
4 In Multicast Stream Configuration, replace the default stream name if desired, select
the appropriate protocol (RTP, UDP), type the multicast group address and port
number associated with the transport stream you wish to add.
Notes
• The Kaleido-X software supports UTF-8 encoded stream names. The only
characters, which cannot be used in a stream name are: @ / \ ' and ".
• Verify the protocol you selected. Registering an RTP stream as UDP instead
of RTP may result in the decoded video appearing jerky or accelerated on
the monitor wall.
5 Select the Source specific multicast (SSM) check box, type the IP address associated
with the specific source you wish to monitor in the Source IP address box, and then
click OK.
Note: In the case of streams that are available from the same multicast
group address and port number, you must enter the source IP address
associated with a stream before you can add the next one.
The Kaleido-IP establishes a connection with the selected SSM/SFM stream. All
programs that are part of the selected stream, and the elementary streams included in
these programs, automatically appear under the transport stream element in the
System list.
93
Source IP address
Group address
Port number (or range)
Protocol
Transport stream
Program
Elementary stream (audio)
Elementary stream (video)
Note: Under the network adapter elements, transport streams are listed in
alphabetical order.
6 Repeat this procedure until you have added all required SSM/SFM transport streams to
your system configuration.
Adding an Any-Source Multicast Transport Stream

To add an any-source multicast (ASM) transport stream
94
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
3 Drag Multicast from the Tools pane onto the network adapter.
The Multicast Stream Configuration window appears.
4 In Multicast Stream Configuration, replace the default stream name if desired, select
the appropriate protocol (RTP, UDP), type the multicast group address and port
number associated with the transport stream you wish to add, and then click OK.
Notes
the monitor wall.
The Kaleido-IP establishes a connection with the selected stream. All programs that are
part of the stream, and the elementary streams included in these programs,
automatically appear under the transport stream element in the System list.
95
Group address
Port number (or range)
Protocol
Transport stream
Program
Elementary stream (audio)
Elementary stream (video)
alphabetical order.
5 Repeat this procedure until you have added all required ASM transport streams to your
system configuration.
Adding a Unicast Transport Stream

To add a unicast transport stream
96
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
3 Drag Unicast from the Tools pane onto the network adapter element.
The Unicast Stream Configuration window appears.
4 In Unicast Stream Configuration, replace the default stream name if desired, select the
appropriate protocol (RTP, UDP), type the port number associated with the transport
stream you wish to add, and then click OK.
Notes
the monitor wall.
• When adding unicast transport streams do not specify consecutive port
numbers.
• Under the network adapter elements, transport streams are listed in
alphabetical order.
5 Repeat this procedure until you have added all required unicast transport streams to
your system configuration.
97
Modifying a Transport Stream

To modify the settings for a transport stream
2 Expand the System hierarchical list, and then navigate to the transport stream you wish
to configure.
alphabetical order.
The settings for the selected stream appear in the Properties pane.
Stream source settings (example showing settings for an any-source multicast stream)
3 Replace the default stream name if desired, select the appropriate protocol (RTP, UDP),
and enter the multicast group IP address (in the case of a multicast stream) and port
number associated with the actual transport stream you wish to monitor. In the case of
an SSM (or SFM) stream, enter the IP address associated with the specific source you
wish to monitor in the SSM source IP address box.
98
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Notes
the monitor wall.
Removing Transport Streams

To remove transport streams from your system configuration
2 Expand the System hierarchical list, and then navigate to the multicast transport
stream you wish to remove.
3 If you wish to remove multiple transport streams in a single operation, then extend
your selection by using the standard Shift+click or Ctrl+click keyboard shortcuts.
4 Right-click the selection, and then click Remove.
99
5 When prompted to confirm, click Yes.

Changes to the system are saved. If you are not planning on adding these streams back
to your system, then you may now wish to remove logical sources that were based on
them: see Removing Logical Sources for Removed Programs in a Transport Stream, on
page 160.
Managing Cards in a Kaleido-X System Representation

To configure a Kaleido-X (4RU), Kaleido-X (7RU), or Kaleido-X (14RU) expansion system
The main pane displays the System hierarchical list, and the Tools pane displays the
equipment library when the root of the System list is selected.
2 Expand the System root, and the multiviewer.
Note: In the case of an expansion system, then you need to first expand the
dual frame element, under which both frames A and B are listed. You can
then configure each of the two frames as described below.
The card slots appear in the hierarchical list. If you already loaded the factory defaults
for the multiviewer model, then some slots are already populated with a card.
100
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
3 Add or remove cards until the system’s card slots are populated with cards that match
the hardware configuration of your multiviewer: see Emptying Card Slots, below, and
Populating Card Slots, on page 101, for details.
You new system representation is saved.
Emptying Card Slots

To empty a Kaleido-X multiviewer’s card slots
1 In the System list, right-click the populated slot you wish to empty.
2 If you wish to empty multiple slots in a single operation, extend your selection by using
the standard Shift+click or Ctrl+click keyboard shortcuts.
3 Right-click your selection and then click Remove on the shortcut menu.
Alternatively click the populated card slot, and then press Delete on your keyboard.
Note: With the current version of XEdit, pressing Delete to empty card slots
is only supported in the case of a single-card selection.
The slots are now empty and the card type does not appear any more next to the slot
name.
Empty slot
Populating Card Slots

To populate a Kaleido-X multiviewer’s slots with cards
1 In the System list, right-click the slot you wish to populate.
101
Restoring Factory Defaults
2 If you wish to populate multiple slots in a single operation, extend your selection to
other slots of the same type by using the standard Shift+click or Ctrl+click keyboard
shortcuts.
3 Right-click your selection and then click Insert [card type] on the shortcut menu.
Alternatively drag the card from the equipment library onto the empty card slot.
Note: With the current version of XEdit, dragging a card from the
equipment library is only supported in the case of a single-card selection.
The slot name is now appended with the card type: for example, INPUT D - KXI-16.
Populated slot

A number of predefined rooms and layouts are available on the multiviewer itself when you
first receive your system. However, if you start configuring a system in XEdit by using the
default database XEdit creates for the multiviewer model you selected, you will need to
create your own rooms and layouts. The default XEdit-created databases have a number of
pre-populated cards and logical sources, as well as one predefined RCP user (“Admin”), but
they do not include rooms or layouts. See Restoring the XEdit Factory Defaults for a
Multiviewer on page 103.
Sample factory-default databases with rooms and layouts are available on the DVD that
shipped with your system, and from Miranda’s support portal. If you wish to use default
rooms and layouts as a starting point for building your system, you can either import the
factory-default database from the multiviewer (see Restoring Factory Defaults From a
102
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Specific Multiviewer, on page 105), or use XEdit’s Restore backup function to load the
appropriate database from the DVD, or from the support portal (see Restoring Factory
Defaults From the Kaleido-X DVD, on page 106).
In some situations you may wish to repurpose an existing XEdit database that was designed
for a specific multiviewer and use it with a different multiviewer model. After the database
is converted, it may still include calibrations that were only relevant to the original
multiviewer model. This is not desirable if the new system has limited memory compared to
the original one. In such a case, restoring the factory-default calibrations and then
calibrating your new system as required is faster than recreating rooms and layouts.
It is also possible to reset resolutions, audio scales or widget libraries to their factory default
definitions.
Restoring Factory-Default Calibrations
Note: If you already have custom resolutions or audio scales that you may
wish to reuse, make sure you have a back up before proceeding. See Backing
Up Resolutions on page 75 and Backing Up Audio Scales, on page 76, for
details. Custom monitors are not affected by this operation since they can
only be added to custom widget libraries, and these are stored
independently from the XEdit workspace.
To restore the factory-default audio scales, calibrations, resolutions, or widget libraries

• On the Configure menu, point to Database, then to Restore defaults, and then click
Calibrations, Resolutions, Audio scales, Widget libraries, or All of the above.
The selected elements are reset to their factory-default definitions.
Restoring the XEdit Factory Defaults for a Multiviewer
IMPORTANT
If you already have rooms or layouts that you wish to keep, make sure to back
up the XEdit database before restoring the factory defaults. The XEdit factory
defaults do not include any rooms or layouts.
103
To restore the XEdit factory defaults for a multiviewer model

1 Right-click the current multiviewer in the System list, and then select the appropriate
multiviewer model—Kaleido-X16-S, Kaleido-X16-D, Kaleido-X (4RU), Kaleido-X (7RU),
Kaleido-X (14RU), Kaleido-Modular, Kaleido-MX, Kaleido-IP-2, Kaleido-IP-4 or
Kaleido-IP-6—, from the “replace with...” options on the menu.
Note:
If you are working in online mode, the set of multiviewer models available
from the menu varies according to the current model. If the current model is
a Kaleido-IP, then only the other Kaleido-IP models are available for
selection.
Conversely, if the current model is not a Kaleido-IP, then none of the

Kaleido-IP models are available for selection.

Kaleido-X16-S Kaleido-X16 (single output)
Kaleido-X16-D Kaleido-X16 (dual output)
104
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual

Kaleido-X (14RU) Two Kaleido-X (7RU) frames, with expansion cards
Kaleido-Modular Any KMV-3901/3911, Kaleido-XQUAD, or Kaleido-XQUAD-DUAL
Kaleido-MX Any Kaleido-MX, or Kaleido-Modular-X
Kaleido-IP-2 Kaleido-IP X100, or Kaleido-IP X300 with two network adapters
Kaleido-IP-4 Kaleido-IP X300 with four network adapters
Kaleido-IP-6 Kaleido-IP X300 with six network adapters
A message appears, prompting you to confirm your intention.
2 Click Yes.
XEdit then prompts you to confirm that you want to restore the factory defaults for the
multiviewer model you chose.
3 Click Yes.
The selected multiviewer model appears in the System hierarchical list.
Restoring Factory Defaults From a Specific Multiviewer
Note: See Importing a Database on page 70, for details.
To restore factory defaults from a multiviewer

1 On the Configure menu, point to Database, and then click Import.
A window appears, prompting you for the IP address of the multiviewer whose factory-
default database you wish to import.
105
the box.
A window appears, prompting you to confirm that you really want to import data from
the multiviewer.
3 Click Yes.
A progress window appears, followed by a message stating whether the import
succeeded or not.
4 Click OK.
Restoring Factory Defaults From the Kaleido-X DVD
Notes
• The factory default databases are also available from the Software and
documentation section of Miranda’s support portal.
• See Restoring a Backup on page 76, for more information on restoring a
database.
To restore factory defaults from the Kaleido-X DVD

The Restore backup window appears.
2 In Restore backup, navigate to the Kaleido-X DVD, locate the appropriate default
database for your multiviewer model—for instance, Kaleido-X (7RU).zip, if you
have a Kaleido-X (7RU)—, select it, and then click Open.
3 Click Yes.
Factory Defaults by Multiviewer Model
Logical
Model Database sources Rooms Layouts RCP users
Kaleido-IP-2 Kaleido-IP-2.zip 8 1 5 1 (Admin)
106
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Factory Defaults by Multiviewer Model (continued)

Logical
KMV-3901/3911 8 × 2, Kaleido-Modular- 8 1 30 1 (Admin)
Kaleido-XQUAD-DUAL 8X2_16_9_Displays.zip,
Kaleido-Modular-
8X2_16_10_Displays.zip
KMV-3901/3911 8 × 1 Kaleido-Modular- 8 1 22 1 (Admin)
8X1_16_9_Display.zip
KMV-3911 4 × 2 Kaleido-Modular- 4 1 22 1 (Admin)
4X2_16_9_Displays.zip
KMV-3911 4 × 1, Kaleido- Kaleido-Modular- 4 1 22 1 (Admin)
XQUAD 4X1_16_9_Display.zip
Kaleido-MX 8 × 1, Kaleido-MX-8x1.zip 8 1 8 1 (Admin)
Kaleido-Modular-X 8 × 1
Kaleido-MX 48× 2, Kaleido-MX-48x2.zip 48 1 13 1 (Admin)
Kaleido-X16-S Kaleido-X16-S.zip 16 1 21 1 (Admin)
Kaleido-X16-D Kaleido-X16-D.zip 16 1 21 1 (Admin)
Kaleido-X (4RU) Kaleido-X (4RU).zip 32 2 4 1 (Admin)
107
Managing Multiple Databases Efficiently
Factory Defaults by Multiviewer Model (continued)

Logical
Managing Multiple Databases Efficiently

To avoid mistakes in managing databases, especially when multiple multiviewers are
involved, it is recommended to follow the rules below:
• Back up the database for each system to a central repository, separate from the local
workspace you use when working in XEdit offline.
• When using XEdit, limit yourself to a single workspace. When working online, the local
workspace is not used. When working offline, first either import the database from the
appropriate multiviewer into your XEdit workspace, or restore the latest backup for the
system you wish to work on.
• When your work session in XEdit is complete, always create a new backup of the
database, regardless of whether you were working online or offline.
The next sections describe three typical situations, summarized below:
Online Offline System restore from backup (offline)
1 Work in XEdit. 1 Import database from 1 Restore backup from central
2 Back up database multiviewer into local repository into local workspace.
from multiviewer workspace. 2 Work in XEdit, if needed...
to central 2 Work in XEdit. ...and then back up database
repository. 3 Back up database from from local workspace to central
local workspace to repository.
central repository. 3 Export database from local
4 Export database from workspace to multiviewer.
local workspace to
multiviewer.
Working Online
If you are connected to a multiviewer, and working online in XEdit, you are actually editing
the database that is located inside the multiviewer’s file system. There is one database per
multiviewer. An expansion system, comprising two Kaleido-X (7RU) frames, is also managed
through a single database. A cluster system includes one database for each multiviewer in
the cluster, which are backed up or restored as a single operation. When you have
completed your changes, create a backup of the current system and store it in a secure
location on your PC.
To back up the current Kaleido-X system
1 On the Configure menu, point to Database, to Create backup, and then click All.
108
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
2 Browse to the secure location on your PC where you store all your database backups
(e.g. MirandaDatabaseBackups), and type a name for the new backup, preferably a
name that includes the multiviewer name and the date (e.g. KX_A&B_08_12_02.zip).
Working Offline
When using XEdit offline, you work inside a workspace located on your client PC. You set
the location for this workspace when you first opened XEdit. It is recommended to consider
this workspace as a “sandbox” into which you import the database you wish to work on
during this session, and from which you export the database at the end of the session.
TIP
Once you are satisfied with the location of your local workspace, on the
Configure menu, point to Database, and then select the Do not prompt for
the database path check box, to avoid being prompted every time you
open XEdit.
See Importing a Database on page 70, for instructions on how to import the database from
a specific multiviewer into your workspace. Once the import is completed, you can work
locally, in your XEdit workspace. When you have completed your changes, export the
database from the workspace, back to the multiviewer.
Applying a Backup Database to the Multiviewer

To restore a backup database, you must use XEdit in offline mode. A backup database must
first be restored to your local workspace before it can be exported back to the appropriate
multiviewer.
To restore a backup database
A window appears, prompting you to locate a backup database.
2 Navigate to your central backup storage area, select the backup database you wish to
restore, and then click Open.
3 Click Yes.
Once the operation completes, your XEdit workspace area will contain the restored
database. You can now work on this database in offline mode, or export it back to the
multiviewer.
109
Calibrating the Kaleido-X
A Kaleido-X system includes a number of cards or modules that process a variety of signal
types. This section explains how to calibrate features related with the different signal types.
Key Concepts
IMPORTANT
Calibration changes are applied immediately.
Unlike other elements in a multiviewer configuration, system
calibrations do not need to be saved.
• When using XEdit in online mode, calibration changes become
immediately effective.
• When using XEdit in offline mode, calibration changes are applied to
the system representation in your local workspace.
Multiviewer Output Calibrations

Brightness The green, red, and blue brightness parameters determine the black
level of the RGB output signals shown on the corresponding display. See
Calibrating the Brightness and Contrast on page 114.
Contrast The green, red, and blue contrast parameters determine the white level
of the RGB output signals shown on the corresponding display. See
Calibrating the Brightness and Contrast on page 114.
Color saturation The color saturation of an RGB output signal can be adjusted so that
colors in the video windows will match the surrounding graphical
elements on the corresponding display. See Calibrating the Color
Saturation on page 116.
DVI keying mode Depending on your purposes, key material provided through the DVI
input can be set either as a background or as a foreground for the layout
shown on the monitor wall. See Calibrating the DVI Keying Mode on
page 117.
Audio monitoring The audio monitoring delay parameter can be adjusted to optimize the
delay relative timing of the audio and video signals on the monitor wall
display. See Calibrating the Audio Monitoring Delay on page 119.
Audio monitoring Audio monitors can have an indicator that changes color depending on
color the output display where audio monitoring of the associated audio level
is taking place. The default color is a shade of blue. See Calibrating the
Audio Monitoring Color on page 120.
111
Key Concepts
Multiviewer Input Calibrations

Detail enhancer The purpose of the detail enhancer parameter is to recover sharpness
that may have been lost in the de-interlacing and scaling process. See
Calibrating Detail Enhancement and Dynamic Range on page 127.
Dynamic range The dynamic range parameter determines the color model to be
applied: either full-range RGB (0-255) or video RGB (16-235). Full-range
RGB is also called computer RGB; video RGB is also called studio RGB. See
Calibrating Detail Enhancement and Dynamic Range on page 127.
Aspect ratio Unlike HD signals where aspect ratio information, when available, always
follows the SMPTE 2016 standard, there are different standards for
encoding aspect ratio information in SD signals. In the case of the
Kaleido-X and Kaleido-X16 multiviewers, the AFD & WSS calibrations
determine which standard will be applied by default to SD signals
feeding the selected multiviewer input. The aspect ratio of video
windows on the monitor wall can then be automatically adjusted, based
on the current source assignment. See Calibrating Aspect Ratio
Decoding on page 126.
Note: In the case of the Kaleido-IP, AFD information can be extracted
and monitored. However, the Kaleido-X software does not yet support
automatic aspect ratio adjustment on the monitor wall for signals
originating from a Kaleido-IP. The KMV-3901/3911 multiviewers do not
support decoding of a signal’s aspect ratio from AFD or WSS metadata.
NTSC standard The NTSC and NTSC-J standards are different with regard to their black
level. This parameter determines which standard is to be applied to the
selected analog input signal.
Subtitling/closed Presence alarms can be configured against up to four preset Teletext
captioning (WST) pages for each input signal. The Teletext page selection
parameters determine which pages will be monitored. The Teletext page
set as Page A will also be decoded, and its content can be displayed in a
video window. Requires the CC/XDS option (see Hardware and Software
Options, on page 383). There are also subtitling calibrations for the CEA-
608 CC and the DTVCC alarms. See Calibrating Subtitling/Closed
Captioning on page 127.
Metadata holding The holding time parameters determine the delay after which decoded
time metadata such as closed captions, subtitles, or XDS metadata will be
cleared. Requires the CC/XDS option (see Hardware and Software
Options, on page 383). Refer to Calibrating Metadata Holding Time, on
page 128 for details.
Zero VU (dBu) The Zero VU (dBu) parameters determine the reference level to be
applied to the selected analog (from ABT) input signal. Its default value
is 4 dBu, on a range of -24 dBu to 8 dBu. See Calibrating Zero VU
Reference Level for an ABT Audio Source on page 122.
112
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Multiviewer Input Calibrations (continued)

Zero VU (dBFS) The Zero VU (dBFS) parameters determine the reference level to be
applied to the selected digital (embedded, or from ABT) audio signal.
dBFS stands for decibels full scale. Zero dBFS corresponds to the
maximum possible level. By default the reference level for a it is set to -
20 dBFS, on a range of -24 dBFS to -8 dBFS. The extraction of digital
audio requires the KXS-HD-EMB or KXS-SD-EMB option (see Hardware
and Software Options, on page 383). Refer to Calibrating Zero VU
Reference Level for an Embedded Audio Source, on page 121 for details.
Loudness/dialnorm The dialnorm value that can be found in the Dolby VANC metadata is an
indication of the average level of dialogue in the audio stream. The
loudness is a measure of the average level of an audio stream. It is
possible to configure alarms that will be triggered whenever the
measured loudness is not within an acceptable range (1) compared to
the encoded dialnorm, or (2) compared to the reference dialnorm for
your organization, or (3) when the encoded dialnorm itself deviates too
much from the reference dialnorm for your organization. The related
parameters determine the loudness measuring standard you wish to
apply, the channels that are involved in the measurement, the reference
dialnorm level for your organization, and the ranges outside of which
alarms will be triggered. Requires the KXS-Loudness option (see
Hardware and Software Options, on page 383). Refer to Calibrating
Dolby VANC Loudness Measurement, on page 123 for details.
Dolby E selection Dolby E audio can be decoded from two of eight AES pairs within a
signal’s embedded audio stream. The Dolby E selection parameters
determine which AES pairs will be used. Requires the Dolby E option (see
Enabling Options, on page 411). Refer to Calibrating Dolby E Audio
Metadata, on page 125 for details.
Router Output Calibrations

Switch field The switch field parameter determines whether the router module will
selection perform clean crosspoint changes on the odd (field 1) on the even (field
2) field, or on any field. See Calibrating Switch Field Selection on
page 130.
SDI output The SDI output reclocking parameter determine whether digital video
reclocking signals will have their timing restored at the selected output, to
eliminate jitter. Reclocking is typically used in installations with large
routing devices or long cables in the signal path. See Calibrating SDI
Signal Reclocking on page 131.
113
Detailed Directions
GPI/Genlock Calibrations
GPI line direction On Kaleido-X systems with a GPI/genlock module, GPI lines can be
configured as inputs or outputs. On the Kaleido-X16 and KMV-
3901/3911 multiviewer models, the GPI lines are unidirectional (4 out
and 32 in for the Kaleido-X16, 2 out and 8 in for the KMV-3901/3911). In
all cases, the state of any GPI output can be set manually for test
purposes, by using their ON/OFF calibration. See GPI/Genlock
Calibrations on page 132.
Detailed Directions
Calibrating the Brightness and Contrast
Note: The KMV-3901/3911 multiviewers do not support brightness and

contrast calibrations.
Each of the output heads in the multiviewer can drive a monitor wall display. For each head,
output parameters can be adjusted to optimize the image on the monitor wall display: the
brightness parameters set the black offsets of the RGB output signals; and the contrast
parameters set the gain offsets of these signals.
To calibrate the brightness and contrast parameters
A hierarchical list representing the current system appears.
2 In the list, expand the multiviewer whose output heads you wish to calibrate.
3 Expand the appropriate output module.

The expanded module will show the output heads. (Depending on the multiviewer
model, other items may also appear.)
114
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Output heads 1 and 2
4 Select the head you wish to calibrate.

5 Click the Properties tab.
The brightness and contrast adjustment controls appear. Expand the headings to show
the controls if they are not visible.
6 Use the sliders to adjust the brightness and contrast until you obtain a pleasing
presentation of the video elements on the monitor wall display driven by the selected
head. Alternatively, type values directly in the Red, Green (master), and Blue boxes.
Note: Moving the Green (master) slider will move the Red and the Blue
sliders by the same amount.
The values must be between 0 and 100.
A good approach is to set all values the same using the Red and Blue sliders,
then to adjust for the best overall presentation using the Green (master)
slider, and finally to fine-tune the color balance using the Red and the Blue
sliders.
7 If appropriate, you may copy settings from this head to every output head in the system.
For each value you wish to apply globally throughout your system, click the
corresponding Apply to all button.
115
This has the same effect as selecting every output head one by one, and adjusting the
sliders to the same value for the selected parameter.
Note: If you want to apply the same values to all the other output heads in
your system, you must click the Apply to all button for Green (master) FIRST,
and then the Apply to all buttons for blue and red in any order. Otherwise
the values for blue and red would be modified following the application of
the value for green.
Calibrating the Color Saturation
Note: The Kaleido-IP and KMV-3901/3911 multiviewers do not support

color saturation calibration.
Each of the output heads in the multiviewer can drive a monitor wall display. The image on
the monitor wall contains both graphical elements created by the Kaleido-X system, and
video signals that are passed through the system. It is often useful to be able to modify the
color saturation of the video so that its appearance within the graphical environment is
pleasing. The Color saturation calibration control provides this function.
The color saturation calibration does not affect the graphical elements within the monitor
wall display.
To calibrate the color saturation

116
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual

The color saturation adjustment control appears. Expand the Calibration heading to
show the control if it is not visible.
6 Use the slider to adjust the color saturation until you obtain a pleasing presentation of
the video elements on the monitor wall display driven by the selected head.
Alternatively, type a value (between 0 and 100) directly in the Color saturation box.
Note: All videos on the monitor wall display controlled by the selected
head are adjusted simultaneously.
7 If appropriate, you may copy the settings from this head to every output head in the
system. To apply the color saturation settings globally throughout your system, click
Apply to all.
Color saturation slider to the same value.
Calibrating the DVI Keying Mode

Kaleido-X and Kaleido-X16 multiviewers have a DVI input connector for every output head.
Using these connectors, it is possible to feed keying material to the multiviewer. Depending
117
on your purposes, the content provided through the DVI input can be set either as a
background or as a foreground for the layout shown on the monitor wall.
Notes
• The Kaleido-IP and KMV-3901/3911 multiviewers do not support DVI
keying.
• Background keying is enabled by default, and should remain enabled
when no actual keying is involved. Enabling the foreground keying mode
when there is no signal at the associated DVI input is not supported.
• For more information about using content from the DVI input as
background, refer to Setting up a Layout for Background Keying from the
DVI Input, on page 211.
To calibrate the DVI keying mode



5 Click the Properties tab, and then select the appropriate value from the DVI Input
Keying Mode list.
118
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
system: to apply the selected DVI input keying mode globally throughout your system,
click Apply to all.
This has the same effect as configuring every output head one by one, and selecting
the same keying mode for each.
Calibrating the Audio Monitoring Delay

Each of the output heads in the Kaleido-X multiviewer is associated with two audio output
channels. The monitoring output is simultaneously available on one AES and two analog
connections. For each head, output parameters can be adjusted to optimize the relative
timing of the audio and video signals on the monitor wall display. The Audio monitoring
delay calibration control provides this function.
Notes
• By design, the audio signal is approximately 37 ms ahead of the video.
• The Kaleido-IP and KMV-3901 multiviewer models do not support audio
monitoring delay calibration.
To calibrate the audio monitoring delay for a head


119

The audio monitoring delay adjustment control appears. Expand the Calibration
heading to show the control if it is not visible.
6 Select the appropriate unit (milliseconds or AES samples), and then use the slider to
adjust the audio monitoring delay until the audio and video are well synchronized on
the monitor wall display driven by the selected head. Alternatively, type a value
(between 0 and 100 ms, or between 4 and 4800 AES samples) directly in the Audio
monitoring delay box.
Note: All videos on the monitor wall display controlled by the selected
head are adjusted simultaneously.
system. To apply the audio monitoring delay calibration globally throughout your
system, click Apply to all.
audio monitoring delay settings to the same values.
Calibrating the Audio Monitoring Color

To calibrate the audio monitoring color
120
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual



5 In the Properties tab, click Audio Monitoring Color, and then click the button that
appears at the end of the line.
Click to open the
color picker window
6 In Pick a Color, click the tab that corresponds to the color space you wish to use, and
then choose the color that will be associated with the selected output head.
7 Click OK to close the color picker window.
Calibrating Zero VU Reference Level for an Embedded Audio Source
Note: This section does not apply to the Kaleido-IP.
121
To calibrate an audio source

2 In the list, expand the multiviewer whose inputs you wish to calibrate.
3 Expand the appropriate input, then one of its embedded audio elements, and select
Zero VU.
4 In the Properties pane, set the reference level to the appropriate value (in dBFS), using
the Zero VU slider, under Calibration. Alternatively, type the value directly in the Zero
VU box.
5 Click Apply to all to apply the chosen Zero VU reference value throughout the system.
Calibrating Zero VU Reference Level for an ABT Audio Source
Notes
• The KMV-3901/3911 only supports embedded audio, not discrete audio
sources from an ABT.
• This section does not apply to the Kaleido-IP.
To calibrate an ABT audio source

122
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
3 Expand the appropriate input, its ABT element, and then one of the ABT’s audio
elements. Select Zero VU.

5 Set the reference levels to the appropriate values (in dBFS, and in dBu), using the Zero
VU sliders, under Calibration. Alternatively, type the values directly in the Zero VU
boxes.
6 Click Apply to all to apply the chosen Zero VU reference values throughout the system.
Calibrating Dolby VANC Loudness Measurement
Note: This section does not apply to the Kaleido-IP or KMV-3901/3911.
To calibrate an audio source

3 Expand the appropriate input, and then click Loudness - dialnorm.
4 Click the Properties tab, and then set the appropriate values for your installation.
123
The following values are involved:
Parameter Description
Expected dialnorm Type your organization’s reference dialnorm value in the box, or set
it using the slider. The default value is -27 dB, on a scale of -60 dB to
0 dB. This value can then be compared against the measured
loudness, and against the encoded dialnorm found in the Dolby
VANC data.
Max. lower The Max. lower deviation parameter determines the tolerated
deviation excursion range below the reference value. The measured levels and
the encoded dialnorm can be compared against each other and
against your organization's expected dialnorm, and alarms
triggered in case of too much deviation. The default value is -5.4 dB,
on a scale of -64 dB to 0 dB.
Note: Setting this parameter to its lowest value (-64 dB) will
prevent the Loudness/Expected alarm from being triggered when
silence is detected.
Max. upper The Max. upper deviation parameter determines the tolerated
deviation excursion range above the reference value. The measured levels and
the encoded dialnorm can be compared against each other and
against your organization's expected dialnorm, and alarms
triggered in case of too much deviation.The default value is 2.4 dB,
on a scale of 0 dB to 15 dB.
Loudness standard Select the standard you wish to apply: either the A-weighted Leq
(LEQ(A)) or the ITU-R BS.1770 metering ballistics.
Note: Mixing standards for different inputs is not supported.
Loudness channel Select the check boxes corresponding to the audio channels that
selection should contribute to the loudness measurement.
Note: The current version of the Kaleido-X software can measure
loudness against a maximum of 8 channels. If you select more than 8
channels, only the first 8 will be used.
124
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Calibrating Dolby E Audio Metadata
Notes
• The KMV-3901/3911 and Kaleido-IP do not support extraction of Dolby E
metadata.
• Dolby E decoding can be enabled by purchasing the Dolby E option. In the
case of a Kaleido-X multiviewer model, one license is needed per input
card. See Enabling Options on page 411.
• Dolby E decoding is not yet supported on the Audio Bridge Terminal
(ABT).
To calibrate audio metadata

3 Expand the appropriate input, and then click Dolby E selection.
4 In the Properties tab, select the AES pairs (among Embedded audio 1 to Embedded
audio 8) associated with the two Dolby E programs to be decoded, from the two lists:
Dolby E selection 1 and Dolby E selection 2.
125
Calibrating Aspect Ratio Decoding
Note: This section applies to Kaleido-X and Kaleido-X16 multiviewers that

are used to monitor SD signals. In the case of HD signals, since the AFD
information always follows AFD 2016, no calibration is needed. No
calibration is needed for the Kaleido-IP either, since it supports decoding of
a signal’s aspect ratio from AFD metadata only. The KMV-3901/3911 does not
support decoding of aspect-ratio information. See page 112 for more
information.
Aspect ratio information can be encoded following different standards: AFD 2016, AFD VI,
or WSS. The following table shows the different standards and their availability according to
the signal type:
Wide screen
Video index signaling
Signal type AFD 2016 (AFD VI) (WSS)
HD Yes — —
SD 525 Yes Yes —
SD 625 Yes Yes Yes
AFD VI information can be encoded as 4 bits or 3 bits (legacy).

To select the AFD source for an SD signal
3 Expand the appropriate input, and then click AFD & WSS.
5 Select Legacy AFD 3 bits to support the legacy AFD 3-bit format for the video index.
6 Select the appropriate value from the SD AFD source list.
126
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
The default value is Auto which means that the multiviewer will automatically detect
what is present in the signal and use it to report AFD. If more than one AFD type is
present in the signal, and SD AFD source is set to Auto, then the AFD type is selected in
this order: (1) AFD 2016 first, (2) AFD VI, or (3) WSS.
7 Click Apply to all to apply the associated setting to all video inputs on your
multiviewer.
Calibrating Detail Enhancement and Dynamic Range
Note: The KMV-3901/3911 multiviewer does not support detail enhancer

calibrations.
To configure detail enhancement and dynamic range for a video signal

3 Expand the appropriate input, then one of its Video elements.
4 Under Video calibrations, click Detail enhancer, and then set the appropriate value
(between 0 and 15) in the Properties tab.
5 Click Dynamic range, and then set the appropriate value (either Full range or Video
range) in the Properties tab.
Calibrating Subtitling/Closed Captioning

To configure Teletext/Subtitling page selection
3 Expand the appropriate input, then one of its Video elements.
4 Under Teletext & Subtitling Alarms, expand the Page A element, and then click Page
selection.
127
5 In the Properties pane, type the page number you wish to be the default selection for
Page A, in the Teletext Page A Selection box. Alternatively, use the slider to set the
page number.
6 Click Apply to all if you wish this setting to be the default Page A selection for every
video signal on your system.
7 Repeat the procedure for the Page B, C, and D elements.
Note: On the monitor wall, only Page A will be available with the associated
video signal. However, alarms can be configured for all four preset pages.
See Configuring Alarm Debouncing on page 144 for instructions on how to
configure an alarm.
Calibrating Metadata Holding Time

To calibrate metadata holding time
128
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
3 Expand the appropriate Video element, select the metadata element whose holding
time you wish to configure, and then set the relevant values under Calibration in the
Properties tab:
CC holding time Set the delay (between 5 and 360 seconds) after which
closed captions (608) are cleared:
Subtitling holding time Set the delay (between 5 and 360 seconds) after which
subtitles are cleared:
129
XDS filtering Set the holding time (between 5 and 360 seconds) for
each XDS metadata element (APS, ASB, CGMS-A; channel
number; elapsed time; network name; program
description, ID, name, length, and type; station ID; TSID
name; time of day; time zone; V-chip rating).
DTVCC holding time Set the delay (between 15 and 360 seconds) after which
closed captions (708) are cleared:
You can type the value directly in the boxes, or use the slider controls.
Note: This section applies to the Kaleido-X16, Kaleido-X (7RU), and

expansion systems only.
Calibrating Switch Field Selection

To calibrate switch field selection for a router module
2 In the list, expand the multiviewer you wish to calibrate.
3 Expand the appropriate router module, and then click Switch field selection.
130
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
4 In the Properties tab, click the Switch field selection box, and then select the
appropriate field value from the list.
Calibrating SDI Signal Reclocking

To calibrate reclocking of a router module’s output signal
3 Expand the appropriate router output, and then click SDI output reclocking.
4 In the Properties tab, click the SDI output reclocking box, and then select ON or OFF
from the list.
131
5 Click Apply to all to apply the chosen value throughout the system.
You can define actions that change the state of a GPI output line, and assign them to a
monitor. GPI lines configured as outputs can have their ON/OFF state set manually in XEdit,
for test purposes.
Notes
• This topic does not apply to the Kaleido-IP.
• GPI direction is pre-defined on the Kaleido-X16 and KMV-3901/3911
multiviewers.
To configure a GPI line’s direction as an output

3 Expand the GPI/GENLOCK module, and then click the appropriate GPI line element.
4 In the Properties tab, click the GPI direction box, and then select output from the list.
5 Click Apply to all, if every GPI line in your system is to be configured as an output.
6 To set this GPI output line’s ON/OFF state set manually for test purposes, click the GPI
output box, and then select either ON or OFF from the list.
132
Configuring Alarms
Your Kaleido-X system can help you monitor alarm conditions efficiently. This section
describes how to configure alarm detection and alarm sharing parameters for your system.
This configuration is made in XEdit.
Key Concepts
Alarm
An alarm is a report on a single, defined condition (generated by a device or service) within
a multiviewer system. Depending on how it is configured, an alarm can alert an operator to
the occurrence of an event, a change in status, or a specific parameter value (text).
In XEdit, alarms generated by the current multiviewer are displayed in the System list and
you can review their status in real time when XEdit is connected to the multiviewer in
online mode. You can manage additional alarms, including alarms generated by external
devices, by using an alarm browser such as iControl’s GSM alarm browser or the alarm
browser pane in XEdit’s Build Virtual Alarm window.
General Status Manager (GSM)

The general status manager (GSM) is the service responsible for central management of all
alarm conditions within a monitoring and control system. Every Miranda multiviewer has a
GSM and can be configured to share GSM information with other multiviewers and iControl
systems. For example:
• Display alarm status information from Densité cards on the monitor wall.
• Display alarms detected within a Kaleido-X system on an iControl Web page.
• Display EdgeVision alarms along with the stream coming from the EdgeVision on a
Kaleido-IP multiviewer.
• Display alarm status information in XEdit (online mode).
• Create virtual alarms that combine a number of alarm statuses, not only within a single
system, but also from different devices within multiple Kaleido-X and iControl systems.
See Creating Virtual Alarms on page 145.
In addition, as of version 6.40 of the Kaleido-X software, it is possible to assign elements
from any GSM alarm browser to alarm levels in the sources table, directly, by a drag-and-
drop operation (see Configuring Logical Sources Based on External Alarm Providers, on
page 167).
133
Configuring Alarms
Alarm Browser
Alarm Browser
The alarm browser is a window, accessible from within iControl Navigator and other
iControl applications. XEdit’s Build Virtual Alarm window features an alarm browser pane.
The information that appears in the Alarm Browser is generated by a specific GSM. The
alarm browser displays a hierarchical view of all the alarms that have been discovered by
the GSM. The alarms may be related to Miranda devices, or other supported third-party
devices, and are organized into folders. The current status of each alarm is shown as an icon
next to its name. These status are dynamically updated.
Alarm Status
The current status of an alarm determines the color of the LED-like icon to the left of its
name, in XEdit, in GSM alarm browsers, and in iControl log viewers. Video monitors, UMDs
and alarm monitors have alarm reporting features (e.g. border color and thickness, blink
mode, latch) that can be customized in XEdit, when you create a layout.
Each possible alarm status is represented by a color. Alarm statuses are dynamically
updated. The Kaleido-X software supports the following alarm status values, described in
the table below: pending, normal (or OK), warning (or minor), major, critical, unknown,
nonexistent, and disabled. In a multiviewer’s System list and on the monitor wall, nonexistent
and unknown alarms are considered disabled.
Status Color Description

Pending White Alarm exists but was not reported yet: The software is waiting for
the hardware or driver to update the alarm.
In the case of a Kaleido-IP, alarms are decoded only when the
corresponding source is being monitored on the wall. Alarms
associated with sources that are currently not shown on the
monitor wall appear with a pending status in a Kaleido-IP System
list or GSM alarm browser.
Normal (or OK) Green No error detected.
Warning (or Yellow Supported for Gateway alarms only.
Minor)
Major Orange Supported for Gateway alarms only.
Critical Red Error detected.
Unknown Gray Could not get status: Failed to communicate with device to get
status. It could happen for example, if the network connection is
lost. Another example is a loss of signal that would trigger a
critical alarm for signal presence while the alarm state for all
other parameters would become unknown. The freeze or black
status is disabled if the signal is not present.
134
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Status Color Description

Nonexistent Blue Alarm that has been removed (or was never added): It can
happen if the alarm reference in XEdit does not exist on the
multiviewer — for example, if an input card is removed from a
Kaleido-X multiviewer. All associated alarms will disappear from
the GSM and become disabled on the multiviewer.
Disabled Black No alarm assigned to the status indicator: Alarm exists but is
disabled at the source by the user. The Kaleido-X software has the
ability to deactivate some alarms on the multiviewer hardware
itself.
External Alarm Provider

Once you have declared a device (e.g. an iControl application server, an EdgeVision quality
of experience monitoring system, another multiviewer) as an external alarm provider to
your multiviewer system, any alarms registered with this device’s GSM, in addition to the
alarms generated by the current multiviewer system, can contribute to your monitoring
and control purposes. See Managing Alarm Providers on page 144.
IMPORTANT
iControl application server requirement
In the case of an iControl system involving multiple application
servers, there will typically be only one or two of the servers with a
lookup service enabled. To qualify as an external alarm provider, an
iControl application server must have its lookup service enabled (i.e. it
must be a lookup server). Refer to the iControl User Guide for more
information.
Lookup Service
Miranda’s monitoring and control products implement a lookup service for discovery and
information sharing over a network. A program on one device can use a lookup service to
obtain information from remote applications or devices, including alarm-related
information from a device’s GSM. By default, every multiviewer has a lookup service and can
therefore be considered a lookup server. For example, before you can use an RCP-200
control panel to operate your monitor wall, the multiviewer must be specified as a lookup
server in the RCP-200’s configuration (see Specifying Lookup Servers for the RCP-200, on
page 403).
Alarm Debouncing
Alarm debouncing allows the filtering of false alarms. Two parameters can be calibrated:
the time required for an alarm event to be present before the system considers it to be valid
(to avoid false triggering of alarms), and the time required for an alarm state to be normal
before the system actually clears the alarm (to avoid false releasing of alarms).
An alarm is triggered when a probe is in a continuous error state for the number of seconds
specified in the Set duration debouncing parameter. By default, the alarm status will revert
to normal as soon as the probe returns a normal state. To delay the releasing of an alarm,
135
Configuring Alarms
Alarm Suppression
you can change its Clear duration parameter. The default debouncing parameters are as
follows:
Attribute Default value Range Description

Set duration 15 seconds 0 s – 300 s This is the time interval to wait before triggering
an alarm once a probe has been in a continuous
error state.
Clear duration 0 seconds 0 s – 90 s Once a probe has returned to a normal state (the
alarm condition is no longer detected), this is the
time interval to wait before resetting the alarm.
See Configuring Alarm Debouncing on page 144, for more information.
Notes
• The Kaleido-IP multiviewer does not yet support alarm-debouncing
calibrations. The default debouncing parameters apply to most alarms.
• As of version 6.60 of the Kaleido-X, the former Occurrences and Detection
window debouncing parameters have been removed. You may need to
revise your system’s alarm debouncing calibrations when you upgrade to
version 6.60 (or later) from version 6.50 (or earlier). Refer to the upgrade
instructions in the Kaleido-X Release Notes, for details.
• In the case of the video freeze alarm, the default debouncing settings are
appropriate for most purposes, when the intention is to detect a freeze.
Note, however, that it may take up to one second more than the value of
the Set duration parameter to trigger a video freeze alarm. On the other
hand, if your situation requires detecting movement (e.g, to detect that
nothing is put on air during an off-air period) then you may need to set an
appropriate reset delay for this alarm (e.g. 5 seconds) by using the Clear
Duration parameter.
Alarm Suppression
Alarms that are not relevant—momentarily or on a recurrent basis—can be squelched,
either manually or by defining schedules, so that only meaningful alarm information
remains to be monitored. A schedule can put an alarm in either of the following operational
modes: offline, in maintenance, or inverted.
Note: A background action triggered by an alarm is executed, regardless of

the alarm’s operational mode (see Creating Background Actions, on
page 270).
Global Alarms
A logical source comprises different level categories, including alarms. Each logical source
can include multiple alarm levels: one for each alarm state that can be reported to the
Kaleido-X system. In many cases, a single, combined status, based on all the alarms in every
alarm level for a logical source, is more useful than having to individually assess each and
136
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
every alarm condition detected. Such a global alarm combines all the individual alarm
statuses into an overall status, where the most critical events take precedence.
Example: Three alarms occur, two of which can be acknowledged without further
action, while the other one is considered an Error. In such a case, the overall alarm status
would be Error.
Each logical source has one global alarm for its alarms only. The global alarm is not directly
exposed in the Channels/Sources tab, but you can configure which alarm levels contribute
to your logical source’s global alarms. In the Layouts tab, you can assign a global alarm to a
layout element that supports alarm reporting, like a UMD or an alarm monitor. In the
Properties pane, the lists of alarm levels that can be assigned to a monitor include the item
GlobalAlarm, along with all the individual alarm levels.
You can select this global alarm not only as an alarm status, but also as a text label level.
When an individual alarm is in Error, its friendly name will contribute to the global alarm
text value. When the global alarm level is assigned to an alarm monitor, the text values for
all contributing alarms currently in Error will be visible.
Virtual Alarm
A virtual alarm allows you to derive a result from the status of one or more existing alarms.
Any alarms — including other virtual alarms — can be combined together to form a new,
higher-level virtual alarm. Since a virtual alarm can be composed of virtual alarms other
than itself, there can be many levels of virtual alarms within a particular virtual alarm. At this
time there is no limit to the number of levels that a virtual alarm can have. See Creating
Virtual Alarms on page 145.
Note: Creating a virtual alarm that includes itself as a sub-alarm, directly or

indirectly, creates a cyclical dependency. XEdit does not automatically check
for this dependency. Your multiviewer will, however, perform cycle
validation and will record an error in vroom.log if such a condition is
detected.
Sub-Alarm
A sub-alarm is an alarm that contributes to the status of a higher-level virtual alarm. The
effect of a sub-alarm’s contribution is determined by the way in which the higher-level
alarm is configured.
Alarm Monitor
Alarm monitors help you see the status of global and virtual alarms, but their use is not
limited to this type of alarms. When any alarm level is assigned to an alarm monitor, the
status of this alarm will be shown. When using the global alarm at the text label level, it will
display the text value of the alarm, which is a readable name. See Configuring Alarm
Monitors on page 244, for more information.
137
Configuring Alarms
Teletext, Subtitles, and Closed Captions
Teletext, Subtitles, and Closed Captions

Teletext subtitling (based on WST or OP-47), NTSC closed captioning (CEA-608), and ATSC
Digital Television Closed Captioning (CEA-708 DTVCC) can be displayed on the monitor
wall, allowing visual monitoring of decoded text from an analog or SDI video source. The
lines of text extracted from the video source metadata are displayed within the
corresponding video window.
Teletext may comprise up to 799 pages of displayable data (numbered from page 100 to
899). Teletext subtitles are decoded as described by the ETSI ETS 300 706 standard. At any
time, only one page can be decoded per video monitor and only one page can be decoded
per video source, for monitoring purposes. In addition, the multiviewer can monitor the
presence of up to three more pages (without decoding their content). Refer To Setting a
Video Monitor’s Text Mode, on page 223, and Displaying Subtitles and Closed Caption Text,
on page 40, for more information.
The following table contains a list of supported video formats, and the type of captioning,
teletext, or subtitling data that is decoded by default for each video format, when a video
monitor’s text mode is set to Auto sense: DTVCC (708), CC (608), teletext (OP-47 or WST), or
none.
Note: The CEA-708 standard supports legacy CEA-608 data. In the case of
an HD-SDI source carrying both 708 captions and 608 legacy caption data,
the multiviewer will display the 708 captions, and automatically fall back to
displaying the 608 captions only if the 708 data becomes unavailable.
Video format Decoded data Video format Decoded data

720p 59 94 Hz DTVCC (708) SDI 525 507 generic CC (608)
720p 59 94 Hz EM DTVCC (708) 720x480p 59 94 Hz DTVCC (708)
720p 29 97 Hz DTVCC (708) UNKNOWN HD None
720p 29 97 Hz EM DTVCC (708) UNKNOWN SD None
720p 50 Hz Teletext INVALID None
720p 50 Hz EM Teletext NTSC-M CC (608)
720p 25 Hz Teletext PAL-BGDHI Teletext
720p 25 Hz EM Teletext PAL 60 Hz Teletext
720p 24 Hz DTVCC (708) NTSC 50 Hz CC (608)
720p 24 Hz EM DTVCC (708) NTSC 4.43 CC (608)
1080i 59 94 Hz 30 Hz PSF DTVCC (708) PAL-N Teletext
1080p 29 97 Hz DTVCC (708) PAL-M Teletext
1080i 50 Hz 25 Hz PSF Teletext NTSC-N CC (608)
1080p 25 Hz Teletext NTSC-J CC (608)
1080p 25 Hz EM Teletext SECAM Teletext
1080 25PSF EM Teletext Component Y Only 525 None
1080p 23 98 Hz 24 Hz DTVCC (708) Component Y Only 625 None
138
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Video format Decoded data Video format Decoded data

1080p 23 98PSF 24PSF DTVCC (708) UNAVAILABLE None
1080p 24 Hz EM DTVCC (708) XGA None
1080 24PSF EM DTVCC (708) SXGA None
1080i 50 Hz Teletext WXGA None
1035i 59 94 Hz DTVCC (708) WSXGA PLUS None
SDI 525 CC (608) UXGA None
SDI 525 507 CC (608) UNSUPPORTED DVI None
SDI 625 Teletext 1080p 59.94 Hz DTVCC (708)
SDI 525 487 generic CC (608) 1080p 50 Hz Teletext
SDI 625 generic EM Teletext
Dolby E/AC-3 Metadata

Metadata (Dialnorm and Program config) information contained in a Dolby E audio stream
can be exposed on the monitor wall in text form. Dolby E and PCM audio levels can be
displayed via audio monitors. Decoding of Dolby E metadata embedded as ancillary data
(VANC) in the video stream is also supported.
• If multichannel audio (up to 8 channels) is coded in a Dolby E stream and transported
over a single AES channel, metadata and audio levels are extracted from the Dolby E
stream:
• Limited to 1 embedded audio source, selectable, no ABT support
• VU and Peak meters (8 channels), for each source
• Program config, for each source
• Dialnorm for program 1, for each source
• If multichannel audio (up to 16 channels) is transported as regular AES channels (up
to 8) in the SDI embedded audio, metadata is extracted from VANC packets:
• Program config
• Dialnorm for program 1
• VU and Peak meters come from the AES in PCM
Definitions
Term Definition
Dolby E stream A coded (compressed) 8-channel digital stream that fits inside an AES
channel (L/R)
Dolby metadata Metadata of Dolby E type such as dialnorm and program config
Dolby E extracted Dolby metadata extracted from a Dolby E stream. Includes audio level
[metadata] data from encoded audio data
VANC extracted Dolby metadata extracted from VANC packets. Audio level data is
[metadata] probed directly from the PCM AES signal
139
Configuring Alarms
Detailed Directions
Term Definition
Embedded audio 1 of the 8 SDI or HD-SDI embedded audio AES signals
source or channel
AES signal or source A bit stream for audio service
Multichannel audio Audio service or essence composed of more than 2 channels of audio
(more than Left and Right)
Audio Format
The format of each audio channel (PCM, Dolby AC-3, Dolby E, other or Unavailable) is
reported as a text attribute, that can be assigned to a text level within a logical source.
Metadata
The metadata extracted from the VANC and from the Dolby E is available as text in the XEdit
hierarchical system list, and therefore can be exposed via any layout element capable of
displaying text levels from logical sources (currently only UMDs).
Dialnorm is displayed as a numeric value between -31 and -1 dB. Program Config is
displayed as the Dolby E Program Config description. Unavailable is displayed if the source
is not being decoded, or is not Dolby E.
Logical Source Assignment

Logical source assignment is performed by dragging an AES pair onto a logical source’s
audio level.
For Dolby E, if the AES pair is calibrated as a Dolby E source, then the 8 channels are
available to be displayed by an audio monitor. The channel displayed by the audio monitor
depends on how the monitor was configured.
For Dolby VANC, if the audio monitor is set to Auto or Dolby VANC, the VANC metadata
from the video of the assigned AES will be decoded. The audio monitor will have access to
all amended audio peaks depending on VANC program configuration (regardless of which
AES pair was assigned to the logical source).
Detailed Directions
Configuring Alarm Thresholds

To configure the threshold for a video or audio alarm
1 Connect to the multiviewer you wish to configure, if you wish to apply the changes in
real time (see Connecting to a Multiviewer, on page 67).
Note: If this step is omitted, then you will need to export the database to
apply the calibration changes.
140
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
3 Navigate to the alarm whose threshold you wish to calibrate, by expanding the
appropriate multiviewer input, one of its Video elements, and then the alarm-related
elements (or the ABT element, and then one of the ABT’s audio elements).
Example of alarms related to video and embedded audio input signals,

for Kaleido-X, Kaleido-X16, and KMV-3901/3911 multiviewers.
141
Configuring Alarms
Configuring Alarm Thresholds
4 In the Properties tab, set the relevant values under Calibration.
Video Calibrations
Black detection Set the level (in IRE or mV) below which the signal will be considered
threshold to be black. By default the threshold is set at 8 IRE.
Freeze sensitivity Freeze detection is done by comparing successive frames. Noise in

the signal could disrupt this process, so filtering is added to remove it.
Adjust the sensitivity according to the signal being monitored, on a
range of 0 (for a noisy signal) to 16 (for a clean signal). By default the
sensitivity is set at 8, and the alarm will be triggered after at least 15
seconds of continuous freeze. Once the alarm is triggered it will only
be released if no other freeze condition is detected over the period
determined by the Clear duration parameter (by default, there is no
delay), to avoid unwanted alarm flickering that could be caused by
glitches on the signal.
Note that when setting the Clear duration parameter to any value
other than 0, it may happen that the freeze alarm will only be released
after a long time (longer than the value of the period determined by
the Clear duration parameter) if the video has short-duration freezes
during this period.
SD/HD detection Determine the video window area to be monitored for Freeze and
zone Black detection. Two detection zones can be configured: one for SD
signals, one for HD signals.
Luma too high Set the level (in IRE or mV) above which Luma too high will be
detection reported. By default the threshold is set at 100 IRE.
threshold
Audio Calibrations
Silence Select the level (in dB or dBFS for digital audio sources, in dB or dBu
left/right/center for analog audio sources) below which the audio signal will be
considered silenced. The default value is –55 dBFS, on a range of -63
to 0.
142
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
All silent / All silent Select the level (in dB or dBFS for digital audio sources, in dB or dBu
program 2 for analog audio sources) below which an audio signal will be
considered silenced. An alarm is raised if all available channels are
below the threshold. The default value is –55 dBFS, on a range of -63
to 0.
Overload left/right Select the level (in dB or dBFS for digital audio sources, in dB or dBu
for analog audio sources) above which the audio signal will be
considered overloaded. The default value is –5 dBFS, on a range of -63
to 0.
Out of phase Select the sensitivity level below which the audio signal will be
considered out of phase. The sensitivity is a value between -1 and +1,
where -1 means completely out of phase and +1 means perfectly in
phase. The default value is 0.
Mono An audio source is considered to be mono if the left and right signals
are perfectly in phase (i.e. more likely to be the same). Select the
sensitivity level above which audio will be considered mono. The
sensitivity is a value between -1 and +1, where -1 means that
everything is considered to be mono, and +1 means that only
perfectly in phase audio will be considered mono. The default value is
1 (Perfectly in phase).
Metadata Calibration
DTVCC service Set the delay (in seconds) after which a service presence timeout
presence timeout alarm will be triggered. This calibration applies to the six standard
services. The default value is 30 seconds, on a range of 1 to 360.
DTVCC text Set the delay (in seconds) after which a text presence timeout alarm
presence timeout will be triggered. This calibration applies to the six standard services.
The default value is 30 seconds, on a range of 1 to 360.
Note: The video and metadata calibrations do not apply to the current
version of the KMV-3901/3911 multiviewer.
143
Configuring Alarms
Configuring Alarm Debouncing
Configuring Alarm Debouncing
Note: The Kaleido-IP multiviewer does not yet support alarm-debouncing

calibrations. The default debouncing parameters (see Alarm Debouncing,
on page 135) apply to most alarms.
To configure alarm debouncing

1 Connect to the multiviewer you wish to configure, if you wish to apply the changes in
real time (see Connecting to a Multiviewer, on page 67).
Note: If this step is omitted, then you will need to export the database to
apply the new calibrations to the multiviewer.
3 Navigate to the alarm whose debouncing you wish to calibrate, by expanding the
appropriate multiviewer input, one of its Video elements, and then the alarm-related
elements (or the ABT element, and then one of the ABT’s audio elements).
4 In the Properties pane, under Debouncing, set appropriate values (see page 135) for
the Set duration and Clear duration attributes.
Managing Alarm Providers

To add alarm providers to your Kaleido-X system
2 Click the multiviewer whose alarm providers you wish to define.
3 In the Properties tab, click the Alarm providers list box.
4 Click the button that appeared at the end of the box to open the External Alarm
Providers Configuration window.
144
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
5 In External Alarm Providers Configuration, review the alarm providers list, and then
add or remove devices, as required.
• To add a device to the providers list, select the device from the Host address list, or
type the appropriate IP address in the box, and then click Add.
• To remove a device from the alarm providers list, select it, and then click Remove.
Note: To qualify as an external alarm provider, an iControl application

server must have its lookup service enabled. See External Alarm Provider on
page 135.
6 Once you have added all devices required for your purposes, click OK to close the
window.
Managing Virtual Alarms
Creating Virtual Alarms

To create a virtual alarm
1 Connect XEdit to the multiviewer (see Using XEdit Online, on page 67).
2 On the Tools menu, click New virtual alarm.
Alternatively, after clicking the Actions tab, or while a text or alarm level is selected in
the sources table you can:
• Right-click Virtual alarms in the filtered System list, point to Virtual alarm, and
then click New.
145
Configuring Alarms
• Expand Virtual alarms in the filtered System list, right-click any existing virtual
alarm, point to Virtual alarm, and then click New.
The Build Virtual Alarm window appears.
Alarm providers Alarm browser
3 In the Status logic section, select one of the following three options:
Virtual alarm status is best status among selected alarms (AND) — Choose this
option to have the contribution of the sub-alarms calculated using the optimistic
version of the alarm logic tables.
Virtual alarm status is worst status among selected alarms (OR) — Choose this option
to have the contribution of the sub-alarms calculated using the pessimistic version of
the alarm logic tables. This is the most common option, since it brings changes in the
status of any sub-alarms to the attention of the operators.
146
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Virtual alarm status is critical if selected alarms differ (XOR) — Choose this option to
have the contribution of the sub-alarms calculated using the XOR version of the alarm
logic tables. This causes the virtual alarm to reflect whether or not all of its sub-alarms
have the same status. If all sub-alarms are the same, the virtual alarm will be green.
Otherwise, it will be red.
For a more detailed description of the difference between these options, refer to
“Understanding the Alarm Logic Tables” in the iControl User Guide.
4 In the Text logic section, determine what to include in this virtual alarm’s text attribute
by selecting one of the following three options:
Ignore texts — No text logic (default).
Concatenate texts — Concatenate the text attributes from all sub-alarms.
List errors — List the text attributes from the sub-alarms that are in error.
5 Select the alarm provider you wish to use from the list in the left-hand part of the GSM
alarm browser pane.
6 In the right-hand part of the alarm browser, select the alarms that are to be sub-alarms
of the new virtual alarm, and then click the large down arrow button to transfer them
to the table in the bottom half of the window.
7 The table displays various details about the sub-alarms you have selected, including
their contribution, which defines how a sub-alarm will pass its status on to the virtual
alarm. The default contribution value is Passthrough, which means the sub-alarm will
pass its status unaltered to the overall calculation of the virtual alarm.
It is possible to override the error status of sub-alarms when they are triggered. This is
useful when, for example, a device is only able to report a status of either normal
147
Configuring Alarms
(green) or error (red), but you want the error condition to be considered as minor
(yellow) in the virtual alarm calculation. To change a sub-alarm’s contribution, click in
the Contribution column, and then select the status you want the virtual alarm to use
when an error occurs.
For example, if a sub-alarm goes from green to orange or red, but the selected
contribution is yellow, the virtual alarm will “see” yellow (the virtual alarm’s overall
status may still depend on other sub-alarms).
The Invert contribution allows performing a logical “NOT” calculation on sub-alarms.
This feature can be used, for example, to report alarms from GPI inputs. It can also be
used to handle cases where an error is expected, and not seeing an error is a sign that
something probably went wrong. The table below describes the result of inverting sub-
alarms:
Sub-alarm status Inverted contribution

NORMAL ERROR
MINOR NORMAL
MAJOR NORMAL
CRITICAL NORMAL
NON-EXISTENT NON-EXISTENT
PENDING PENDING
DISABLED DISABLED
UNKNOWN UNKNOWN
Selecting the Faults only contribution causes a sub-alarm to be mapped to NORMAL

unless it is in one of the fault statuses—usually CRITICAL, MAJOR, and MINOR. Refer to
the iControl User Guide for more information.
Note: If the sub-alarm’s fault condition is cleared, its contribution will

always be green (NORMAL), unless the value specified in the Contribution
column is black (DISABLED).
8 Repeat from step 5, until you have added all the required sub-alarms.
9 Specify a name for the new virtual alarm in the Name box.
You may adjust the default path, if necessary, so that alarms be grouped in the desired
way.
148
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
10 Configure logging behavior as required (see Managing Alarm Logging, on page 152):
• If you wish to disable logging for this virtual alarm, then select Not logged.
• If you wish to have occurrences of this virtual alarm logged as incidents, select This
virtual alarm is an incident template. Refer to the iControl User Guide for more
information.
• To add relevant information for your logging purposes, click Edit metadata.
The Virtual Alarm Metadata window appears.
The information you provide for this virtual alarm can be used to sort and locate
events and incidents in the iControl log viewers. For example, a meaningful Source
ID may help you distinguish this virtual alarm’s sub-alarms from other alarms. Click
OK to close the window.
11 Click OK.
The Build Virtual Alarm window closes and the newly created alarm appears at the
specified path, under Virtual alarms, in your multiviewer’s filtered System list (e.g.
when a text or alarm level is selected in the sources table).
If the multiviewer’s IP address was added to an iControl applications server’s Service

and alarm discovery table2 you will also be able to manage your multiviewer’s virtual
alarms from the multiviewer’s GSM, by using the iControl GSM alarm browser.
2.To access the iControl Lookup locations page, where you can review and update the Service and alarm
discovery table, click System tools on the Startup page, and then click Edit service locations.
149
Configuring Alarms
Modifying Virtual Alarms

To modify a virtual alarm
1 In the sources table, select a text or alarm level.
Alternatively, click the Actions tab.
2 Expand the filtered System list, and navigate to the virtual alarm you wish to modify.
3 Right-click the alarm, point to Virtual alarm, and then click Edit.
150
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
4 Modify your virtual alarm, by adding or removing sub-alarms, changing their

contribution, the alarm name or path, etc. Refer to Creating Virtual Alarms, on
page 145, as needed. For example:
• after selecting the sub-alarms you wish to remove from the table in the bottom half
of the window, click the large up arrow button.
• after selecting the appropriate alarm provider from the list in the left-hand part of
the GSM alarm browser pane, select the sub-alarms you wish to add, from the
right-hand part of the alarm browser, and then click the large down arrow button
to transfer them to the table in the bottom half of the window.
5 Once you have completed your changes, click OK to close the Build Virtual Alarm
window.
Deleting Virtual Alarms

To delete a virtual alarm
2 Expand the filtered System list, and navigate to the virtual alarm you wish to delete.
3 Right-click the alarm, point to Virtual alarm, and then click Delete.
151
Configuring Alarms
Managing Alarm Logging
XEdit prompts you to confirm.
4 Click Yes to proceed.

The selected virtual alarm is removed from your configuration.
Managing Alarm Logging

As part of the alarm calibration process, you can specify that an alarm, when triggered, be
logged to an iControl application server that has a GSM log plug-in configured for this
multiviewer. As of version 6.50 of the Kaleido-X software, alarms logged to an iControl
application server include time code information from the corresponding video signal (ATC
or VITC, depending on the signal format).
• By default, native alarms are not logged. See Enabling logging for a native alarm on
page 152.
• Virtual alarms are logged by default. See Disabling logging for a virtual alarm on
page 153. When a virtual alarm status changes, then the native sub-alarms that
triggered the change are logged even if logging is disabled for these sub-alarms.
• Global alarms are always logged. It is possible, however, to disable alarm logging for a
global alarm, by editing the corresponding plug-in from the iControl application
server’s GSM alarm browser. Refer to the iControl User Guide, for more information.
Enabling logging for a native alarm

To allow an alarm to be logged to the GSM log plug-in configured for this system
152
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
2 Expand the multiviewer whose alarms you wish to log, navigate to the appropriate
alarm, and then click the alarm to select it.
3 In the Properties tab, select the Logging enabled check box to have the multiviewer
publish this alarm to the application server’s log, each time this alarm is triggered.
4 Click Apply to all if you wish to apply this setting to all other alarms with the same name,
throughout the system.
In the example, clicking Apply to all will enable logging for the Video Loss alarm on
every multiviewer input in your system.
5 Repeat the procedure until logging is enabled for all desired alarms.
Disabling logging for a virtual alarm

To prevent a virtual alarm from being logged to the GSM log plug-in
2 Expand the filtered System list, and navigate to the virtual alarm you wish to modify.
3 Right-click the alarm, point to Virtual alarm, and then click Edit.
4 In the bottom area of the window, select Not logged.
5 Click OK to close the Build Virtual Alarm window.
Publishing Alarms to SNMP Devices
Notes
• This section does not apply to the KMV-3901/3911 multiviewer models,
which do not support SNMP-related calibrations and settings.
153
Configuring Alarms
Notes (continued)
• In the case of a Kaleido-IP multiviewer, the SNMP status for an alarm is valid,
only when the corresponding source is monitored on the monitor wall.
• MIB files are available from your multiviewer. To access them, point your
browser to:
http://<your multiviewer’s IP address>/pub/KALEIDO-KX-MIB.mib,
and
http://<your multiviewer’s IP address>/pub/MIRANDA-MIB.mib.
The Kaleido-IP, Kaleido-X and Kaleido-X16 multiviewers support the use of Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP) traps to notify an external SNMP manager of significant
events. These significant events are flagged within the Kaleido-X system as alarms.
Two actions are required to set up the SNMP trap process:
• Identify the targets (SNMP managers) to which SNMP traps will be sent.
• Choose the traps that will be sent to the selected SNMP managers.
Defining Target SNMP Managers

To define target SNMP managers
2 Click the multiviewer whose SNMP trap targets you wish to define.
3 In the Properties tab, click the Community box (which contains “public” by default),
and then type a new name for the group of target SNMP managers.
4 Click the Trap targets box.
154
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
5 Click the button that appeared at the end of the

box to open the SNMP Configuration window.
The trap targets list shows all trap targets currently
identified for the selected multiviewer.
SNMP Managers that are trap targets for this
multiviewer are identified by their host address and
port number.
6 Add, remove, or modify trap targets as needed, and
then click OK to confirm and apply the changes, or
click Cancel to close the SNMP Configuration
window without saving your changes to the trap
targets list.
To add a trap target to the list
1 In the Host address box, type the IP address of the device that has the target SNMP
manager.
2 In the Port box, type the port number through which the SNMP manager will be
accessed.
3 Click Add.
The new trap target is added to the list.
To modify an existing trap target
1 Click the trap target you wish to modify in the list.
It becomes highlighted and its host address and
port number appear in the data boxes, and the
Edit button is available.
2 Type new or revised data in the data boxes.
3 Click Edit.
The revised data appears in the target list.
To remove a trap target from the list
1 Click the trap target you wish to remove in the list.
It becomes highlighted and its host address and port number appear in the data boxes.
2 Click Delete.
The trap target is removed from the list.
Note: The host address and port number remain in the data boxes. Hence
the trap can easily be added back to the list, by clicking Add, if it was
removed in error.
Enabling SNMP Traps

The multiviewer analyses the signals that pass through it, and can detect and flag problems
by raising alarms. Each alarm can be individually configured. Most alarm definitions specify
detection thresholds, a set duration, and a clear duration, in order to exclude transient
events. See Configuring Alarm Thresholds on page 140, and Configuring Alarm
Debouncing, on page 144, for more details on alarms and their configuration.
155
Configuring Alarms
As part of the alarm calibration process, you can specify that the alarm, when triggered, be
sent as an SNMP trap.
To choose the traps that will be sent to the selected trap targets for this system
2 Expand the multiviewer whose traps you wish to enable, navigate to the appropriate
alarm, and then click the alarm to select it.
3 In the Properties tab, select the Trap enabled check box to have the multiviewer issue
an SNMP trap each time this alarm is triggered.
4 Click Apply to all to apply this setting to all other alarms with the same name,
throughout the system.
In the example, clicking Apply to all will enable Video Loss SNMP traps for every input
in your system. This is particularly useful for audio input errors, because of the large
number of channels arriving at the multiviewer.
5 Repeat the procedure until all desired SNMP traps have been enabled.
156
Logical Sources
This chapter explain how to configure logical sources for your multiviewer system.
Key Concepts
Term Description
Logical source A logical source (called a channel, in earlier versions of the
documentation) refers to a group of physical audio, video, or metadata
sources, and text attributes. A logical source can be used as a whole, and
assigned to a virtual monitor.
Level Within a logical source, attributes are organized by levels belonging to
either of the following categories: Source info, Video, Audio, Text, Alarm,
and Time code. For example, the video level category may comprise
multiple levels, each representing a specific physical part of a video
signal.
Incremental copy Once a logical source (channel) is configured, it is possible to use
incremental copy to automatically propagate appropriate physical
assignments to other adjacent logical sources. For instance, if the current
logical source’s levels are assigned from Video 1, then the incremental
copy tool will automatically assign corresponding physical elements
from Video 2 to the next logical source’s levels, and so on. Alternatively, if
only one or a few specific levels are to be similarly configured, it is
possible to use incremental copy on the corresponding level column
only.
Incremental copy In the sources table, the incremental copy handle is indicated by a small
handle square at the bottom right of the selected cell.
Detailed Directions
Creating and Configuring Logical Sources

When opening XEdit in offline mode, the initial database is populated with the default
configuration for a Kaleido-X (7RU) system, including a fully-populated frame (all cards
present) and a set of predefined logical sources. The KX Router logical router is also created
as a 96 × 80 router where the 96 inputs are the multiviewer’s logical sources, the first 48
outputs are those from the two router cards, and the last 32 outputs are monitor wall
destinations.
Likewise, when you replace the initial Kaleido-X (7RU) with the appropriate multiviewer
model that matches your actual system, you can choose to have your local database
populated with a default set of logical sources and a preconfigured KX Router logical router.
157
Logical Sources
Automatically Adding Logical Sources

A set of logical sources based on external video router sources or on multiviewer inputs can
be added to the sources table, as a single operation, by clicking Create logical sources on
the menu that appears when you right-click supported elements in the filtered system list.
From the same menu, you can also enable automatic sources creation, which means that
the logical sources associated with the selected element will be kept in sync with the
corresponding external sources. For example, when sources are added or modified in a
router’s own configuration environment, logical sources will be added or updated
automatically in the multiviewer’s sources table.
Alternatively, in the case of a Kaleido-IP, a set of logical sources is also automatically created
if you import the stream lineup from a spreadsheet file (see Importing a Stream Lineup, on
page 88).
This section explains how to add logical sources for transport stream sources in the context
of a Kaleido-IP multiviewer system. The same procedure applies to all types of multiviewer
inputs, including inputs from upstream routers.
To define logical sources for a transport stream
1 In the main window, click the Channels/Sources tab.
2 In the Tools pane, expand the multiviewer, and navigate to the transport stream for
which you wish to define logical sources.
3 Right-click the transport stream, and then click Create logical sources on the menu.
Logical sources are automatically created for every program signal found in the
selected transport stream.
158
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Notes
• Under Source info, dynamic and static names resulting from the Name
level assignments are limited to 48 characters and automatically
truncated as needed.
• In the case of a Kaleido-IP system, do not select Activate automatic
sources creation.
• If the case of router sources, if the router is subject to frequent dimension
changes, then you may want to select Activate automatic sources
creation.
4 Repeat until you have added logical sources for every stream you wish to monitor.
5 If your system involves a control panel from which you will control your multiviewer as
a router, then configure source numbers for the KX Router logical router, by typing the
appropriate numbers in the first column (#) under Source info, and using the
incremental copy tool as needed.
Managing Logical Sources Associated with Programs in a Transport Stream

In the case of a Kaleido-IP system, you may need to add or remove sources, from time to
time, when programs are added or removed from a transport stream.
Adding Logical Sources for New Programs in a Transport Stream

To add a logical source for a new program in a transport stream
1 Connect XEdit to the Kaleido-IP (see Using XEdit Online, on page 67), and then click the
Channels/Sources tab.
2 In the Tools pane, navigate to the transport stream that includes the new program.
3 Right-click the program, and then click Create logical sources on the menu.
159
Logical Sources
A new entry appears in the sources table, with all assignments based on the logical
source template (see Defining Physical Assignments, on page 165).
Note: Under Source info, dynamic and static names resulting from the
Name level assignments are limited to 48 characters and automatically
Removing Logical Sources for Removed Programs in a Transport Stream

To remove logical sources associated with programs that are not present anymore
1 Connect XEdit to the Kaleido-IP (see Using XEdit Online, on page 67) and then click the
Channels/Sources tab.
Logical sources associated with programs that have been removed from a transport
stream will have elements marked in red.
2 Select these sources (using the standard Shift+click or Ctrl+click keyboard shortcuts to
extend your selection as needed).
3 Right-click the selection, and then click Delete selected sources on the menu.
160
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual

5 Click the Layouts tab, open the appropriate layouts, locate any monitors that included
assignments based on the sources you just deleted, and update their configuration as
required (see Assigning Logical Sources or Monitor Wall Destinations to Monitors, on
page 209).
Manually adding a Logical Source

To add a logical source
1 Click the Channels/Sources tab in the main window.
The sources table appears.
Note: The sources table is preconfigured with a set of default assignments,

including at least one level under each level category. A symbol indicates
the physical source for each assignment: for example, “A16” indicates input
signal 16 on input card A. In the case of an expansion system, the symbol is
prefixed with a frame identifier: either “FRA-” or “FRB-”. On the Kaleido-X16,
only the input numbers 01 to 16 appear. On a KMV-3901/3911, the input
numbers 1 to 8 (or 1 to 4, in the case of the 4 × 1 and 4 × 2 models) appear.
161
Logical Sources
2 On the File menu, click New.

Alternatively right-click the Channels/Sources column heading, and then click Add
source on the shortcut menu.
A logical source is added at the bottom of the sources table.
Notes
• Under Source info, you can change the logical source name and path,
resulting from the Name and Cat. level assignments. For example,
“Channel 1” can be renamed “Cam 1” or assigned a dynamic name. You
can group related logical sources together, by adding static or dynamic
text elements to the Cat. level, and then sorting the table as needed, to
suit your purposes (see Sorting the Sources Table, on page 169).
• When a logical source’s name or category changes, the row header is
updated accordingly.
• When applying an overall incremental copy (from the row header), the
Source info columns and the Video levels are excluded. These columns
must be incremented individually. The overall incremental copy features
relies on a video level having been populated first.

The sources table is saved.
Managing Levels
Adding a Level
Note: To be able to monitor a 3D stereoscopic signal, you must first add a

second video level to your logical sources (so you have a level for each eye),
and then for each video monitor or composite you wish to use for
3D monitoring, you must assign the left-eye and right-eye levels.
To add a level
The level categories appear as the main column headings in the sources table.
162
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Level
categories
2 Right-click the appropriate level category, and then click Add level on the shortcut
menu.
Add level
A new level appears under the selected category.
3 If you wish to change the level name, click the level header, and then, in the Properties
pane, type the new name in the Level name box.
In the case of an alarm level, you may also set its contribution to your system’s global
alarms. See Configuring an Alarm Level’s Contribution below.
Configuring an Alarm Level’s Contribution

You can select which alarm levels contribute to the global alarm associated with every
logical source, and rank their individual contribution.
To configure an alarm level’s contribution to your system’s global alarms
• In the sources table, click the column header for the level you wish to configure.
The Properties pane shows the name of the selected alarm level, and its current
contribution settings.
163
Logical Sources
Selected alarm level
• If you wish to exclude alarms in this level from the global alarm calculation, then
clear the Include in global alarm check box.
• To rank this level’s contribution to your system’s global alarms, click the Global
alarm contribution box, and then select the appropriate value from the list.
• Passthrough: This is the default value. Alarms in this level will pass their status
unaltered to the global alarms.
• Critical, Major, Minor, Disabled: It is possible to override the error status of
alarms when they are triggered. This is useful when, for example, a device is
only able to report a status of either normal or error, but you want the error
condition to be considered as minor in the global alarm calculation.
• Invert: Alarms in this level will pass the opposite of their status to the global
alarms. This can be used, for example, to report alarms from GPI inputs, or to
handle cases where an error is expected, and not seeing an error is a sign that
something probably went wrong. The table below describes the result of
inverting sub-alarms:
Alarm status Inverted contribution

NORMAL ERROR
MINOR NORMAL
MAJOR NORMAL
CRITICAL NORMAL
NON-EXISTENT NON-EXISTENT
PENDING PENDING
164
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Alarm status Inverted contribution

DISABLED DISABLED
UNKNOWN UNKNOWN
• Faults only: Alarms in this level will be mapped to normal unless their status is
one of the fault statuses—usually critical, major, and minor.3
Defining Physical Assignments

Once you have created a logical source, you must make the physical assignments. This is
required before you can create a layout.
To make the physical assignments for a logical source
1 In the sources table, click the cell that corresponds to the level you wish to define for
this logical source.
2 In the Tools pane, expand the filtered System list, and then drag the appropriate
element from the list, to the selected level in the sources table.
For a typical logical source, you will normally start by making a video assignment, set
the appropriate category and source ID (under Source info) if you wish to control your
multiviewer system as a router, and then proceed with the audio, text, alarm and time
code levels. See, for example, Configuring Text Level Assignments, on page 166,
Configuring Alarm Level Assignments, on page 166, and Configuring Logical Sources
Based on External Alarm Providers, on page 167.
Sources table with a selected cell in the Video level category for Channel1
3 Repeat the procedure until all desired physical assignments are completed for this
logical source.
4 If you wish to be able to use this logical source as a template, right-click the source
header and then click Set source as template on the menu.
3.The list of fault status can be modified by scripting.
165
Logical Sources
Once you have added the required number of logical sources, and made appropriate
video assignments, you will be able to populate remaining levels in a single operation
by applying the template. If you have enabled automatic sources creation for an
external router, then automatically-created logical sources will be based on the
template.
Configuring Text Level Assignments

To assign a text element to a logical source’s text level
2 In the sources table, click the cell that corresponds to the logical source and text level
you wish to configure.
3 Expand the filtered System list in the Tools pane, locate the text element, and then drag
it onto the selected cell in the sources table.

Configuring Alarm Level Assignments

To assign an alarm to a logical source’s alarm level
2 In the sources table, click the cell that corresponds to the logical source and alarm level
you wish to configure.
166
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
3 Expand the filtered System list in the Tools pane, locate the alarm, and drag it onto the
selected cell in the sources table.

Configuring Logical Sources Based on External Alarm Providers

To have access to alarms and text elements from an external alarm provider, you must have
specified this provider in your multiviewer system configuration (see Managing Alarm
Providers, on page 144).
To assign an alarm or a text element from an external provider
1 Open a GSM alarm browser associated with the alarm provider you wish to use.
For example, after opening iControl Navigator, click General status managers on the
View menu. Refer to the iControl User Guide for more information.
2 In XEdit, click the Channels/Sources tab in the main window.
3 In the GSM alarm browser, navigate to the element you wish to assign, and then drag it
onto the cell that corresponds to the alarm or text level you wish to configure in the
sources table.
167
Logical Sources
In the selected cell, the prefix “EXT” indicates that the assignment is from an external
source and is followed with information such as the device class and a name.
Notes
• You can select multiple elements in the GSM alarm browser (by pressing
Shift+click or Ctrl+click as needed) and assign them to consecutive logical
sources at once, by dragging the multiple selection to the appropriate
level for the first logical source you wish to configure. The elements are
inserted in the same order you selected them.
• Drag an alarm folder to an alarm level to monitor the folder’s status.
Dragging an alarm folder to a text level is not supported.
• GSM alarms are not available as triggers for background actions (see
Creating Background Actions, on page 270).
• Incremental copy is not supported in the case of assignments from
external providers (see Making Further Assignments by Incremental Copy,
below).

Making Further Assignments by Incremental Copy

Once done with a first logical source, if the next logical source is to be similar to the first
one, it is possible to use incremental copy to automatically create it. Alternatively, if only
one or a few specific levels are to be similarly configured, it is possible to use incremental
copy on the corresponding level column only.
To use the incremental copy tool to propagate physical assignments to adjacent logical
sources
1 Click the row header for the logical source whose assignments you wish to propagate.
A small square, the incremental copy handle, appears in the bottom right corner of the
header cell.
Incremental copy handle

2 Move the pointer to the incremental copy handle. The pointer changes to crosshairs.
168
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
3 Click and drag to propagate the selected logical source’s physical assignments to the
next logical sources’ levels.
The source cells are highlighted with a green border and the target cells with a red
border.
4 Release the mouse button once you have reached the last logical source to be
configured.
The level cells are now populated with “incremented” physical assignments.
Note: It is possible to drag the incremental copy handle up, or down. The
physical assignments will be decremented or incremented accordingly.
Sorting the Sources Table

To sort the sources table
• Right-click the heading of the column you wish to sort by (i.e. either Source ID, or any
of the level headings), and then click Sort on the shortcut menu.
The sources table is sorted, based on the elements in the selected level.
169
Logical Sources
Monitoring Internal-Router Outputs on the Monitor Wall (Sample Scenario)
Resizing the Sources Table’s Columns

To resize a column manually
• In the category or level heading row, point the column boundary you wish to move
until the pointer becomes a resize pointer ( ), and then drag the boundary until the
column is the desired width.
To resize a column to the width of its content
• In the category or level heading row, point either boundary for the column you wish to
resize to fit, until the pointer becomes a resize pointer ( ), and then double-click.
The column width is adjusted to fit the content.
To resize all columns to the width of their content
• In the category or level heading row, point any column boundary until the pointer
becomes a resize pointer ( ), and then triple-click.
All columns are resized to fit their content.
Monitoring Internal-Router Outputs on the Monitor Wall (Sample Scenario)

It is possible, for specific monitoring purposes, to configure a video monitor so that it
displays the current signal at a physical output from the multiviewer's internal router, by
assigning this router output to a logical source’s video level.
To configure a monitor to follow an internal-router output on the monitor wall
2 Add a logical source to the table (see Manually adding a Logical Source, on page 161).
3 In the new logical source row, click the cell that corresponds to the first video level.
4 Expand the filtered System list in the Tools pane, locate the router output you wish to
monitor, and then drag it onto the selected cell in the sources table.
6 Click the Layouts tab, and open the appropriate layout.
7 From the Channel/Sources list in the Tools pane, drag the new logical source onto the
monitor you wish to configure, and then save the layout.
170
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Once such a logical source is available, you can also assign it to other composite or
video monitors, directly on the monitor wall, and their video window will dynamically
follow the video signal sent to that router output.
Note: The current version of the Kaleido-X software does not support
monitoring of the associated audio signal.
171
Setting Up Rooms
This section describes Kaleido-X rooms and their configuration.
Key Concepts
Term Description
Room A room is a visual grouping of displays that represent the physical
displays positioned and sized as they are installed in an actual room.
Multiple operators can share the same room. The grouping of display
creates a large virtual monitor wall that operators see as a single large
display. The room definition specifies display resolutions and sizes, as
well as zones that are used to display full screen layouts.
Display versus Within the XEdit workflow, a display refers to the representation of a
monitor physical display monitor (such as a CRT) within a room, whereas a
monitor represents a physical signal within a layout: for example, a video
monitor displaying a specific video signal.
Full screen zone A full screen zone is a sub-section of a room. It can be any size and it can
be positioned on any of the displays in the room. A full screen zone can
be associated with one or more full screen layouts assigned to specific
users.
Display library A display library contains a collection of predefined displays that can be
conveniently reused to configure your system’s rooms. More than one
display library can exist.
Detailed Directions
Managing Rooms
In XEdit, a room represents a grouping of displays on the monitor wall driven by your
Kaleido-X system. When creating a room, you add displays, and assign each of them an
output head. You can also define full screen zones.
Note: In the case of a cluster system, it is possible to view a room

configuration in offline mode. However, to create and configure a room,
XEdit must be connected to one of the cluster members (see Using XEdit
Online, on page 67).
173
Setting Up Rooms
Managing Rooms
Creating Rooms
To create a room
1 Click the Rooms tab in the main window.
An empty room with a black background appears in the main window.
3 Add the appropriate number of displays and configure them to match your actual
installations. See Adding Displays on page 176, and Configuring Displays, on page 180.
4 Optionally add full screen zones (see See Adding Full Screen Zones on page 180).
The Save Room window appears.
6 Type a name for the new room, and then click Save.
Notes
• A room name cannot exceed 7 characters.
• A room can only be saved once every display has been assigned an output
head (see Adding Displays, on page 176).
• In a cluster system, each room must have a unique name across the whole
system. XEdit will not let you use a name if there is already a room with this
name associated with one of the multiviewers within the cluster.
• In a cluster system, if one of the member multiviewers becomes
unavailable while you were configuring a room, then XEdit will not let you
save the room. If you wish to save the room anyway, first remove any
unavailable multiviewer from the cluster.
Opening Rooms
To open an existing room
2 On the File menu, click Open.
The Open Room window appears.
174
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
3 Select the room you wish to open, and then click Open.
The selected room appears in the Rooms tab.
Notes
• When you have more than one room open, you can switch from one to
another by clicking the tabs at the bottom of the window.
175
Setting Up Rooms
Managing Rooms
Notes (continued)
• In the case of a cluster system, it is possible to view a room configuration
in offline mode, but any changes must be made in online mode.
Closing Rooms
To close a room
• On the File menu, click Close. Alternatively, click the Close button on the toolbar.
Deleting Rooms
Before deleting a room, make sure there are no layouts left for that room in your system
configuration. If there are still layouts for this room, then XEdit will issue an error message
and prevent you from deleting the room. See Deleting Layouts on page 205.
To delete a room
1 Open the room you wish to delete (see Opening Rooms, on page 174).
2 On the File menu, click Delete. Alternatively, click the Delete button on the toolbar.
The system prompts you to confirm.

The room is removed from your system configuration.
Adding Displays
To add a display to a room
1 Select a display from the display library and drag it onto the room area.
Alternatively, click the Display button on the toolbar, and then click the room area to
add a custom display.
176
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Filtered Display Room Selected Properties of the

System list library area display selected display
Note: All currently open display libraries appear on the Tools pane. Custom
display libraries are stored separately from the XEdit workspace. See
Managing Display Libraries on page 191 for details.
2 Expand the filtered System list in the Tools pane, and then drag the appropriate output
head onto a display in the Rooms tab.
The name of the output head is indicated on the display. In the case of a
Kaleido-X (4RU) or Kaleido-X (7RU), the card slot is also indicated. In the case of a cluster
system, the name of the originating multiviewer also appears.
177
Setting Up Rooms
Managing Rooms
Card slot name

Output head name
System name (cluster
systems only)
One output head cannot be assigned to more than one display at a time. When
different displays are assigned the same output head, if the displays are part of the
same room, then XEdit will issue an error message and prevent you from saving the
room until the head assignment is corrected.
However, to facilitate room management — for example, in a cluster system where
rooms and layouts have been created based on configurations from earlier standalone
systems — XEdit will let you assign the same head to displays that are located in
different rooms, but such conflicting assignments will be marked in red in the filtered
System list displayed in the Tools pane, and should be resolved by removing a
conflicting display (see Removing Displays, on page 179), or by deleting the conflicting
room (see Deleting Rooms, on page 176).
178
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
IMPORTANT
Conflicting head assignments
Neglecting to resolve conflicting head assignments could result in
distorted layout elements on the monitor wall (which would
happen, for example, if the same output head is assigned to two
displays with different resolutions), or, in the case of a cluster, in the
dashboard showing the wrong room name (from one of the earlier
standalone configurations you may have used to create the
cluster).
To prevent this from happening, open the old room configuration,
and look for red Head elements in the filtered System list that
appears at the bottom of the Tools pane. Clear the unwanted head
assignments, either by removing the corresponding displays from
the room layout (see Removing Displays, on page 179), or by
completely deleting the old room configuration if you do not need
it anymore (see Deleting Rooms, on page 176).

The updated room configuration is saved.
Removing Displays
Before removing a display, make sure there are no full screen layouts associated with this
display in your system configuration. If there are still full screen layouts for this display, then
XEdit will issue an error message and prevent you from saving the room. See Deleting
Layouts on page 205.
To remove a display from a room
1 Open the room that contains the display you wish to remove (see Opening Rooms, on
page 174).
179
Setting Up Rooms
Configuring Displays
2 If there is a full screen zone associated with this display, click its border and then press
Delete on your keyboard to remove it.
3 Click the display and then press Delete on your keyboard.
Adding Full Screen Zones
Notes
• Adding full screen zones to a room is optional.
• Do not span a full screen zone across more than one display; use spanned
video monitors instead. See Spanning on page 198 for more information.
To add a full screen zone to a room

1 Click the Full screen zone button on the toolbar, and then click the room area to
create the full screen zone.
2 Position and resize the zone as appropriate.
3 In the Properties tab, click the Friendly name box, and then type a name for the zone.
4 Press Enter on your keyboard to validate the new name, and then click Save on the File
menu.
The room configuration is saved.
Removing Full Screen Zones

To remove a full screen zone from a room
1 Open the room that contains the full screen zone you wish to remove (see Opening
Rooms, on page 174).
2 Locate the full screen zone, click its border and then press Delete on your keyboard.
The monitor wall driven by your Kaleido-X system may include displays of various shapes
and sizes, each with its specific characteristics. The displays you add to your rooms in XEdit
must be configured to match the attributes of their physical counterparts. The Kaleido-X
180
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
software includes a set of predefined resolutions that cover most standard displays. Any
custom resolutions you add to this set will be available throughout the system, and can be
reused when configuring any display in any room.
You can manually configure display resolutions in two ways: either globally, from the Tools
menu, or by clicking a specific display in a room.
In addition to monitor wall displays, your system can include other monitors connected to
the multiviewer’s HD-SDI outputs (one for each output head, available with the SDI
monitoring output option). The HD-SDI output format on a given head depends on the
resolution configured for the corresponding multiviewer output, and, in the case of a 1080-
line resolution, on the selected scan format (interlaced, progressive) for this output head. In
the case of a KMV-3911 or Kaleido-X16 multiviewer, you can enable phase-locking at the
output head level, to support production switchers (or other equipment) connected to the
multiviewer’s HD-SDI outputs.
Viewing Room Display Properties

To view the properties for one of the display in a room
1 Click the display whose properties you wish to view.
2 Review the attributes and values that appear in the Properties pane.
Enabling EDID Auto-Detection in XEdit

The monitor EDID auto-detection feature is enabled by default in order to facilitate the
initial setup of a Kaleido-X system. Setting an output head to a specific resolution, from a
multiviewer service panel in iControl (if available), from the monitor wall (Kaleido-IP,
Kaleido-X, Kaleido-X16), or from a Densité controller’s local control panel (Kaleido-MX,
Kaleido-Modular-X, KMV-3901/3911, Kaleido-XQUAD) disables the EDID auto-detection for
this head.
To enable EDID auto-detection for a display
1 In the Rooms tab, click the display you wish to configure.
2 In the Properties pane, select the Use detected monitor resolution check box.
181
Setting Up Rooms
Select to enable
automatic detection
of EDID information
Configuring Custom Resolutions from the Tools Menu

To create a custom display resolution from the Tools menu
1 On the Tools menu, click Edit resolutions.
The Edit Resolution Settings window appears.
2 Select the resolution you wish to customize (or the one on which you wish to base a
new resolution), from the list at the bottom of the window.
Note: When you modify one of the default resolutions, you can only save
your changes as a new resolution. On the other hand, custom resolutions
can be tweaked and saved repeatedly until the desired configuration is
achieved. However, make sure that the active width and active height values
you specify match those of one of the default resolutions, otherwise your
custom resolution will be ignored.
3 Under either the Porch or the Modeline section—depending on whether you prefer to
specify front porch, back porch, sync, and active values, or blank start, sync start, sync
182
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
end and blank end—, set the refresh rate and other timing parameters so that they
match those of the physical display you need to configure.
Note: In XAdmin’s Status and Options page, these parameters are listed
under the corresponding output card information, according to the
blank/sync start/end modeline system, and with the sync polarity expressed
as a number between 0 and 3. Refer to Viewing a Multiviewer’s Status
Information, on page 433 for details.
Example: Suppose you want to configure the display that is connected to head 1 of a
Kaleido-X (7RU) multiviewer’s OUTPUT D card. The image below shows the relevant data
you need to copy to the Modeline section of the Edit Resolution Settings window.
183
Setting Up Rooms
Frequency
and timing
information
4 Type a name for the new resolution in the Friendly name box, and then click Save as to
close the Edit Resolution Settings window. Alternatively, if you are modifying an
existing custom resolution, you can click the Save button.
Type a name
Configuring a Custom Resolution from a Specific Display in a Room

To configure a custom resolution from a specific display in a room
1 Click the display whose resolution you wish to configure.
2 Click the Resolution box in the Properties pane, and then click the button that
appeared on the right of the resolution presets.
The Edit Resolution Settings window appears.
184
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
3 Under either the Porch or the Modeline section—depending on whether you prefer to
specify front porch, back porch, sync, and active values; or blank start, sync start, sync
end and blank end—, set the refresh rate and other timing parameters so that they
match those of the physical display you need to configure.
Note: In XAdmin’s Status and Options page, these parameters are listed
under the corresponding output card information, according to the
blank/sync start/end modeline system, and with the sync polarity expressed
as a number between 0 and 3. Refer to Viewing a Multiviewer’s Status
Information, on page 433 for details.
Example: Suppose you want to configure the display that is connected to the OUTPUT
C (master) KXO-DUAL card’s head 1. The image below shows the relevant data you need
to copy to the Edit Resolution Settings window.
185
Setting Up Rooms
Frequency and timing information, as listed in XAdmin
4 Type a name for the new resolution in the Friendly name box, and then click Save as to
close the Edit Resolution Settings window. Alternatively, if you are modifying an
existing custom resolution, you can click the Save button.
Changing Room Display Resolutions

To change the resolution for a display in a room
1 Click the display you wish to configure.
2 Click the Resolution box in the Properties pane.
The resolution presets appears.
186
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
3 Select the appropriate resolution from the list.

Configuring the HD-SDI Monitoring Output Format

The HD-SDI output format on a given head depends on the resolution configured for the
corresponding multiviewer output (see Changing Room Display Resolutions, on page 186),
and, in the case of a 1080-line resolution, on the selected scan format (interlaced,
progressive) for this output head. In addition, EDID auto-detection must be disabled (see
Enabling EDID Auto-Detection in XEdit, on page 181). The following multiviewer output
resolutions are supported: 1920 × 1080 (for an HD-SDI output in the 1080i or 1080p format)
and 1280 × 720 (for an HD-SDI output in the 720p format). Any other DVI/RGBHV resolution
will result in the HD-SDI output being disabled.
Multiviewer output HD-SDI output HD-SDI output

resolution (interlaced) (progressive)
1280 × 720 50Hz No output 720p 50Hz
1280 × 720 59.94Hz No output 720p 59.94Hz
1920 × 1080 50Hz 1080i 50Hz 1080p 50Hz
1920 × 1080 59.94Hz 1080i 59.94Hz 1080p 59.94Hz
Any other HDMI No output No output
resolutions
To configure the scan format for a 1080-line signal at the SDI monitoring output
1 In the Room area, click the display associated with the multiviewer output head whose
properties you wish to configure.
2 In the Properties pane, verify that the selected default resolution configured for the
monitor wall display is compatible with the desired format as the SDI output for this
head (see table above), and make sure that the Use detected monitor resolution
option is disabled.
3 Click the SDI Resolution box, and then select the appropriate scan format: Progressive,
or Interlaced.
187
Setting Up Rooms
monitor wall display resolution

EDID auto-detection disabled
scan format for a 1080-line signal
at the SDI monitoring output
Enabling Phase Locking at the HD-SDI Monitoring Output

KMV-3911 and Kaleido-X16 multiviewers can feed production switchers (or other
equipment) via their HD-SDI output. If your downstream equipment requires input signals
that are in phase with the facility’s genlock reference, then you need to enable phase
locking at the corresponding output head. This increases the processing delay equally at
the HD-SDI output and corresponding HDMI output.
Note: Phase locking is disabled by default, to allow for a minimal

processing delay. Leave it disabled for all other multiviewer models, or if
your system does not involve downstream equipment requiring phase-
locked signals.
To enable phase locking at the HD-SDI output for a specific output head
1 Click the display associated with the head whose HD-SDI output you wish to configure,
and then select the Phase locking check box in the Properties pane.
Disabling the Dashboard

A room can be configured to prevent the dashboard from appearing on specific displays.
For instance, in a production control room, or if the Kaleido-X is used in the studio backdrop
you may not want the dashboard to pop up, regardless of alarm conditions.
Note: Make sure the dashboard remains enabled on a least one display, in
a room where alarm conditions can be monitored, since it is your only way
to be notified in case of a card booting in offline mode, a duplicate IP
address, a defective fan, a power supply alarm, etc.
To disable the dashboard for a specific display

1 Click the display on which you do not want the dashboard to appear, and then clear the
Allow dashboard display check box in the Properties pane.
188
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Changing a Display’s Aspect Ratio
Notes
• It is important to properly set the aspect ratio of a display, since this will
affect the proportions of every component you will use to create layouts
for this room. For instance, if the aspect ratio of a display does not match
the aspect ratio of the actual display in the physical room, then a video
window inside a layout will show distorted images.
• If you change the display aspect ratio later in the process, layouts created
before the change will be broken.
To change the aspect ratio of a display in a room

1 Click the display whose aspect ratio you wish to set.
2 Click the Aspect ratio box, in the Properties pane.
The aspect ratio presets appear.
3 Select the appropriate aspect ratio from the list. Alternatively, type the desired ratio
directly in the box.
Changing a Display’s Diagonal Size

To change the diagonal size of a display in a room
1 Click the display whose size you wish to configure.
2 Click the Diagonal size box in the Properties pane.
3 Select the appropriate unit of measurement from the list that appears inside the
Diagonal size box, and type the size.
Changing a Display’s Height

To change the height of a display in a room
1 Click the display whose height you wish to configure.
2 Click the Height box in the Properties pane.
189
Setting Up Rooms
3 Select the appropriate unit of measurement from the list that appears inside the
Height box and type the height.
Changing a Display’s Width

To change the width of a display in a room
1 Click the display whose width you wish to configure.
2 Click the Width box in the Properties pane.
3 Select the appropriate unit of measurement from the list that appears inside the Width
box and type the width.
Changing a Display’s Rotation
Notes
• The Kaleido-MX, Kaleido-Modular-X, Kaleido-XQUAD, and KMV-
3901/3911 multiviewers do not support display rotation.
• The Display Rotation option must be enabled on the corresponding
output card (in the case of a Kaleido-X multiviewer) or HDMI output port
(in the case of a Kaleido-X16) for rotation to work properly on the monitor
wall. The option can be enabled and verified in XAdmin’s Status and
Options page (see Hardware and Software Options, on page 383).
• The Kaleido-IP supports display rotation. If two displays are connected to
the multiviewer, then they must both have the same orientation. It is not
yet possible to enable or verify the rotation option in XAdmin’s Status and
Options page, for this multiviewer model. Contact Technical Support for
activation and configuration instructions (see Contact Us, on page 453).
To change the rotation setting for a display in a room

1 Click the display you wish to configure.
2 Click the Rotation box in the Properties pane.
The rotation presets appear.
190
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
3 Select the configuration that matches the way the actual display is mounted in the
physical room: normal, rotated 90 degrees clockwise, rotated 90 degrees
counterclockwise.
Changing a Display’s Position

To change position of a display in a room
1 Click the display whose position you wish to configure.
2 Click the Position box in the Properties pane, then click the button that appears inside
the box.
The Specify Position window appears.
3 Type the appropriate values in the X (mm), and Y (mm) boxes, and then click OK.
The values appear in the Position box.
Managing Display Libraries

The default display library includes configurations for the most popular display models. You
can also create your own display configurations, and add them to custom display libraries.
All open display libraries appear on the Tools pane. The default display library is always
open. Custom display libraries are stored separately from the XEdit workspace, and must be
opened explicitly.
191
Setting Up Rooms
Creating Custom Display Libraries

To create a custom display library
2 On the File menu, click New. Alternatively, click Open to open an existing room.
3 On the File menu, click New display library.
Alternatively, right-click anywhere inside the Tools pane’s display library area, and then
click New display library on the shortcut menu.
The new display library appears below the default display library area in the Tools pane.
New (empty) display library

4 Right-click anywhere in the display library area, and then click Save Display Library on
the shortcut menu.
The Save Display Library window appears.
5 Type a name for the new custom display library, and then click Save.
Custom display libraries are stored separately from the XEdit workspace. They have
a.dlib extension.
Adding Displays to Custom Libraries

To add a display to a custom display library
1 Click the Display button on the toolbar, and then click the room background to add
a display. Alternatively drag a display from a display library onto the room, or choose a
display within an existing room.
2 Customize the display as needed, and then drag it onto the display library while holding
the Ctrl key.
192
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Ctrl+click to drag display

to custom library
Note: It is not possible to further customize a display once it is inside a

library. Should you need to do so, drag the display to the room area, apply
the required changes, and then Ctrl+drag the modified display to the
display library. You can then remove the obsolete display from the library.
Removing Displays From Custom Libraries

To remove a display from a custom library
• Click the display you wish to remove and then press Delete.
• Alternatively, right-click its icon and then click Delete entry on the shortcut menu.
Closing Display Libraries

To close a display library
• Once the custom library is saved, you can right-click in the library area, and then click
Close display library on the shortcut menu.
• Alternatively, click Close display library, on the File menu.
193
Setting Up Rooms
Opening Display Libraries

To open a custom display library
• In the Tools pane, right-click anywhere in the display library area, and then click Open
display library on the shortcut menu.
• Alternatively, click Open display library, on the File menu.
Note: It is possible to have multiple custom libraries open at the same time.
194
Creating Layouts
This section describes Kaleido-X layout elements and their purposes, and provides detailed
configuration instructions.
Key Concepts
Layouts and Layout Elements
Layout elements
Term Description
Layout A layout is a visual grouping of monitors that appear on displays within a
room. A layout includes different types of monitors in a variety of placements
and sizes. There are two types of layouts: room layouts and full screen
layouts.
Monitor A monitor (also called widget) is an element that is part of a layout. The
Kaleido-X software supports several types of primitive layout elements (e.g.,
clocks, video monitors, audio monitors, UMDs, time code monitors, etc.), as
well as composite monitors. All primitive layout elements, except for the
video monitors and subtitling monitors are graphical layout elements.
Video monitor A video monitor is a layout element used to define an
area for displaying a video signal. It is represented in
XEdit by the boundary box made visible by clicking
the element.
Video window A video window is represented in XEdit by the blue rectangle inside a video
monitor. The video window does not necessarily cover the complete video
monitor’s area.
Composite A composite monitor is a group of primary elements that can be seen as a
monitor single object within a layout. Composite monitors typically include a video
window, one or more audio level meters, and a UMD with two tallies.
Time code A time code monitor displays the Ancillary Time Code (ATC) from an HD video
monitor signal, or the time code found in an embedded SDI video signal, part of the
vertical interval of an analog signal (VITC), or other external Linear Time Code
(LTC). This monitor also supports time code information from external
providers (see Configuring Logical Sources Based on External Alarm
Providers, on page 167). Time code monitors can be used for monitoring the
duration of programs. See Configuring Time Code Monitors on page 232.
195
Creating Layouts
Key Concepts
Layout elements (continued)

Term Description
Timer A timer can be slaved to a production timer, controlled from the Kaleido-
RCP2 (with start, stop and reset control via GPI inputs), and/or used for
monitoring the duration of programs.
Three timer modes are available: (1) UP: timer counts up starting from zero up
to a preset time, (2) DOWN: timer counts down from a preset time to zero,
and (3) REMAINING: timer counts down from the current time until it reaches
a preset time.
A timer monitor is based on a timer defined within the Kaleido-X system.
Timers are defined and configured in XEdit. Timer monitors can be
configured directly on the monitor wall. See Configuring Timers on page 234.
Audio monitor An audio monitor (also called audio level meter or ALM) is a graphical layout
element that provides a visual representation of sound. See Configuring
Audio Monitors on page 227, and Configuring Audio Scales, on page 229.
UMD An under monitor display (UMD) has a text label that can be static or
dynamically updated by a peripheral device. It can also have left and right
tally indicators. The UMD typically indicates the name of the video source
seen in a video monitor. See Configuring UMDs on page 240.
Alarm monitor Alarm monitors help you see the status of global and virtual alarms, but their
use is not limited to this type of alarms. When any alarm level is assigned to
an alarm monitor, the status of this alarm is shown. When using the global
alarm at the text label level, the alarm monitor displays the text value of the
alarm, which is a readable name. See Configuring Alarm Monitors on
page 244 and Alarm latch, on page 27 for more information.
Subtitling A subtitling monitor defines an area for displaying subtitles extracted from a
monitor video signal. By using a subtitling monitor you can monitor subtitling from a
specific DVB stream, independently from the associated video stream.
Requires the CC/XDS option (see Hardware and Software Options, on
page 383). See Configuring Subtitling Monitors on page 245.
Note: With the current version of the Kaleido-X software, the subtitling
monitor only supports DVB subtitles from Kaleido-IP sources.
Metadata A metadata monitor defines an area for displaying XDS data and digital
monitor content advisory descriptors extracted from a video signal. Requires the
CC/XDS option (see Hardware and Software Options, on page 383). See
Configuring Metadata Monitors on page 248.
V-chip monitor The V-chip monitor provides a visual indication of the V-chip rating from the
CC (608) metadata in an SD video signal, or from the CC (608) legacy caption
data, when such data is present within an HD video signal. Requires the
CC/XDS option. See Hardware and Software Options on page 383, and
Configuring V-Chip Monitors, on page 250.
196
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Layout elements (continued)

Term Description
Clock A clock is the visual representation of time in a video or display. It can be
based on a reference LTC signal or on the multiviewer system time. Clocks
can be in a digital or analog format. See Configuring Clocks on page 251.
Note: The KMV-3901/3911 supports digital clocks only.
Widget library A widget library is a collection of predefined layout elements. Monitors from a
library can be used to help construct a layout. More than one widget library
can coexist.
Aspect Ratio
Term Description
AFD VI Active format description encoded in the video index. Supported on
Kaleido-X and Kaleido-X16 only.
AFD 2016 Active format description encoded in the ancillary data (according to the
SMPTE 2016 standard). Not supported on KMV-3901/3911.
WSS Wide Screen Signaling. Supported on Kaleido-X and Kaleido-X16 only.
Video raster Video signal that is displayed inside the video monitor on a monitor wall.
Automatic Aspect Ratio

The aspect ratio of video displayed on the monitor wall can be automatically adjusted. With
multiple video players (monitors) on a monitor wall, in multiple formats/aspect ratios, this
makes it easy to switch from one format to another in the same player. Automatic
adjustment can be accomplished in two ways:
Video monitor slaved to input: A video monitor can be slaved to the input format such
that the video monitor will change its aspect ratio according to the input signal type (e.g.
SD, HD, DVI). See Configuring Automatic Aspect Ratios on page 220.
Video raster follows AFD/WSS: A video monitor can be configured so that WSS, AFD VI, or
AFD 2016 metadata is used to crop (and/or add black bars to) the video signal, giving the
video raster the correct aspect ratio. See Configuring Automatic Aspect Ratios on page 220.
This metadata can be reported as friendly text inside a UMD. Its presence can also be made
available in alarms as well as via SNMP traps.
Note: The automatic aspect ratio feature can also be configured for each
multiviewer input, based on decoded AFD or WSS metadata, when such
information is available within the input signal (see Calibrating Aspect Ratio
Decoding, on page 126).
Cropping Mode
The display of a video signal can be cropped to remove unwanted portions, or to zoom in
on a specific portion of the image. In XEdit, you can configure a video monitor to display
197
Creating Layouts
Key Concepts
signals in underscan or overscan mode (see Video Cropping/Zooming, on page 218). Not
supported on Kaleido-IP.
Underscan: When a video window is in underscan mode, it displays the full signal without
cropping any of the image.
Overscan: When a video window is in overscan mode, it displays a selected area of the
image, typically zoomed and cropped to fit the window. By default, the overscan mode
crops the left, right, top and bottom margins by 5% each.
Changing the underscan/overscan mode dynamically

It is possible to dynamically change the overscan/underscan mode based on the current
feed assigned to a video monitor. For example, you can change logical sources in a video
monitor using Gateway commands, where a video source requires the monitor to be in
overscan mode but a graphics source requires the monitor to be in underscan mode to
avoid cropping the image. A custom action script can make the monitor change its scan
mode depending on the format detected. For information on how to create such a script,
contact support@miranda.com.
Custom overscan
The amount of overscan applied can be customized to some extent, which will depend on
the original signal resolution, relative to the size of the video window where the image is
displayed. Excessive cropping may result in a loss of video image on the monitor wall.
Likewise, when a layout has several monitors with heavy cropping settings on the same
display head, some video windows may turn blank.
The examples listed below may be used as guidelines. These are based on a 1080p display
resolution. Displays with a lower resolution can afford more cropping.
• In the case of a full screen video window:
• The KMV-3901/3911 supports cropping up to 6% in both directions (i.e., 6%
vertically, and 6% horizontally).
• The Kaleido-X and Kaleido-X16 support cropping up to 18% in both directions.
• In the case of a video window occupying 1/16th of the display area:
• The KMV-3901/3911 supports cropping up to 17% in both directions for a 1080i HD
source, or up to 38% for an SD source.
• The Kaleido-X and Kaleido-X16 support cropping up to 42% in both directions.
Spanning
Graphical layout elements (UMDs, audio monitors, etc.) and video monitors can be made to
span across multiple heads, on up to 4 displays, portrait or landscape, in any combination.
On displays that fit perfectly side by side, this gives the impression of having one large
screen. When any layout element is spanned across displays, an icon automatically appears
in the top right corner.
198
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Warning icon appears even if monitor Video monitor spanned over two displays
is one pixel over the edge with warning icon in top right corner
To avoid pixel cropping on spanned monitors, you must position room displays so that
there is no gap between them. Use XEdit’s Remove horizontal space and/or Remove
vertical space buttons to make sure your displays are perfectly positioned for spanning.
You must also ensure that each display has the same pixel-per-inch (or -per-mm) ratio,
calculated as horizontal resolution (pixels) divided by display width (inches or mm) and
vertical resolution divided by display height. Ideally, you should use displays that have the
same physical size and resolution.
The figure below shows two displays properly sized and positioned for monitor spanning.
Horizontal: 1600 pixels ÷ 800 mm = 2 pixels/mm Horizontal: 1366 pixels ÷ 683 mm = 2 pixels/mm
Vertical: 1200 pixels ÷ 600 mm = 2 pixels/mm Vertical: 768 pixels ÷ 384 mm = 2 pixels/mm
Notes
• The Kaleido-IP does not yet support spanned monitors.
• In the case of a KMV-3901/3911 multiviewer, which supports a maximum
of eight video monitors over two displays, a spanned video monitor counts
as two (i.e. if you have one spanned video monitor, you can only add six
other video monitors to your layout; if you span two video monitors, you
can add only four other video monitors.
• Monitors can extend outside the edge of a display, but not completely.
• The use of a mouse is not completely supported with spanned video
monitors.
199
Creating Layouts
Detailed Directions
Notes (continued)
• Do not span a layout element beyond a maximum of 3000 × 1800 pixels.
When spanning or scaling video monitors in a layout, avoid heavy
cropping settings (generally avoid exceeding 15% in any direction).
Maximum horizontal Maximum vertical Maximum size of spanned video

cropping = 15% cropping = 15% element = 3000 × 1800 pixels
• There is no special configuration to be done in XEdit.
Detailed Directions
Managing Layouts
Note: Before creating or modifying a layout for a Kaleido-IP system, review

the guidelines listed in the Network Considerations section on page 391.
Opening Layouts
To open an existing layout
1 Click the Layouts tab.
2 On the File menu, click Open. Alternatively, click the Open button on the toolbar.
The Open Layout window appears.
200
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
• Double-click Full screen layout, if you wish to open a full screen layout.
• Double-click Multihead layout, if you wish to open a room layout.
3 Double-click the appropriate room.
4 Click the layout you wish to open, and then click Open.
The selected layout appears in the Layouts tab.
201
Creating Layouts
Managing Layouts
TIP
When you have more than one layout open, you can switch from one to
another by clicking the tabs at the bottom of the window.
Loading a Layout on the Monitor Wall

To load the current layout on the monitor wall, directly from XEdit, when working in
online mode
• Click the LOAD button on the toolbar.
202
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
The current layout appears on the monitor wall.
Closing Layouts
To close the current layout
• On the File menu, click Close. Alternatively, click the Close button on the toolbar.
Creating Room Layouts

To create a room layout
1 Click the Layouts tab in the main window.
The Create a New Layout window appears. It lists all the existing rooms and full screen
zones in your system.
3 Click the name of the room where this layout will be displayed.
An empty layout appears.

4 Add at least one monitor to the layout (see Adding Monitors to a Layout, on page 206).
5 Assign every monitor a logical source (see Assigning Logical Sources or Monitor Wall
Destinations to Monitors, on page 209).
The Save Layout window appears.
203
Creating Layouts
Managing Layouts
7 Type a name for the layout, and then click Save.
Creating Full Screen Layouts

To create a full screen layout
1 Click the Layouts tab in the main window.
The Create a New Layout window appears. It lists all the existing rooms and full screen
zones in your system.
3 Click the name of the full screen zone in which this layout will be displayed.
An empty layout area appears.

4 Add at least one monitor to the layout (see Adding Monitors to a Layout, on page 206).
If the full screen layout includes more than one composite monitor, you can designate
one of them who will receive its source assignments from the monitor under the mouse
pointer on the monitor wall, by selecting the Full screen layout monitor option in the
Properties pane.
204
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Make the appropriate assignments for the other elements in the layout (see Assigning
Logical Sources or Monitor Wall Destinations to Monitors, on page 209).
6 Type a name for the full screen layout, and then click Save.
Deleting Layouts
To delete a layout
1 Open the layout you wish to delete (see Opening Layouts, on page 200).
2 On the File menu, click Delete.

The layout is removed from your system configuration.
205
Creating Layouts
Managing Layouts
Adding Monitors to a Layout
Notes
• When adding monitors to a layout, avoid overlapping graphical layout
elements with one another. For example, making sure that there be no
overlap between UMDs and audio monitors in a layout will ensure optimal
performance.
• Before creating or modifying a layout for a Kaleido-IP system, review the
guidelines listed in the Network Considerations section on page 391.
• In the case of a KMV-3901/3911 or Kaleido-XQUAD multiviewer, layouts
are subject to the following limitations:
• up to eight video monitors over two displays (overlapping is not
supported),
• up to four stereo audio level meters per video monitor,
• one time code per video monitor,
• only digital clocks are supported,
• XDS metadata monitors are not supported.
• In the case of the Kaleido-X, Kaleido-X16, and Kaleido-IP multiviewers,
every output head supports up to 64 video monitors, across both the
current layout and a full screen layout when used.
• In the case of a Kaleido-X or Kaleido-X16, the minimum width supported
for a video window is 1/16th of the original signal’s horizontal resolution.
• In the case of a Kaleido-X, the minimum height supported for a video
window is 91 pixels.
• In the case of a Kaleido-MX or Kaleido-Modular-X multiviewer, every
output head supports up to 32 video monitors. However, if every monitor
is associated with audio meters and a time code monitor, then the
maximum is 24 video windows per output head. The image can be scaled
down to 1/8 of the original signal’s resolution. The minimum width
supported for a video window is 128 pixels.
To add monitors to a layout

1 Drag components from the widget libraries onto the layout, or create custom
components, using the toolbar buttons.
Note: All open widget libraries appear in the Tools pane.
2 Resize, move and configure the monitors until the desired layout is achieved.
For detailed configuration instructions on the different monitor types, refer to:
• Configuring Video Monitors, on page 213
• Configuring Audio Monitors, on page 227
• Configuring Time Code Monitors, on page 232
• Configuring Timers, on page 234
• Configuring UMDs, on page 240
• Configuring Alarm Monitors, on page 244
206
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
• Configuring Subtitling Monitors, on page 245

• Configuring Metadata Monitors, on page 248
• Configuring V-Chip Monitors, on page 250
• Configuring Clocks, on page 251
• Working with Composite Monitors, on page 255
• Managing Widget Libraries, on page 263
Removing Monitors
To remove a monitor from a layout
• Click the monitor you wish to remove, and then press Delete on your keyboard.
TIP
To remove multiple monitors in a single operation, extend your selection by
using the standard Ctrl+click keyboard shortcut.
Duplicating Monitors
To duplicate a monitor within a layout
1 Click the monitor you wish to duplicate.
2 On the Edit menu, click Duplicate. Alternatively, press Ctrl+D.
A copy of the monitor is added to the layout.
3 Move the new monitor to the appropriate position on the layout.
4 Press Ctrl+D again, and repeat until the desired number of copies of the monitor are
added to the layout.
The new copies are automatically positioned at intervals matching the relative
positions of the original monitor and its first duplicate.
Automatically Populating a Grid-Type Layout

Use the Auto-layout tool, to quickly create a layout containing several rows of up to 256
identical composites.
To automatically populate a grid-type layout
1 Add a first monitor to the layout (see Adding Monitors to a Layout, on page 206, and
Working with Composite Monitors, on page 255).
2 Position the monitor so that its upper left corner marks the location where you wish to
start populating the grid.
3 Click the monitor, and then click the Auto-layout button ( ) on the toolbar.
4 In the Auto-Layout window, type the total number of monitors you wish to spread over
the area delimited by the upper left corner of the current monitor and the bottom right
corner of the current head, and then click OK.
207
Creating Layouts
Managing Layouts
The first monitor is resized and replicated until the grid area is populated with the
specified number of monitors.
Note: To undo this action, you will need to press Ctrl+Z twice: once to
remove the copies, and then once more to restore the first monitor’s initial
size.
Copying layouts
To copy a layout
1 Open the layout you wish to duplicate.
2 On the File menu, click Copy layout to, point to the appropriate room, and then either
select an existing layout from the list, or click Empty layout.
A two-pane window appears. The left pane represents the source layout, and the right
pane represents the destination room where the new layout is to be used.
3 Drag one head from the source pane to the destination pane.
4 Repeat until every part of the source layout you wish to copy has been dragged to the
appropriate head in the destination pane, and then click Copy layout.
208
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
5 In Save Layout, type a name for the new layout, and then click Save. Alternatively, you
can replace an existing layout with the new layout.
Assigning Logical Sources or Monitor Wall Destinations to Monitors

In addition to the widget libraries, the Tools pane includes filtered lists from which you can
make assignments by dragging logical sources and monitor wall destinations onto
monitors (you do not need to select the monitor first).
When assigning logical sources or monitor wall destinations to monitors in a layout, it may
happen that the selection migrates to an adjacent element from the Channels/Sources or
Monitor wall destinations list during the drag-and-drop operation. Once you selected a
logical source or monitor wall destination from the corresponding list, dragging the
selected element horizontally until the pointer exits the Tools pane, or performing a slower
drag-and-drop may help.
When you load a layout to the monitor wall, monitors that are not configured with a logical
source assignment may be blank (until you manually set the assignment) but, if a monitor
was configured as a monitor wall destination, then it will remember its last source
assignment (if any). Keep in mind that, if two monitors are assigned the same monitor wall
destination, they will both reflect source assignments made to any of them during
operation. You may want to keep track of already assigned monitor wall destinations, if this
is something you wish to avoid, and carefully review any layouts you create or modify based
on elements from other layouts.
To assign a logical source to a monitor
• Select a logical source from the filtered Channels/Sources list, in the Tools pane, and
then drag it onto the appropriate monitor.
To assign a monitor wall destination to a monitor
• Select a destination from the filtered Monitor wall destinations list, in the Tools pane,
and then drag it onto the appropriate monitor.
Note: To assign different monitor wall destinations to individual

components within a composite monitor, proceed as follows.
1 Double-click the composite monitor to unlock it.
2 Click a component you wish to configure as a monitor wall destination,
within the unlocked composite.
3 In the Properties pane, click the Monitor wall destination box, and then
select the appropriate destination from the list.
4 Repeat from step 2 until you have made the required assignments for this
composite.
5 Click outside the composite monitor to lock it.
Selecting a Background Image for a Layout

For some purposes, you may wish to display a layout’s elements against a specific static
image.
To select a background image for a layout
1 Click the Layouts tab, and open the layout whose background you wish to set.
2 Click the display background on the layout.
209
Creating Layouts
Managing Layouts
3 In the Properties pane, click the Background image box, under Appearance, and then
click the button that appeared at the end of the box.
The Select Image window appears.
4 If the image you wish to use is not already listed in Select Image, then click the Open
button to open the Browse Image window. Locate the image, select it, and
then click Open.
The image is imported into the database.
Note: The maximum size for each image is 256 KB, and the maximum
overall size (for all images) is 10 MB. The image can be in PNG, GIF, or JPEG
format. Images can be used on multiple layouts and only need to be
imported to the database once.
5 In Select image, select the image from the Image selection list, and then click OK.
210
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
The image appears in the layout background.
Setting up a Layout for Background Keying from the DVI Input

Kaleido-X and Kaleido-X16 multiviewers have a DVI input connector for every output head.
Using these connectors, it is possible to feed keying material to the multiviewer. Depending
on your purposes, the content provided through the DVI input can be set either as a
background or as a foreground for the layout shown on the monitor wall (see Calibrating
the DVI Keying Mode, on page 117). This section explains how to set up a layout’s
background to be keyed out and replaced with content from the DVI input.
Notes
• The Kaleido-IP and KMV-3901/3911 multiviewers do not support DVI
keying.
• Since the DVI input cannot be resized, the resolution on the PC that feeds
this input is best set to match the selected display’s (head) resolution. The
DVI background is always positioned from the top-left corner of the
display and is drawn pixel for pixel. If the resolutions do not match, some
part of the DVI input might be missing or noise might be displayed.
To use the DVI input as the background in a layout

1 Click the background of the layout.
2 In the Properties pane, click the Background color box, and then click the button that
appears inside the box to open the Pick a Color window.
211
Creating Layouts
Managing Layouts
3 In Pick a Color, click the RGB tab, and then set the Red to 254, Green to 0 and Blue to
254.
Note: Since bright pink colors matching the RGB values listed below are
considered pass-through colors, and since background keying is always
enabled, if a layout's background color (or any monitor's color attribute) is
set to any of these RGB values, the DVI input will be displayed in the
corresponding areas on the monitor wall. If there is no signal at the
associated DVI input (or the multiviewer does not support DVI input, as
would be the case with a KMV-3901/3911 or Kaleido-IP), residual data may
be visible in such areas.
• Pass-through colors: RGB (254,0,254), (254,0,255), (254,1,254),
(254,1,255), (255,0,254), (255,0,255), (255,1,254), (255,1,255)
Do not use these colors for any monitor's color attributes. A layout's
background should only be set to such a color if a DVI input will be
contributing the actual background for this layout on the monitor wall.
4 Click OK.
5 If the area you wish to configure for background keying covers more than one head,
repeat the procedure for the remaining heads, by clicking the corresponding areas in
the layout.
212
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Zooming and Panning a View

To adjust the portion of a layout or room that is shown in the main window
• Press and hold the Ctrl key, then press the plus key (+) to zoom in or the minus key (–)
to zoom out.
• Press and hold the Ctrl key, then rotate the mouse wheel to zoom in or out.
• Type the zoom factor you wish to apply (in the range of 2% to 1600%) directly in the
zoom box.
• Press and hold the spacebar, then click and drag to pan.
• Use the scroll bars at the right side and bottom of the Layouts or Rooms tab.
• In the case of a layout view, click and drag the layout navigator’s red rectangle in the
Tools pane.
Showing and Hiding the Layout Navigator

To show or hide the layout navigator
• On the View menu, click Navigator. Alternatively, press Ctrl+Shift+N.
The layout navigator will appear in the Tools pane if it was hidden, and vice versa.
Configuring Video Monitors
Resizing a Video Monitor

To resize a video monitor
• Drag any of the corner handles, inwards or outwards.
The video monitor, and the associated video window, will become smaller or larger,
and they will both keep their aspect ratio.
• Drag any of the side handles, inwards or outwards.
The bounds of the video monitor will change, while the video window will still keep its
aspect ratio.
• Change the aspect ratio property of the video monitor. See Setting a Video Monitor’s
Aspect Ratio below.
213
Creating Layouts
The video monitor will keep its bounds, and the video window will be resized to fill as
much of the video monitor area as possible, given the new aspect ratio.
Note: In the case of a Kaleido-X or Kaleido-X16, the minimum width

supported for a video window is 1/16th of the original signal’s horizontal
resolution. In the case of a Kaleido-X, the minimum height supported for a
video window is 91 pixels. For a Kaleido-MX or Kaleido-Modular-X, the
minimum width is 128 pixels. In the case of a KMV-3901/3911,
Kaleido-XQUAD, or Kaleido-IP, there is no minimum size.
Setting a Video Monitor’s Aspect Ratio

To set a video monitor’s aspect ratio
1 Click the video monitor whose aspect ratio you wish to configure.
Video monitor with an aspect ratio of 16:9
Note: Double-click the video monitor, if is part of a composite monitor.
2 In the Properties pane, click the Current aspect ratio box, and then select the
appropriate aspect ratio from the list.
The selected aspect ratio is applied to the video window, within the video monitor.
214
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Video window’s aspect ratio changed to 4:3, within a 16:9 video monitor
To set a custom aspect ratio for a video monitor

1 Click the video monitor for which a custom aspect ratio is needed.
2 In the Properties pane, click the Custom aspect ratio box.

The box becomes editable.
3 Type the appropriate aspect ratio, and then press Enter.
The new aspect ratio is applied to the video window, within the video monitor, and it is
added to both the Current aspect ratio, and Custom aspect ratio lists.
Note: The custom values are appended to the Custom aspect ratio list on
an ongoing basis. They can then be applied to other monitors in other
layouts. Current aspect ratio only lists the current custom ratio, if any, in
addition to the default 16:9, and 4:3 values.
Adding Safe Area Markers

To add safe area markers for a video monitor in a layout
1 Click the video monitor whose safe area you wish to configure.
2 In the Properties pane, select the appropriate options, under Safe area markers.
Adding a Custom Safe Area Image

XEdit allows you to superimpose an image, e.g. a brand graphics, on top of a video monitor
in such a way that a video signal will show through the transparent areas in the graphics.
This is accomplished by adding a free-form safe area image to the video monitor. The image
can be in PNG, GIF, or JPEG format.
Notes
• The maximum size for each image is 256 KB, and the maximum overall size
(for all images) is 10 MB. Images can be used on multiple layouts and only
need to be imported to the database once.
215
Creating Layouts
Notes (continued)
• To ensure that the aspect ratio of the imported image is preserved, you
should position the graphics on a fully transparent background with the
same aspect ratio as the video monitor on which it is to appear.
• In the case of a cascade system, XEdit must be connected to the
multiviewer that will provide the source for the corresponding video
monitor. A monitor that is not associated with a specific source is displayed
by the system closest to the display.
To add a free-form safe area image to a video monitor

1 Open an existing layout, or create a new one.
2 Click an existing video monitor in the layout, or create a new one.
3 In the Properties pane, select the Show markers check box, under Safe area markers.
4 Click the Custom safe zone image box.

A button appears inside the box.
Select image
button
5 Click the button to open the Select Image window.
216
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
6 If the image you wish to use is not already listed in Select Image, then click the Open
button to open the Browse Image window. Locate the image, select it, and
then click Open.

7 In Select image, select the image from the Image selection list, and then click OK.
217
Creating Layouts
8 The image appears on the video monitor.
9 To adjust the transparency level of the image, click the Unsafe zone transparency box,
then move the slider or type the desired transparency value directly in the box. At 0%
the portions of the image that correspond to the unsafe area are opaque; at 100% the
entire image is transparent.
Note: When a custom safe zone image is selected, the following attributes
are not available: Marker color, Safe title offsets, Safe zone aspect ratio,
and Unsafe zone color.
Note: The Kaleido-IP does not yet support cropping and zooming.
218
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
To set the underscan/overscan properties of a video monitor

1 In XEdit, open a layout and click the video monitor for which you wish to configure the
underscan/overscan behavior.
The Underscan/Overscan settings appear in the Properties pane.

2 Choose Underscan (to display the entire video signal) or Overscan (to display a
cropped video signal) from the drop-down menu beside Mode.
3 To specify custom crop settings, click in the white area to the right of Custom overscan,
then click the button that appears.
219
Creating Layouts
4 In the Custom Overscan window, specify new percentage values for Left, Right, Top,
and Bottom overscan margins, then click OK.
Note: Generally avoid exceeding 15% in any direction. You can click
Restore defaults to enter the default overscan values (left, right, top and
bottom = 5%). Safe title area and aspect ratio markers follow the video
signal (e.g. if the safe title is within 5% of top, left, right and bottom, then
when the video is in default overscan mode, the safe title will not appear).
When the layout is loaded on the Kaleido-X, the updated overscan/underscan

properties become available.
Configuring Automatic Aspect Ratios

To slave a video monitor to the input signal aspect ratio
1 Click the video monitor for which you wish to apply automatic format detection.
2 In the Properties pane, select the appropriate value from the Automatic Aspect Ratio
list.
220
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
The default value is OFF.

If the Automatic Aspect Ratio property is set to Follow Input Format, then the video
monitor will change its aspect ratio based on the input feed’s format.
If the Automatic Aspect Ratio property is set to Follow Input Format and AFD Coded
Frame, then the video monitor will change its aspect ratio according to the AFD coded
frame. If there is no AFD present, the default value for the current format will be used
(see Configuring the Default Aspect Ratio for HD and SD Signals, below):
• the default HD AFD value, if the input is HD;
• the default SD AFD/WSS value if the input is not HD;
• if the default value for the current input format is None, then the video monitor will
change its aspect ratio based on the input feed’s format.
Note: This option applies to Kaleido-X and Kaleido-X16 multiviewers. The

Kaleido-IP does not yet support automatic adjustment of a video monitor’s
aspect ratio based on decoded AFD information. The KMV-3901/3911
multiviewers do not support decoding of a signal’s aspect ratio from AFD or
WSS metadata.
3 Click the Save button.
Configuring the Default Aspect Ratio for HD and SD Signals

To have a video raster follow a video signal’s AFD/WSS metadata
1 Click to put a check mark in the box labeled Follow AFD/WSS.
2 Choose a value from the drop-down menu beside Default SD AFD/WSS value. This is
the setting that will be used when there is no AFD or WSS in the SD signal. Choose
Keep Last to have the video window maintain the last decoded AFD or WSS value if the
signal is paused.
221
Creating Layouts
3 Choose a value from the drop-down menu beside Default HD AFD value. This is the
setting that will be used when there is no AFD in the HD signal. Choose Keep Last to
have the video window maintain the last decoded AFD value if the signal is paused.
4 Click the Save button.
Configuring a Video Monitor’s Alarm Reporting Behavior

To prevent users from missing temporary alarms on the monitor wall, monitors that are
capable of displaying an alarm status (e.g. video monitors, subtitling monitors, UMDs, alarm
monitors) can be configured with a latching mechanism. An alarm latch will keep the error
state visible until someone acknowledges the associated alarm. Video monitors can
provide alarm status information through their borders’ color and blinking behavior, and
show the latched state as small indicators in each corner of the video window.
To set the alarm reporting features for a video monitor
1 In XEdit, open a layout and click the video monitor whose alarm reporting behavior you
wish to configure.
2 In the Properties pane, scroll down to the Alarms/Tallies section.
222
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Blink mode selection

Display alarm latch check box
3 Set the appropriate border color scheme and associated thickness attributes.
4 Click the Blink mode box, and then select the appropriate blinking behavior, for your
purposes.
5 The Kaleido-X supports the following blinking modes:
Blink mode Description

Off The status indicator will never blink.
Follow Latch The status indicator’s blinking will follow the latch status.
The indicator will blink until someone unlatches the
alarm.
Critical The status indicator will blink when the current status is
critical.
Critical or Major The status indicator will blink when the current status is
critical or major.
Critical, Major and The status indicator will blink when the current status is
Minor critical, major or minor.
6 Select the Display alarm latch check box to enable the latched status indicators in each
corner of the video window.
Setting a Video Monitor’s Text Mode
Notes
• Closed captioning/subtitling text services can be enabled by purchasing
the CC/XDS option. The CC 608, CC 708, XDS and Subtitling WST are all
activated as a single option. In the case of the Kaleido-X (4RU) and Kaleido-
X (7RU) models, one key is needed per input card. See Hardware and
Software Options on page 383 for more information.
223
Creating Layouts
Notes (continued)
• The Kaleido-IP supports extraction of CC/subtitling and XDS data
(1 license/program). It is not yet possible to enable or verify the CC/XDS
option in XAdmin’s Status and Options page, for this multiviewer model.
Contact Technical Support for activation and configuration instructions
(see Contact Us, on page 453).
To set the subtitling properties of a video monitor

1 In XEdit, open a layout and click the video monitor for which you wish to specify
subtitling properties.
The CC/Subtitling settings appear in the Properties pane.
2 Select the Text enabled check box.
3 Select a value from the Text mode list.
4 Select the appropriate option from the Text colors list.
• Auto: To display text in colors, as defined in the signal.

• Black & white: To display white characters against a black background, regardless
of what is specified in the signal.
5 Specify an CEA-708 service value, if necessary, and then click Apply.
224
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
6 If you wish to pre-select a specific subtitling language for this monitor, click to expand
the DVB subtitling language list and then select the appropriate language or DVB
stream you wish to monitor.
The list of subtitling streams and languages contains the following:

• A series of DVB streams identified by their relative number: DVB stream 1 to DVB
stream 12. Choose from this series if you wish to always monitor the third available
subtitling stream, for example.
• A list of all supported languages, in alphabetical order based on the English name,
which is followed with the corresponding ISO 639-2 alpha-3 code. Choose from this
series if you wish to monitor subtitling in a specific language.
When XEdit is connected to the multiviewer, the available languages are indicated in
bold text. The ISO 639-2 alpha-3 codes for the available languages appear in the list of
relative subtitling streams.
Then, following DVB stream 12, the names and 3-letter codes of the currently available
languages appear in bold text before the list of all supported languages.
225
Creating Layouts
Notes
• The current version of the Kaleido-X software supports foreground colors
for teletext (WST, OP-47) only. Closed captions (CC, DTVCC) will appear in
white against a black background.
• If you do not need teletext to be displayed in colors, then you may find that
selecting Black & white will improve your system’s performance.
• In the case of the Subtitling (WST) text services, the Kaleido-X software
supports decoding of one preset page (called “Page A”) per video signal on
the monitor wall.
• In the case of CEA-608, only CC1 subtitles can be decoded.
• The current version of the Kaleido-X software supports DVB subtitles from
Kaleido-IP sources only.
7 If you wish to see CC/subtitling text in a larger, more readable font size, switch to the
expert view, and then select the Large font (experimental) check box.
Note: The large font option is in a beta stage, and works best with an aspect
ratio of 16:9. To switch to the expert view, click the View filters button at the
top of the Properties pane, and then select the Expert view check box.
226
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Configuring Audio Monitors
Note: To decode Dolby E audio metadata, the Dolby E option (KXS-DolbyE)

is required. See Enabling Options on page 411, for more information.
To configure an audio monitor

1 In the Layouts tab, click the audio monitor you wish to configure.
2 In the Properties pane, click the Audio scale box, under Appearance, and then select
the appropriate audio scale from the list.
Note: See Configuring Audio Scales on page 229 for more information.
3 The Monitoring indicator check box is selected by default. Audio monitors with a
monitoring indicator show by their color that someone is listening to the same audio
level. There could be a distinctive color for each of the displays at the site, or one for
each room, etc., telling you in more or less details, where the audio is currently being
monitored. Clear the check box if you do not need this.
Monitoring indicator check box
4 Under Assignments, click the Audio format box, and then select the appropriate
format from the list: Auto, PCM, Dolby E or Dolby VANC.
227
Creating Layouts
Configuring Audio Monitors
By default, audio monitors added to a layout by using the toolbar button have this
attribute set to Auto.
Notes
• If the actual audio source assigned to this audio monitor is not of the same
format configured here, then the audio data will not be shown.
• In the case of a Kaleido-IP, the current version of the Kaleido-X software
does not support audio monitors configured to monitor PCM audio
signals. For every audio monitor in your layout, the Audio format property
should be set to Auto.
5 Choose an Audio level.
6 Choose a value from the Channels list to indicate which channel to display.
• If the Audio format is set to PCM, then the available choices are (L) Left, (R) Right,
and Stereo.
• If the Audio format is set to Auto, Dolby E or Dolby VANC, then the available
choices are (L) Left, (R) Right, Stereo, (S) Surround, (Ls) Left surround, (Rs) Right
surround, (LFE) Low-frequency effects, (C) Center, (Bsl) Back surround left, (Bsr) Back
surround right, (Le) Left extra and (Re) Right extra.
7 If your monitoring purposes may involve decoding Dolby audio metadata, then select
the appropriate program number (1–8) from the Dolby program list.
Note: The number of programs included in a Dolby metadata bit stream

depends on the program configuration. For example, a Dolby E stream with
the 7.1 program configuration only has one program available for selection
in its metadata bit stream; a 5.1+2 stream has two programs; a 8x1stream has
eight program selections possible.
8 Make the appropriate assignments (see Assigning Logical Sources or Monitor Wall
Destinations to Monitors, on page 209).
9 Set the other attributes, as needed (see Creating Actions, on page 267 for more
information).
228
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Configuring Audio Scales

You can configure audio scales in two ways: either globally, from the Tools menu, or by
clicking a specific audio monitor in a layout.
Configuring Audio Scales From the Tools Menu

To configure an audio scale from the Tools menu
1 On the Tools menu, click Edit audio scales:
The Edit Audio Scale window appears.
229
Creating Layouts
Configuring Audio Scales
2 Select the audio scale you wish to customize (or the one on which you wish to base a
new audio scale), from the list at the bottom of the window.
Note: When you modify one of the default audio scales, you can only save
your changes as a new audio scale. On the other hand, custom audio scales
achieved.
3 Click one of the Top, Middle or Bottom Color buttons to set the top, middle and
bottom color.
The Choose Background Color window appears.
4 Click the appropriate color square.

Swatches in the selected color appear under Preview.
5 Click OK to close the Choose Background Color window.
In Edit Audio Scale, the corresponding button and the corresponding part of the audio
monitor preview show the selected color.
6 Repeat the procedure until all three colors are set as desired.
7 Enter the audio thresholds in Upper limit and Lower limit.
8 Type a name for the new audio scale in the box at the bottom, and then click the Save
as button. Alternatively, if you are modifying an existing custom audio scale, you can
click the Save button.
Configuring an Audio Scale From a Specific Audio Monitor

To configure an audio scale from a specific audio monitor
1 In the Layouts tab, click the audio monitor you wish to configure.
2 In the Properties pane, click the Audio scale box, under Appearance, and then click
the button that appeared at the end of the box.
230
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
3 Click one of the Top, Middle or Bottom Color buttons to set the top, middle and
bottom color.
The Choose Background Color window appears.
4 Click the appropriate color square.

Swatches in the selected color appear under Preview.
5 Click OK to close the Choose Background Color window.
In Edit Audio Scale, the corresponding button and the corresponding part of the audio
monitor preview show the selected color.
6 Repeat the procedure until all three colors are set as desired.
7 Enter the audio thresholds in Upper limit and Lower limit.
8 Type a name for the new audio scale in the box at the bottom, and then click the Save
as button.
Note: When you modify one of the default audio scales, you can only save
your changes as a new audio scale. On the other hand, custom audio scales
achieved.
231
Creating Layouts
Configuring Time Code Monitors
Removing Audio Scales From the System

To remove a custom audio scale from the system
1 On the Tools menu, click Edit audio scales.

2 In Edit Audio Scale, select the custom scale you wish to remove, from the list at the
bottom of the window, and then click Delete.
Note: The default audio scales cannot be removed from the system.
Configuring Time Code Monitors

To configure a time code monitor in a layout
1 To add a time code monitor to a layout, click the “Time code monitor” button on the
toolbar, and then click and drag to draw a time code monitor on the layout.
Alternatively, you can drag a time code monitor from a widget library to the layout.
2 Click the time code monitor you wish to configure.
The time code’s attributes appear in the Properties pane.
232
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
• To replace the default name, type a new name in the Name box.
• If you wish to assign a logical source, drag the appropriate element from the
Channels/Sources list that appears in the Tools pane, to the time code monitor.
The selected logical source’s name appears in the Source box.
Note: The first time code level applies by default. If your system’s logical
sources include more than one time code level, select the one you wish to
apply from the Time code level list.
• If you wish to assign time code information from an external provider (see
Configuring Logical Sources Based on External Alarm Providers, on page 167), then
select the appropriate text level from the Time code text level list.
233
Creating Layouts
Configuring Timers
If the time code monitor is configured with both a time code level and a text level,
it will show the most recently updated value (i.e., if the multiviewer received time
code data, followed by a text update from the GSM, then the monitor will display
the GSM alarm text). If a text value from the GSM does not meet the supported
formats, then the value is ignored. The supported formats are:
• HH:MM:SS (showing the hours, minutes, and seconds, as 2-digit values)
• HH:MM:SS:FF (showing the hours, minutes, seconds, and frames, as 2-digit
values)
• HH:MM:SS;FF (showing the hours, minutes, seconds, and drop frames, as 2-
digit values)
Note: With the current implementation of this feature, you may observe a
200-270 ms delay, depending on your multiviewer system topology, and on
the network load.
Configuring Timers
Building a countdown timer involves defining the timer itself (name, behavior, time
reference, etc.), and then creating one or more timer monitors to display the timer on a
monitor wall. Timers can be created, modified, deleted, added to a layout, assigned to
logical sources, rooms or individual RCP users, and controlled from the Kaleido-RCP2.
Note: In addition to timer monitors, Gateway commands can be used to

interact with timers. Refer to the Kaleido Remote Control Protocol (Gateway)
guide for details.
Adding Timers to the System

To define a timer
1 On the Tools menu, click Edit timers.
234
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
2 In Timer Editor, click New.
3 Type a name for your new timer in the Timer name box.
4 Choose the appropriate mode, from the Timer mode list.
• Up: The timer counts up starting from zero up to the Preset time.
• Down: The timer counts down from the Preset time to zero.
• Remaining: The timer counts down from the current time until it reaches the Preset
time. This mode is a one-shot mode—the timer will not automatically restart the
next day at the same start time. To restart it, you must either reset the timer
monitor on the monitor wall, or set and specify a new start time.
5 Choose what happens when the timer reaches the end of its countdown period, from
the Timer end list.
235
Creating Layouts
Configuring Timers
• Loop: The timer restarts and repeats its cycle (not available with the Remaining
timer mode).
• Stop: The timer stops.
• Overrun: The timer counts through its specified end point, and then continues
(when Overrun is specified, the timer always counts up).
6 If you chose Loop as a timer end mode, specify the number of times the loop should
repeat.
7 Specify a Preset duration.
8 Specify a Start time.
9 Choose a synchronization source from the Time code reference list— either an
embedded time code signal from a video source, an LTC input (if available), or the
internal clock time (default).
236
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
IMPORTANT
Before setting a timer’s start time in XEdit, review the following:
• If the selected time code reference includes time zone
information, then make sure that the PC or laptop that has XEdit
is configured for the same time zone.
• If the selected time code reference does not include time zone
information, or you chose to bind the timer to the multiviewer’s
internal clock, then the multiviewer's system time will apply.
• In the case of a Kaleido-X or Kaleido-X16 multiviewer model,
make sure the time zone settings are the same, on the
multiviewer, and on the PC or laptop that has XEdit.
• In the case of a KMV-3901/3911, when you save or export the
timer to the multiviewer, XEdit automatically converts the
start time you specified to UTC, based on your computer’s time
zone settings.
Note: In the case of a Kaleido-X or Kaleido-X16 multiviewer
model, the system's time zone is configured in XAdmin. In the case
of a KMV-3901/3911, time is always based on UTC. On a Windows
PC or laptop, the time zone is configured in the Date and Time
control panel.
10 Click Save to save your new timer and close the Timer Editor window.
11 Under the Channels/Sources tab, create a new logical source to associate with the
timer, and name it.
237
Creating Layouts
Configuring Timers
12 Click a cell in the time code level of the new logical source, and drag the timer you wish
to assign to this logical source from the filtered System list that appears in the Tools
pane, to the selected cell in the sources table.
13 Click Save.
Adding a Timer Monitor to a Layout

To create a timer monitor
1 In XEdit, open a layout and click the Timer button .
2 Click and drag to draw a timer monitor on the layout.
Alternatively, you can drag a timer monitor from the Timers library to the layout.
The timer’s attributes appear in the Properties pane.
3 Replace the default name, by typing a new name in the Name box.
4 If you wish to assign a logical source, drag the appropriate element from the
Channels/Sources list that appears in the Tools pane, to the timer monitor.
238
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
The selected logical source’s name appears in the Source box, and the Timer source
box shows the value of the corresponding time code level.
Assigned logical source name

Time code level value from assigned
logical source
Note: The first time code level applies by default. If your system’s logical
sources include more than one time code level, select the one you wish to
apply from the Time code level list.
5 Click the button beside Timer source.
The Timer Editor window appears.

6 Choose a timer (see Configuring Timers, on page 234) from the Timer List.
It is also possible to assign a timer to a timer monitor by dragging an existing logical

source (containing a timer assignment) to the monitor.
Note: Each timer monitor is assigned to exactly one timer. Multiple timer
monitors can be assigned to the same timer. Start/stop/reset or mode
changes applied to one monitor affect all other monitors assigned to the
same timer.
7 Click Save.
239
Creating Layouts
Configuring UMDs
8 Modify the timer’s Appearance properties as needed.
9 To attach an action to the timer, click the button beside Mouse click.
The Action Editor window appears.

10 Drag an action from the left pane to the middle pane, then specify the action’s behavior
in the right pane.
For more information on creating actions, refer to Creating Actions, on page 267.
11 Click OK to save the action assignment and close the Action Editor window.
12 Click Save to save the layout with the new timer monitor.
13 Export the database to a Kaleido-X, and load the layout.
The interactive timer monitor appears on the monitor wall. See Using Timers on
page 51, Assigning a Timer to a Room, on page 282, and Assigning a Timer to an RCP
User, on page 286, for more information.
Configuring UMDs
UMDs can serve various purposes: in addition to displaying the name of the video source
seen in a video monitor, they can report operational status and error conditions in real time,
by showing dynamic alarm and text attributes associated with a source.
Configuring a UMD’s Alarm Reporting Behavior

To prevent users from missing temporary alarms on the monitor wall, monitors that are
capable of displaying an alarm status (e.g. video monitors, subtitling monitors, UMDs, alarm
monitors) can be configured with a latching mechanism. An alarm latch will keep the error
state visible until someone acknowledges the associated alarm. For UMDs, the latch color
can be set to follow the background or the text color configuration.
240
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
To set the alarm reporting features for a UMD (text and tallies)
1 In XEdit, open a layout and click the UMD whose alarm reporting behavior you wish to
configure.
2 In the Properties pane, scroll down to the Alarms/Tallies section, to set the appropriate
text and background color scheme.

Latch colors selection


3 Click the Blink mode boxes, and then select the appropriate blinking behavior, for your
purposes:

Follow latch The status indicator’s blinking will follow the latch status.
The indicator will blink until someone unlatches the alarm.
critical.
Critical and major The status indicator will blink when the current status is
critical or major.
Critical, major and The status indicator will blink when the current status is
minor critical, major or minor.
4 Select the Display alarm latch check box to enable the latched status indicators.
Configuring Static UMD Text

An UMD can show two types of static text:
• static text that you typed directly on a layout, in XEdit (see below), or on the monitor
wall (see Editing UMD Text, on page 43);
241
Creating Layouts
Configuring UMDs
• static text associated with the current logical source assigned to the UMD, which you
entered in the sources table.
In the first case, the static text is tied to a specific layout whereas, in the other case, the text
is tied to a specific input signal.
To configure static text for a specific UMD in a layout
1 In the Layouts tab, double-click the UMD whose static text you with to set.
2 Make sure the appropriate input language and method are set in your operating
system.
3 Type the desired static text.
To configure static UMD text from the sources table
1 In the Channels/Sources tab, click the cell that corresponds to the appropriate text
level of the logical source that is assigned to the UMD whose static text you with to set.
2 Type the new static text.
Configuring Dynamic UMD Text

Assuming you have created logical sources (see Creating and Configuring Logical Sources,
on page 157) and a layout in XEdit, you can further configure UMDs in your layout to report
dynamic text labels, associated with the sources you wish to monitor.
To configure dynamic UMD text
1 In the Channels/Sources tab, click a cell that corresponds to the appropriate text level
of a logical source.
2 In the filtered System list, navigate to the text element you wish to monitor, and drag it
onto the selected cell.
3 Make corresponding assignments to other logical sources by incremental copy, if

desired (see Making Further Assignments by Incremental Copy, on page 168).
Changes to the sources table are saved.
5 Click the Layouts tab, and then open the layout you wish to configure.
6 Unlock the appropriate composite monitor if applicable (see Unlocking a Composite
Monitor, on page 260), and then click the UMD whose dynamic text reporting behavior
you with to set.
7 In the Properties pane, click the Text label level box, and then select the text level you
configured in step 2.
242
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
8 Click outside the composite to lock it, if applicable.

9 Repeat step 6 – step 8 until you have configured all UMDs that are to display dynamic
text when this layout is loaded on the monitor wall.
Setting the Text Font

To set the text font for a UMD in a layout
1 In the Layouts tab, click the UMD whose text font you wish to set.
2 In the Properties pane, click the Text font box, under Appearance, then click the
button that appeared at the end of the box.
The Select a Font window appears.
3 Select the appropriate values from the Font, Font Style and Size lists.
Note: On a monitor wall display connected to a KMV-3901/3911

multiviewer output, there is no difference in the rendering between bold
and regular text.
4 Click OK.
243
Creating Layouts
Configuring Alarm Monitors
Configuring Alarm Monitors

To add an alarm monitor to a layout
1 Click the Alarm monitor button ( ) on the toolbar, click the layout, and then move or
resize the monitor as needed.
You may choose to layer this monitor on top of the video window within a composite.
See Working with Composite Monitors on page 255, for instructions on how to add
elements to a composite.
Alarm monitor
Note: On the monitor wall, an alarm monitor positioned over a video

window has the following default behavior:
• If the source assigned to the alarm monitor is an active alarm (red), the
alarm monitor is visible. The video transparency settings configured in
XEdit for this alarm monitor apply to the part of the monitor that overlaps
the video window.
• If the source assigned to the alarm monitor is an inactive alarm (green),
the alarm monitor is not visible on the monitor wall. If the alarm monitor
partially overlaps the video window, then the part of the monitor that
does not cover the video window remains visible (green).
2 In the Properties pane, set the transparency attribute to the appropriate value for your
purposes, by clicking the Transparency box, and then using the slider or typing the
desired value directly into the box.
Set the other appearance attributes as desired.

3 In the Alarms/Tallies section, set the appropriate color and video transparency scheme
for the text and background, to achieve the desired alarm reporting behavior.
244
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
100% video transparency to keep the status

indicator hidden when there is no alarm.

Latch colors selection
4 Click the Blink mode box, and then select the appropriate blinking behavior, for your
purposes:

Follow latch The status indicator’s blinking will follow the latch status.
The indicator will blink until someone unlatches the alarm.
critical.
Critical and major The status indicator will blink when the current status is
critical or major.
Critical, major and The status indicator will blink when the current status is
minor critical, major or minor.
5 To enable the latched status indicators, select the Display alarm latch check box, click
the Latch colors box, and then select the appropriate color scheme for your purposes:
either Same as text colors, or Same as background colors.
6 Choose from two display modes: Cycle and Marquee.
In cycle mode, the alarm monitor displays text from each alarm, one after the other. In
marquee mode, the alarm text scrolls across the monitor. In addition, you can control
the cycling speed and the scroll rate by setting the cycling period, in milliseconds.
Destinations to Monitors, on page 209), and select the desired alarm and text label
levels, if necessary.
Configuring Subtitling Monitors

To monitor subtitling from a DVB stream
1 To add a subtitling monitor, click the Subtitling monitor button ( ) on the toolbar,
click the layout, and then move or resize the monitor as needed.
245
Creating Layouts
Configuring Subtitling Monitors
2 Click the subtitling monitor you wish to configure.
The subtitling monitor’s attributes appear in the Properties pane.
3 To replace the default name, type a new name in the Name box.
4 If you wish to assign a logical source, drag the appropriate element from the
Channels/Sources list that appears in the Tools pane, to the subtitling monitor.
The selected logical source’s name appears in the Source box.
246
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Note: The first video level applies by default. If your system’s logical sources
include more than one video level, select the one you wish to apply from the
Video level list.
5 If you wish to pre-select a specific subtitling language for this monitor, click to expand
the DVB subtitling language list and then select the appropriate language or DVB
stream you wish to monitor.
The list of subtitling streams and languages contains the following:

• A series of DVB streams identified by their relative number: DVB stream 1 to DVB
stream 12. Choose from this series if you wish to always monitor the third available
subtitling stream, for example.
• A list of all supported languages, in alphabetical order based on the English name,
which is followed with the corresponding ISO 639-2 alpha-3 code. Choose from this
series if you wish to monitor subtitling in a specific language.
When XEdit is connected to the multiviewer, the available languages are indicated in
bold text. The ISO 639-2 alpha-3 codes for the available languages appear in the list of
relative subtitling streams.
Then, following DVB stream 12, the names and 3-letter codes of the currently available
languages appear in bold text before the list of all supported languages.
247
Creating Layouts
Configuring Metadata Monitors
6 Modify the subtitling monitor’s Appearance properties as needed.
7 Change the Default aspect ratio as needed.
This value is used in the absence of aspect ratio information in the DVB subtitling
stream, when the associated video stream is not decoded. When the video is decoded,
the video signal’s aspect ratio is used, in the absence of aspect ratio information in the
DVB subtitling stream. See Setting a Video Monitor’s Aspect Ratio on page 214 for more
information, including on selecting a custom aspect ratio.
8 Refer to Configuring a Video Monitor’s Alarm Reporting Behavior, on page 222, to
configure the subtitling monitor’s alarm reporting features.
9 Refer to Creating Monitor Wall Actions, on page 269 to configure mouse-click actions
for this subtitling monitor.
Configuring Metadata Monitors

To monitor XDS data and digital content advisory descriptors
1 Click the Metadata monitor button ( ) on the toolbar, click the layout, and then move
or resize the monitor as needed.
248
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Alternatively, you may choose to layer this monitor on top of the video window within
a composite. See Working with Composite Monitors on page 255, for instructions on
how to add elements to a composite.
2 In the Properties pane, select the check boxes that correspond to the data elements
you wish the monitor to display.
3 You can also set appearance properties, including the font and size of the text labels, or
choose not to display the labels by clearing the Display legend check box.
The selected monitor is updated accordingly on the layout.

Destinations to Monitors, on page 209) and select the desired video level, if necessary.
5 Click the Save button on the toolbar.
249
Creating Layouts
Configuring V-Chip Monitors
Configuring V-Chip Monitors

A V-chip monitor provides a visual indication of the V-chip rating from the CC (608)
metadata in an SD video signal, or from the CC (608) legacy caption data when such data is
present within an HD video signal.
Note: Extraction of CC (608) captions and CC (608) legacy captions is

available with the Extraction of CC, Subtitling and XDS metadata option
(CC/XDS).
To add a V-chip monitor to a layout

1 Click the V-chip monitor button ( ) on the toolbar, click the layout, and then move or
resize the monitor as needed.
You may choose to layer this monitor on top of the video window within a composite.
See Working with Composite Monitors on page 255, for instructions on how to add
elements to a composite.
2 In the Properties pane, set the transparency attribute to the appropriate value for your
purposes, by clicking the V-chip transparency box, and then using the slider or typing
the desired value directly into the box.
3 If you wish to preview the logo associated with a specific V-chip rating, select it from
the V-chip rating preview list. For example:
Note: As its name implies, the V-chip rating preview is only a preview, and
its value is not saved with the layout.
Destinations to Monitors, on page 209), and select the desired video level if necessary.
250
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Notes
• Unlike alarms, the V-chip rating associated with a video signal that is
currently monitored on the monitor wall is not relayed to the XEdit user
interface, when working in online mode.
• The V-chip monitor uses the holding time configured with the XDS
filtering calibrations for the associated video source (see Calibrating
Metadata Holding Time, on page 128). Once the specified holding time
has expired, the V-chip monitor displays the N/A logo ( ).
• When V-chip data cannot be extracted from the current video signal, the
V-chip monitor displays the N/A logo ( ).
Configuring Clocks
In addition to the default combo-type clock that can be added to a layout by using the
Clock button ( ) on the toolbar, the predefined widget library includes a selection of
analog and digital clocks.
Notes
• The KMV-3901/3911 multiviewer does not support analog clocks.
• In the case of a KMV-3901/3911 or Kaleido-MX, the system time is always
based on UTC. However, if you wish to see the time from different time
zones on the monitor wall, you can configure different clocks accordingly.
To configure a clock
1 In the Layouts tab, click the clock you wish to configure.
251
Creating Layouts
Configuring Clocks
2 In the Properties pane, make the appropriate assignments.
• Determine the time source (see Assigning Logical Sources or Monitor Wall
Destinations to Monitors, on page 209), and select the desired time code level if
necessary.
• Select the appropriate time zone for your purposes.
If you select Autodetect, then the clock will use the time zone from the assigned
source, based on the following rules:
• If the clock is bound to an LTC or DVITC time code that includes time zone
information, then the time zone is decoded from the time code.
• If the clock is bound to the system time, or to an LTC or DVITC time code that
does not include time zone information, then:
– in the case of a Kaleido-X or Kaleido-X16 multiviewer model, the time zone
configured in XAdmin applies;
– in the case of a KMV-3901/3911 or Kaleido-MX, the system time is always
based on UTC.
3 If the clock is bound to an LTC or DVITC time code, and you wish it to momentarily use
the multiviewer’s internal clock for reference should the assigned time code become
unavailable, then select Fall back to internal clock.
When a clock configured with this option loses its time reference, it will not stop but
keep working to the beat of the multiviewer internal clock instead.
Notes
• When a clock switches between the LTC or DVITC signal and the
multiviewer’s internal clock reference, you may notice a one-second offset
on the monitor wall.
• Refreshing the current layout (or switching to another layout and then
back) cancels the fallback mechanism. When this happens, the clock that
had lost its time reference halts, showing the time it was at the moment
the layout was refreshed (or loaded again), based on the multiviewer
system clock.
252
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
4 Modify the clock’s Appearance properties as needed.
• From the Clock type list, select between a digital, an analog or a combo-type clock.
• Resize the clock as needed, set color attributes and select the appropriate date and
time formats. In the case of an analog or combo-type clock, you can also add a
clock logo (see Inserting a Clock Logo, below).
• In the case of an analog or combo clock, if the clock is to be displayed against a
pink background— RGB (255, 0, 255) or similar—, or if the current layout belongs
to a cascade room (see page 63), then make sure to clear the Border antialiasing
check box.
In such cases, if border antialiasing remains enabled, the clock will have a pink
outline on the monitor wall.
5 Define actions associated to this layout element (see Creating Monitor Wall Actions, on
page 269).
Inserting a Clock Logo
Notes
• The maximum size for each image is 256 KB, and the maximum overall size
(for all images) is 10 MB. The image can be in PNG, GIF, or JPEG format.
Images can be used on multiple layouts and only need to be imported to
the database once.
• In the case of a cascade system, XEdit must be connected to the
multiviewer that will provide the source for the corresponding clock. A
clock that is not associated with a specific source is displayed by the
system closest to the display.
253
Creating Layouts
Configuring Clocks
To insert a clock logo

1 In the Properties pane, click the Logo box, under Appearance.
2 Click the button that appeared at the end of the box.
The Select Image window appears.

3 If the logo you wish to use is not already listed in Select Image, then click the Open
button to open the Browse Image window. Locate the image, select it, and then click
Open.

4 In Select image, select the logo you wish to use from the Image selection list, and then
click OK.
The logo appears on the clock background.
254
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Working with Composite Monitors
Creating a Composite Monitor

Composite monitors encapsulate a number of primary elements (e.g. a video monitor, one
or two audio monitors, a UMD, and a time code) that can then be managed as a single
object. The following example outlines the basic rules to follow, in order to create
composite monitors that can be resized elegantly.
To create a composite monitor
1 Open an existing layout or create a new one.
2 Click the Composite button on the toolbar, and then click the layout. Resize the
empty composite box approximately, to a size that will be appropriate for the display
where it is to appear.
Empty composite
3 Right-click the empty box, and then click Unlock on the shortcut menu.
Notice that the handles around the box boundary line become orange.
Unlocked empty composite
Note: If you double-click a composite monitor, the handles also become

orange. However, in such a case, you cannot move or resize individual
components within the composite (see Unlocking a Composite Monitor, on
page 260).
4 Add a monitor to the composite, either using a button on the toolbar or dragging an
element from a widget library. For example, click the Video monitor button on the
toolbar, and then click inside the composite to add a video monitor.
255
Creating Layouts
Video monitor within unlocked composite
Note: Only primary monitors (not composite) can be part of a composite.
5 Click the Audio monitor button on the toolbar, and then click inside the composite
to add an audio level meter.
Audio level meter within unlocked composite
6 Click the UMD button on the toolbar, and then click inside the composite to add a
UMD.
UMD within unlocked composite
7 Move the audio level meter to the very edge of the composite, using the mouse and
then finishing with the arrow keys, and resize it as appropriate.
256
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Audio level meter resized and moved to the side
8 Move the UMD to the very bottom of the composite, using the mouse and then finishing
with the arrow keys, and resize it if needed.
UMD resized and moved to the bottom, with its upper right handle matching the audio level
meter’s lower left handle
Notes
• Making sure that UMDs and audio monitors do not overlap one another in
a composite monitor will ensure optimal performance of any layout where
several copies of this composite might appear. As a rule, avoid overlapping
graphical elements in a layout.
• To align a monitor more precisely against another, select one of them, and
then click the second one while holding the Shift key. It is then possible to
drag any of the sizing handles (the larger grey dots) to resize any of the
selected monitors, while their relative position remains visible. Whenever
appropriate, matching adjacent monitors’ corner or center handles
together will help achieve a composite that can be resized elegantly.
9 Move the video monitor to the top-left corner of the composite, then click its bottom-
right corner handle, and drag it to stretch the video until one of its dimensions
completely fills the empty area (vertically or horizontally).
257
Creating Layouts
Video monitor stretched to fill the remaining horizontal area
10 Drag the video monitor’s bottom-center handle until it meets the UMD’s bounds.
Video monitor stretched vertically with its bounds matching the UMD’s
Note: Resizing the video monitor is easier with the UMD’s bounds visible:
first click the video monitor and then click the UMD while holding the Shift
key.
11 Adjust the size and position of the components some more if needed, making sure to
keep the peripheral monitors at the very edges of the composite’s boundary box, while
minimizing empty space within the composite.
12 Click outside the composite to lock it.
Locked composite
13 Drag the composite’s top or bottom center handle inwards, until there is no more
empty space above and below the video monitor.
258
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Composite resized to remove remaining empty space around video monitor
14 To be able to reuse the new composite in other layouts, drag it onto the appropriate
widget library while holding the Ctrl key. See Creating a Widget Library on page 263 for
more information.
Resizing a Composite Monitor

To resize a composite
• Click the composite monitor, and drag any of its corner handles outwards or inwards.
The composite expands or shrinks while its individual elements maintain their relative
position and aspect ratio.
Larger and smaller copies of the original composite
Individual monitors within a composite are resized according to the following rules:
• Video monitors are scaled proportionally, in both width and height.
• Vertical audio monitors are scaled vertically, but their width does not change.
• Horizontal audio monitors, time codes, timers, and UMDs are scaled horizontally,
but their height does not change.
• Clocks are not resized.
259
Creating Layouts
The following table summarizes these rules:
Monitor type Height Width

Video Scalable Scalable
Vertical audio monitor Scalable Fixed
Horizontal audio Fixed Scalable
monitor, UMD, time
code, timer
Clock Fixed Fixed
Note: In the case of a Kaleido-X or Kaleido-X16, the minimum width

supported for a video window is 1/16th of the original signal resolution. In
the case of a Kaleido-X, the minimum height supported for a video window
is 91 pixels. For a Kaleido-MX or Kaleido-Modular-X, the minimum width is
128 pixels. In the case of a KMV-3901/3911 or Kaleido-IP, there is no
minimum size.
Unlocking a Composite Monitor

Since a composite monitor functions as a single entity, its individual components are
locked together. If you wish to configure individual components within a composite
monitor, you need to first unlock the monitor. There are two ways in which a composite
monitor can be unlocked, one of which prevents you from moving or resizing individual
components. An unlocked composite monitor has orange handles around its boundary
line.
Orange handles
If you wish to configure properties for individual components within a composite

monitor
• Double-click the composite monitor whose primary elements you wish to configure.
Notice that the handles around the boundary line become orange. When using this
method, you cannot move or resize the monitor’s individual components.
If you wish to add, move, or resize individual components within a composite monitor
• Right-click the composite monitor you wish to modify, and then click Unlock on the
shortcut menu. Alternatively, click the monitor, and then press F2.
Notice that the handles around the boundary line become orange.
260
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Using the Region Editor
Opening the Region Editor
Note: The region editor is part of the expert view. To show the expert view,
click the View filters button on the Properties pane’s toolbar, and then
select the Expert view check box. Using the region editor is not
recommended. To accomplish most configurations, the standard tools
available in the layout editor are sufficient.
To open the region editor

1 Click the monitor whose properties you wish to see.
2 In the Properties pane, click the Bounds box, under Size & Position.
Click the button that appeared inside the box to open the Region Editor window.
Configuring a Monitor’s Position Using the Region Editor

To set a monitor’s position on the layout
1 For each position, first select the appropriate unit.
261
Creating Layouts
Format Painting
2 Type values in the Left, Top, Right, and Bottom boxes, relative to the upper-left corner
of the display.
3 Click OK to close the editor.
Configuring a Monitor’s Dimensions Using the Region Editor

To configure a monitor’s dimensions
1 For each dimension, first select the appropriate unit.
2 Type values in the Width and Height boxes.

3 Click OK to close the editor.
Format Painting
Copying Properties from one Monitor to Another

Every monitor in a layout has properties related to its appearance that can be configured by
the user, in the Properties pane. The Copy properties tool copies most of these
properties from one monitor to another of the same type (e.g. audio monitor to audio
monitor, clock to clock, etc.).
Note: The Copy properties tool does not copy the assignments from one
monitor to another, and it does not copy the size from one monitor to
another.
To use the Copy properties tool

1 In the Layouts tab, click the monitor whose properties you wish to copy to another
monitor of the same type.
The monitor’s boundary box appears.
The Copy properties button becomes available on the toolbar.
2 Click the Copy Properties button to switch into format-painting mode.
3 Point to another monitor of the same kind in the layout.
The pointer changes to a pointing finger , indicating that the properties of the first
monitor (whose boundary box is still shown) can be copied onto the monitor beneath
the pointer.
4 Click the monitor beneath the pointer to copy the properties onto that monitor.
262
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Its appearance will change to reflect the new properties.
Note: To have the width and height copied as well, press and hold the Ctrl
key while clicking the monitor.
5 Repeat this for each monitor whose properties you wish to change.
6 Click the Select button on the toolbar to exit format-painting mode when you have
finished.
Copying Size from one Monitor to Another

The size of every monitor in a layout can be adjusted by the user, by dragging handles on
the boundary box that appears when the monitor is selected. The Copy size tool copies
the size from one monitor to another monitor of the same kind.
Note: The Copy size tool does not copy any other property from one
monitor to another.
To use the Copy size tool

1 In the Layouts tab, click the monitor whose size you wish to copy to another monitor of
the same type.
The monitor’s boundary box appears.
The Copy size button becomes available on the toolbar.
2 Click the Copy size button to switch into size-painting mode.
3 Point to another monitor of the same kind in the layout.
The pointer changes to a pointing finger , indicating that the size of the first monitor
(whose boundary box is still shown) can be copied onto the monitor beneath the
pointer.
4 Click the monitor beneath the pointer to copy the size onto that monitor.
Its size will change to match that of the first monitor.
5 Repeat this for each monitor whose size you wish to change.
6 Click the Select button on the toolbar to exit size-painting mode when you have
finished.
Managing Widget Libraries
Creating a Widget Library

To create a widget library
2 Right-click inside one of the predefined widget libraries in the Tools pane, and then
click New widget library on the shortcut menu. Alternatively, click New widget library
on the File menu.
263
Creating Layouts
Managing Widget Libraries
Widget-library shortcut menu.
The new widget library appears below the default widget library area in the Tools pane.
New widget library
3 On the File menu, click New. Alternatively, click Open to open an existing layout.
4 Click the appropriate button on the toolbar, then click the layout to add a monitor of
the selected type. Alternatively drag a monitor from one of the existing libraries onto
the layout, or choose an existing monitor within the layout.
5 Customize the monitor if necessary, and then drag it onto the new widget library while
holding the Ctrl key.
Note: It is not possible to customize a monitor once it is inside a library.
6 Right-click anywhere inside the widget library, and then click Save widget library on
the shortcut menu.
The Save Widget Library window appears.
264
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
7 Type a name for the new custom widget library, and then click Save.
Closing a Widget Library

To close a widget library
• Once the custom library is saved, you can right-click in the library area, and then click
Close widget library on the shortcut menu. Alternatively, on the File menu, click Close
widget library.
Opening a Widget Library

To open a custom library
• Right-click inside one of the predefined widget libraries in the Tools pane, and then
click Open widget library on the shortcut menu.
• On the File menu, click Open widget library.
• On the File menu, point to Open recent, and then select from the list of recently used
widget libraries.
Note: It is possible to have multiple custom libraries open at the same time.
265
Creating Actions
This chapter describes how to configure and trigger monitor wall actions, and background
actions.
Overview
An action is an operation automatically performed in response to a specific trigger. A
monitor wall action is associated with a monitor belonging to a specific layout or directly
with a specific layout. It can only be activated when that layout is loaded on the monitor
wall, whereas a background action can be triggered at any time by any alarm on the
multiviewer. Unlike monitor wall actions, background actions are always available within a
Kaleido-X system, regardless of what layouts are currently loaded. Examples of actions:
• Unlatch/Acknowledge all
• Load layout
• Assign logical source (channel)
• Set GPI output
• Show/Hide full screen layout
• Reset/Pause/Start a timer
• Monitor audio
• Toggle destination overlay
• Switch router crosspoint
• Custom (JavaScript)
Note: Version 5.30 of the Kaleido-X software introduced a bug fix that
required changes to the JavaScript code associated with all predefined
actions elements in XEdit. For the fix to be applied to actions created with an
earlier version of XEdit, open them with version 5.30 or later, and view the
underlying JavaScript code by selecting every action element in turn, and
then clicking the View source button in the Properties pane. XEdit will
automatically update the JavaScript code. Verify that the first lines in the
code start with var param_<xxx> = <value>, before saving the action.
Key Concepts
Term Description
Layout A group of monitors (or composite monitors) arranged for display on a
monitor wall.
XAdmin The application used to perform administrative functions (e.g. configure
network settings) on a Kaleido-X monitoring system.
267
Creating Actions
Key Concepts
Term Description
XEdit The application used to create and modify rooms, layouts and other
components of a Kaleido-X monitoring system.
Composite monitor A group of primary monitors.
Monitor A graphical component used in the creation of a layout. Typical monitors
include UMDs, time code monitors, audio monitors, video monitors, and
clocks.
Action item Action elements that are associated with a specific action (e.g. Load
Layout, Set GPI Out, etc.).
System list Refers to the hierarchical list visible under XEdit’s System tab, which
gives a virtual representation of the system hardware (i.e. multiviewers
and peripheral devices).
Trigger Refers to the event that causes an action to be invoked. For a monitor
wall action, a trigger could be a double click on a monitor. Background
actions are triggered by alarms or by a Gateway command. When
defining an action for a monitor, you could specify, for instance, that a
specific full screen layout be displayed on the monitor wall in response
to the trigger.
On Change: background action is triggered by any change in alarms
status
On Disabled: background action is triggered when an alarm is disabled
On Normal/OK: background action is triggered when an alarm reverts to
normal
On Minor/Warning: supported for Gateway alarms only
On Major: supported for Gateway alarms only
On Critical/Error: background action is triggered by a critical alarm
Triggering of Any multiviewer alarm can be used as a trigger to invoke a background
actions action.
Note: A background action triggered by an alarm is always executed,
regardless of the alarm’s operational mode (see Alarm Suppression, on
page 136).
The end event of any countdown timer can be used as a trigger to invoke
a background action.
Gateway commands sent by an external device can be used to trigger
actions created in XEdit.
Any GPI input from the multiviewer can trigger a background action.
Triggering of GPI Any multiviewer alarm can be used to trigger a GPI output change.
outputs
Gateway Refers to the “Kaleido Remote Control Protocol (Gateway)” interface
supported by Miranda multiviewers. See the Kaleido Remote Control
Protocol (Gateway) User’s Guide for more information.
268
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Detailed Directions
Creating Monitor Wall Actions

Monitor wall actions can be assigned to a monitor on a specific layout. Such actions can
only be triggered when that layout is loaded on the monitor wall.
To assign a monitor wall action to a monitor
1 Open the layout that contains the monitor to which you wish to assign an action, or
create a new layout.
2 In the Layouts tab, unlock the appropriate composite monitor if applicable (see
Unlocking a Composite Monitor, on page 260), and then click the monitor you wish to
configure.
3 In the Properties pane, click the Mouse click box, under Actions/Scripts.
Note: For a UMD, three action types can be set, and there is a box for each
under Actions/Scripts: Left tally - Mouse click, Right tally - Mouse click, and
UMD click.
4 Click the button that appeared at the end of the box you clicked.
5 In Action Editor, drag the appropriate action item from the Action List pane to the
middle pane under either the Single Click or Double Click tab.
6 Select the action in the middle pane.

7 In the right pane, specify the attributes of the action.
8 Repeat the procedure if you wish to add action items. If multiple actions are specified,
the trigger (e.g. single click on UMD) will cause all of these actions to be executed in
order.
269
Creating Actions
Creating Background Actions
9 When finished, click OK to close the window, and then click the Save button on the
toolbar.
The next time the layout is loaded on the monitor wall, the actions will be available.
Note: When you click a monitor on the monitor wall, all the actions
associated with the single-click event are triggered. When you double-click
a monitor, all the actions associated with the single-click AND the double-
click events are triggered.
Creating a Background Action From the Actions Tab

To create a background action
1 Open XEdit and load the database associated with the multiviewer for which you wish
to create a background action. Alternatively, click Connect on the Configure menu, to
work online (see Using XEdit Online, on page 67).
2 Click the Actions tab.
3 Click the New button on the toolbar.
270
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
New
4 In the Tools pane, click and drag an alarm from the filtered System list onto the new
action. This defines the alarm as the trigger for the action.
Alternatively, right-click the action and select the alarm source from the shortcut menu.
Note: You do not have to perform this step for actions triggered by
Gateway commands, because the Gateway alarm itself acts as the trigger.
See Creating an Action that can be Triggered via a Gateway Command, on
page 273.
5 From the Action list area of the Tools pane, drag one of the available action items onto
one of the six columns at the bottom of the Actions tab.
271
Creating Actions
6 Configure the action’s properties in the Properties pane.
7 Repeat step 5 and step 6 as necessary.
Note: If you assign multiple action items to a trigger, you can change the
order of execution by dragging items to higher or lower positions in the list.
When the background action is triggered, its associated action items are
executed in order from top to bottom.
8 Click the Save button on the toolbar.

9 Export the database to the multiviewer.
Creating a Background Action From the System List

To create a background action from the System list
1 In the Description/Calibration tab (or in any other tab that shows a filtered System list
with alarms), right-click the alarm you wish to associate with an action.
272
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
2 On the Set action menu, select the appropriate trigger condition:

• On Change
• On Disabled
• On Normal/OK
• On Critical/Error
Note: The trigger conditions on Minor/Warning and on Major are

supported for Gateway alarms only.

3 From the Action list pane, drag one of the available action items to the middle column,
and then set the action item’s properties in the Properties pane.
4 Repeat step 3 as needed.

5 Click OK to close the window, and then click the Save button on the toolbar, to save the
action.
Creating an Action that can be Triggered via a Gateway Command

To create an action that can be triggered via the Gateway
1 Perform step 1 to step 3 from Creating Background Actions, on page 270.
2 From the Action list area of the Tools pane, drag one of the available action items onto
the On Change / Gateway column at the bottom of the Actions pane.
273
Creating Actions
3 Under Properties > General, type a Friendly name for the Action.
Note: The Friendly name is used with the setKFireAction command to

trigger the action. Refer to the Kaleido Remote Control Protocol (Gateway)
User’s Guide for details.
274
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Editing an Action
To edit an action
1 Select an action under the Actions tab, or in the middle pane of the Action Editor
window.
2 Under the Properties pane, modify the action item’s parameters
3 Click Save on the toolbar if you modified the action under the Actions tab, or click OK if
you modified the action in the Action Editor window.
Removing Action Items From an Action

To remove an action item from an action
1 Select an action under the Actions tab, or in the middle pane of the Action Editor
window.
2 Select one or more action items associated with the action.
3 Press the Delete key.
Deleting an Action
To delete an action
1 Select the action you wish to delete under the Actions tab.
2 Click the Delete button on the toolbar.
275
Managing RCP Users
This chapter explains the configuration of the Kaleido-X for use with a Kaleido-RCP2, or
RCP-200 Remote Control Panel.
Summary
XEdit Quick Start Task List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Managing RCP Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Managing Room Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Setting Room Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Setting RCP User Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Checklist
XEdit Quick Start Task List

Follow these steps in XEdit, to set up your RCP Users’ profiles:
1 Create an RCP user. See Managing RCP Users on page 278.
2 Grant room access to the RCP user. See Managing Room Access on page 279.
3 Select the configuration of the external keyboard for this user. See Setting the
Keyboard Language on page 285.
Key Concepts
Kaleido-RCP2
The Kaleido-RCP2 is a multi-function remote control panel designed for use with Miranda's
Kaleido-X software. Ethernet connectivity allows multiple RCP users to access multiple
Kaleido-X systems, allowing convenient access to the real-time operating features of the
Kaleido-X.
The XEdit application is used to manage certain aspects of the Kaleido-RCP2.
RCP-200
The RCP-200 advanced remote control panel for Densité cards, Kaleido multiviewers, and
NVISION/third party routers provides a highly intuitive graphical interface. It simplifies
video/audio signal processing and control in both single and multi-user environments.
The XEdit application is used to manage certain aspects of the RCP-200.
277
Managing RCP Users
Detailed Directions
Detailed Directions
Managing RCP Users
Adding RCP Users

To add an RCP user to the system
1 In the main window, click the RCP users tab.
2 In the Tools pane, right-click anywhere in the RCP users area, and then click New user
on the shortcut menu.
A new user is added to the RCP users list.
Notes
• New users are called UserN, where N = 1, 2, 3 etc.
• RCP users can be renamed. See Changing an RCP User’s Name and
Password on page 287.
• New users are saved automatically; it is not necessary to click the Save
button after adding a user to the system.
Removing RCP Users From the System

To remove an RCP user from the system
2 In the Tools pane, select the user you wish to remove from the system’s RCP users list.
3 Right-click the selection, and then click Delete user on the shortcut menu.
A confirmation window appears.
4 Click Yes.
278
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Note: The user “Admin” cannot be removed.
Managing Room Access
Granting Room Access to RCP Users

To grant RCP users access to a room
2 In the Tools pane, select the appropriate users from the RCP users list.
Note: Use Shift+click or Ctrl+click to select multiple users.
3 Drag the selected users onto the appropriate room in the RCP users tab.
4 Expand the room (if it is not expanded already) to verify that the users were added.
RCP user “User2” has been granted access to Room2
Removing RCP Users From Rooms

To remove RCP users from rooms
1 In the main window, click the RCP users tab, expand the appropriate rooms if needed,
and then select the users you wish to remove.
Note: Use Shift+click or Ctrl+click to select multiple users.
2 On the File menu, click Remove user from room. Alternatively, click the Remove button
on the toolbar, or right-click and then click Remove user from room on the shortcut
menu.
Note: The user “Admin” cannot be removed.
Setting Room Preferences

Room preferences will apply by default for any user who log on to the room from a Kaleido-
RCP2, or RCP-200 control panel. See Setting RCP User Preferences on page 282, to learn
how to configure preferences for a specific user.
279
Managing RCP Users
Setting Room Preferences
To set default preferences for a room

1 In the main window, click the RCP users tab, and then select the appropriate room.
The selected room’s preferences (layout presets, audio monitoring output, mouse
pointer size, and timer) are listed in the Properties pane.
2 Modify the room preferences as needed.
Note: An asterisk (*) will appear beside the room in the main pane, if any of
its properties are modified. The asterisk will disappear when the changes are
saved.
Assigning Room Layouts to the Kaleido-RCP2 Preset buttons

To assign room layouts to the Kaleido-RCP2 preset buttons
1 In the main window, click the RCP users tab, and then select the room for which you
wish to configure layout presets, from the hierarchical list.
2 For each Kaleido-RCP2 preset button, click the corresponding box in the Properties
pane, and then select the appropriate layout from the list.
280
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Assigning an Audio Output to the Remote Control Panel’s AUDIO

MONITORING Button
To assign an audio output to the Remote Control Panel’s AUDIO MONITORING button for
a room
1 In the main window, click the RCP users tab, and then select the room for which you
wish to configure the remote control panel’s AUDIO MONITORING button, from the
rooms hierarchical list.
2 In the Properties pane, click the Audio monitoring output box, and then select the
output used to monitor audio signals, from the list of available outputs.
Enabling the Large Mouse Pointer for a Room

To display a larger pointer on the monitor wall for a room
1 In the main window, click the RCP users tab, and then select the room where you wish
to use a large pointer on the monitor wall.
2 In the Properties pane, select the Use large mouse pointer check box.
281
Managing RCP Users
Setting RCP User Preferences
Assigning a Timer to a Room

To assign a default timer for all RCP users in a room
1 In the main window, click the RCP users tab, and then select the room to be assigned a
timer, from the hierarchical list.
2 In the Properties pane, click the Timer box, and then select the appropriate timer to be
controlled by default from this room.

To modify the preferences for an RCP user
1 In the main window, click the RCP users tab, and then select the user whose
preferences you wish to set, from under the appropriate room, in the hierarchical list.
The selected RCP user’s preferences (layout presets, full screen assignment, audio
monitoring output, external keyboard configuration, and timer) are listed in the
Properties pane.
2 Modify the preferences as needed. See Assigning Room Layouts to a Kaleido-RCP2
User’s Presets on page 283, Assigning a Full Screen Layout to an RCP User, on page 283,
Assigning Audio Output to an RCP User, on page 284, and Setting the Keyboard
Language, on page 285.
Note: User preferences are specific to an RCP user in a specific room. If no

preferences have been specified for an RCP user, then the corresponding
room preferences apply. They appear in gray in the Properties pane.
3 Modify the system-level attributes for this user (user name, description, password) as
needed. See Changing an RCP User’s Name and Password on page 287.
Note: These system-level attributes are specific to a user, independent of

the room to which the user is assigned.
282
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Notes
• The “Admin” user name cannot be modified.
• An asterisk (*) will appear beside the RCP user in the main window if any
of the user properties are modified. The asterisk will disappear when the
changes are saved.
• The message “Cannot find reference” indicates that a full screen layout,
full screen zone, or layout associated with a Room or RCP user has been
deleted.
Assigning Room Layouts to a Kaleido-RCP2 User’s Presets

To assign a room layout to a Kaleido-RCP2 user’s preset button
1 In the main window, click the RCP users tab, and then select the user for whom you
wish to configure the remote control panel’s preset buttons, from under the
appropriate room in the hierarchical list.
2 For each Kaleido-RCP2 preset button, click the corresponding box in the Properties
pane, and then select the appropriate layout from the list.
Note: If no layout is specified for this user preset, the layout that has been
selected for this preset in the room’s preferences will apply. It will appear in
gray in the Preset [n] box. See Setting Room Preferences on page 279.
Assigning a Full Screen Layout to an RCP User

To assign a full screen layout to an RCP user
wish to configure the remote control panel’s FULL SCREEN button, from under the
appropriate room in the rooms hierarchical list.
283
Managing RCP Users
2 In the Properties pane, click the Full screen settings box, and then click the button that
appeared at the end of the box.
Full screen settings button
The Full Screen Settings window appears.

3 In Full Screen Settings, select the appropriate full screen layout, and then click OK.
Note: Before XEdit 2.00, full screen layouts were not associated with a
specific full screen zone. In the case of such legacy layouts, you must also
select the appropriate full screen zone from the Zone list.
Assigning Audio Output to an RCP User

To assign an audio output to an RCP User
wish to configure the remote control panel’s AUDIO MONITORING button, from under
the appropriate room in the rooms hierarchical list.
2 In the Properties pane, click the Audio monitoring output box, and then select the
output used to monitor audio signals by this user in this room, from the list of available
outputs.
284
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Note: If no audio monitoring output is specified for this user, the output
signal that has been selected in the room’s preferences will apply. It will
appear in gray in the Audio monitoring output box. See Setting Room
Preferences on page 279.
Setting the Keyboard Language

To set the input language for an external keyboard connected to the Kaleido-RCP2 or
RCP-200
wish to set the keyboard, from under the appropriate room in the rooms hierarchical
list.
2 In the Properties pane, click the Keyboard box, and then select the keyboard to be
used by this user in this room, from the list of available keyboard configurations.
285
Managing RCP Users
Note: This setting applies to the selected user, in the current room only. A
keyboard configuration must be selected for each user, in every room,
unless the system default is suitable.
Assigning a Timer to an RCP User

To assign a timer to an RCP User
1 In the main window, click the RCP users tab, and then select the user to whom you
wish to assign a timer, from under the appropriate room in the rooms hierarchical list.
2 In the Properties pane, click the Timer box, and then select the appropriate timer to be
controlled by this user in this room, from the list of available timers.
286
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Note: If no timer is specified for this user, the timer that has been selected
in the room’s preferences will apply. It will appear in gray in the Time box.
See Setting Room Preferences on page 279.
Changing an RCP User’s Name and Password

To change an RCP user’s name or password
1 In the main window, click the RCP users tab, and then select the user whose user name
or password you wish to change, from under any of the rooms in the hierarchical list.
Note: A user’s name or password cannot be changed from within the Tools
pane. They can only be changed from within the rooms hierarchical list. The
user can be removed from the room after the name or password change. The
change will be retained. See Granting Room Access to RCP Users on
page 279.
2 In the Properties pane, click the User name box, and then type the new name.
287
Managing RCP Users
Note: The name must be no more than 8 characters in length, and consist
of only letters and numbers (no spaces or special characters).
3 In the Properties pane, click the Password box.
4 Click the button that appeared at the end of the box.

The Password Modification window appears.
288
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
5 In Password Modification, type the new password (only numbers, up to 8 digits) and
then type it again to confirm.
6 Click OK.
289
Routers & Kaleido-X
This chapter describes how Kaleido-X can be configured to control external routers, to act
as a router itself, and to be controlled from an upstream router control panel or software.
Overview
The Kaleido-X, Kaleido-X16, and Kaleido-Modular multiviewers are designed for flexible
integration with a variety of routing devices. A multiviewer can be configured to control, or
to be controlled by a variety of routing devices. The Kaleido-X (7RU) and Kaleido-X16 have
an internal router option, which offers switching of up to 192 unprocessed inputs to 96
HD/SD outputs (16 inputs to 2 outputs, in the case of the Kaleido-X16), for feeding
monitors, test equipment and master control or production switchers. A multiviewer can
also be configured as a router and provide switching of its logical sources to router card
outputs (if available) or monitor wall destinations.
The Kaleido-X software interfaces with most routing devices, via Ethernet or serial
connection, for router control and dynamic text label tracking. The interface allows
dynamic source updates from the router, and quick access to any router sources directly
from the monitor wall user interface. Kaleido-X can also save source assignments to the
layout presets, and reconfigure the router by recalling a layout preset.
For quality control applications, the monitor wall pointer (controlled by a mouse connected
via a Kaleido-RCP2 control panel) can be used to assign a selected source to a monitoring
output bus. This creates a highly intuitive and rapid quality control capability. Miranda has
been working closely with Snell (Pro-Bel) and NVISION (now part of Miranda) to provide a
cost-reduced, multi-image/routing solution, with compelling integration and a direct
download of sources text databases from routers and production switchers to the
multiviewer system.
See Tally Interface Devices on page 337 for more information on configuring supported
production switchers to interact with the Kaleido-X software.
Key Concepts
Term Description
External Router In XEdit’s Equipment library, External Router refers to an upstream router
that will be controlled by the multiviewer. For example, the multiviewer can
request a specific source from the external router to be routed to a specific
video monitor on the monitor wall.
Physical router In XEdit, a physical router is a software representation of router equipment.
Physical routers hold information on how to communicate with the
equipment, as well as the number of physical levels associated with the
router.
291
Routers & Kaleido-X
Key Concepts
Term Description
Physical level Some router equipment can have multiple physical levels, which are subsets
of the physical router’s inputs and outputs.
Protocol The instruction set and parameters used to communicate with and control a
device. The router protocols supported in iControl are also supported by
Kaleido-X, and vice-versa (although there might be a slight lag between the
time the latest software versions are released).
Router Router controller refers to any software or hardware that can request a
controller crosspoint change on a router. The Router Control Software Single Bus and
Matrix View applications (also part of the iRouter Router Control Software
packaged with iControl Application Servers) are examples of router
controllers. They are integrated with the Kaleido-X software, and can be
launched from the Kaleido-X home page.
Logical router A logical router is a software abstraction that permits the control of multiple
physical routers/levels as a single entity. Logical routers have a unique matrix
ID within a router manager.
Logical level A logical level defines the mapping between logical and physical inputs, and
the mapping between the logical and physical outputs.
Matrix ID A unique identifier used by a router controller to identify which router is the
target of a switching command.
KX Router Independent from the routing capabilities obtained by adding KX0-24Router
logical router cards to a Kaleido-X (7RU) multiviewer or by enabling the router output ports
on a Kaleido-X16, any multiviewer can be used as a router in itself.
The logical sources defined in XEdit’s Channels/Sources tab (see page 157)
are considered sources for the KX Router logical router, whose destinations
are either monitors on the monitor wall, or the multiviewer’s own router
outputs (if applicable).a Source IDs to be used for routing purposes are
assigned in XEdit’s Channels/Sources tab. These IDs can be used by external
router control software or devices. The logical destinations for the KX Router
logical router are configured in the Destinations tab.
The KX Router logical router configuration is automatically shared between
multiviewers and iControl systems, and also between multiviewers and
RCP-200 devices with version 1.70 or later.
Router service The Kaleido-X router service is the software component responsible for
communicating with physical routers, and for managing crosspoint change
requests coming from router controllers.
Internal Router The Kaleido-X (7RU) and Kaleido-X16 multiviewers feature built-in routing
which eliminates the need for separate routing in control rooms, and
provides a significant cost saving. Up to 48 unprocessed, baseband outputs
can be provided from any of the 96 HD / SD-SDI inputs to each Kaleido-X
(7RU) processor. In the case of a Kaleido-X16, up to 2 baseband outputs can
be provided from any of the 16 inputs. These outputs can be used to feed
high quality CRT monitors, test equipment such as waveform scopes, as well
as ISO recorders. The outputs can even feed other multiviewers.
292
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Term Description
The router outputs can be controlled from the monitor wall menu, by a
Nevion (Network Electronics) remote control panel via a serial connection, by
a Miranda (NVISION) system controller via a TCP/IP connection, or by a
production switcher’s auxiliary bus controls. The router outputs can be
controlled by external controllers via the following protocols: VikinX
Compact (serial), VikinX Modular (TCP/IP), NVISION (TCP/IP), Snell (Pro-Bel)
(serial, TCP/IP) or manually from the Miranda Router Control Matrix
application available from the Kaleido-X Web page.
The built-in router improves integration, and reduces cabling and equipment
costs. The routing capability eliminates the need for a separate router for the
following applications:
• feeding baseband high quality monitors anywhere in a facility
• feeding test equipment for quality control monitoring
• feeding a secondary multiviewer for output expansion
• feeding an ISO recorder in production studios
Profile A logical view of an NV9000 routing system represented as a single flat
matrix of sources and destinations, regardless of where in the routing system
the actual sources and destination may be.
a. i.e. the 24 BNC outputs on a KXO-24Router card for a Kaleido-X (7RU), or the two RT OUT ports on a
Kaleido-X16. The Kaleido-IP, Kaleido-X (4RU) and KMV-3901/3911 multiviewer models do not have
router outputs.
Router Control Configurations

Multiviewers can be configured for router control in five ways:
1 Kaleido-X (7RU) and Kaleido-X16 multiviewers allow direct control over their own
internal router module.
2 All multiviewers allow direct control over an external router via a serial or TCP/IP
connection.
3 All multiviewers allow control over a series of external routers in a cascade
configuration: the Kaleido-X software sends a router command to one of the routers via
a serial or TCP/IP connection, which then broadcasts it to the other routers in the
293
Routers & Kaleido-X
cascade using an internal communications mechanism (e.g. MIDI). The router

command contains an ID that causes it to be accepted by one router in the cascade,
and ignored by the rest.
4 All multiviewers can be controlled by an external (push-button) control panel, via a
serial or TCP/IP connection. Usually, such a panel is used to control either a simple
external router (case 2, above) connected to the multiviewer, or the internal router
module (case 1, above).
5 All multiviewers can be controlled by an intelligent router controller, via a serial or
TCP/IP connection. The controller can issue commands to the multiviewer internal
router module (if available), or to any external router connected to the multiviewer. The
Kaleido-X software directs the commands to the designated device, and, as needed,
translates the command to the required protocol.
Router Configuration Scenarios
Controlling an External Router
1 An operator chooses an assignment option on the monitor wall menu (e.g. “switch
output 2 of external router A to QC monitor”).
2 The Kaleido-X software interprets the command, and sends it to the designated router
over a serial or TCP/IP connection, using the appropriate router protocol.
3 The router receives the command and executes a crosspoint switch, either changing
the signal on one of its connections to a multiviewer input, or…
4 …sending the signal to another device (e.g. vector scope, QC monitor, ISO recorder).
Note: In the same way, from the monitor wall, it is possible to change
crosspoints on the multiviewer’s internal router (if available), when its
physical levels are configured in the context of the KX Router logical router’s
first level.
294
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Controlling External Routers in a Cascade
1 An operator chooses an assignment option on the monitor wall menu (e.g. “switch
output 23 of external router A, Level 2 to QC monitor”).
2 The Kaleido-X software interprets the command, and sends it to the designated router
over a serial or TCP/IP connection, using the appropriate router protocol.
3 The physical router receives the command, and then relays it to the other physical
routers in the cascade using an internal communications mechanism (e.g. MIDI).
4 When the targeted Level receives the command, it executes a crosspoint switch, either
changing the signal on one of its connections to a multiviewer input, or…
295
Routers & Kaleido-X
Translating Commands from External Router Controllers
1 A system controller—e.g. Miranda (NVISION) NV9000, Snell (Pro-Bel) Aurora, Nevion

(Network Electronics) VikinX—sends a router command to an external router
connected to the multiviewer.
2 The Kaleido-X software detects the command, translates it to the appropriate router
protocol and, then sends it to the designated router over a serial or TCP/IP connection.
3 The router (or “Level” in a cascade) receives the command and executes a crosspoint
switch, either changing the signal on one of its connections to a multiviewer input,
or…
Controlling the Internal Router by Using a Router Control Device or Application
1 An external router control device or application—e.g. Snell (Pro-Bel) Aurora, Nevion

(Network Electronics) VikinX—or an automation system—e.g. Sundance Digital Titan—
sends a command, over a serial or TCP/IP connection, to the multiviewer.
296
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
2 The Kaleido-X software detects the command, and executes a crosspoint switch on its
internal router…
3 …sending the selected signal from the corresponding multiviewer input to another
device (e.g. vector scope, QC monitor, ISO recorder).
Router Protocols
Optional Drivers for Controlling Routing Devices from the Multiviewer

Optional drivers are available to extend your Kaleido-X system with the ability to control
routing devices that comply with the protocols listed in the following table. Contact your
sales representative for details.
Text
database
Company Protocol Routers/Controllers download
Datatek D-2815 Control Module No
Protocol
ETL ETL Matrix ETL Matrix Yes
Evertz Quartz Type 1 EQX Yes
Harris (Leitch) Harris XY Passthrough Platinum, Xplus, Integrator, No
Protocol Via-32, Panacea, Xpress
Lantronix (Lightwave) Matrix-Hub Matrix-Hub 1000 No
Protocol
Miranda Densité HRS-1801 Yes
HCO-1821, HCO-1822 No
Miranda NVISION Ethernet protocol - NV9000 system controllers Yes
(NVISION) Enterprise router
NVISION Ethernet protocol - Compact router series No
Compact router
Nevion (Network Network Compact (serial) VikinX Compact No
Electronics)
Network Modular (Ethernet) VikinX Modular No
PESA USP (Unsolicited Status Cheetah, Tiger, Jaguar, No
Protocol) Cougar, Ocelot, Bobcat,
TDM3000, PERC2000 system
CPU Link Protocol No.1 No
controller
(serial)
Quintech XRM/SRM/MRF/MRM Series SRM 2150 Matrix Switching No
Protocol (serial) Systems
Snell (Pro-Bel) General Switcher Protocol No
(SW-P-02)
General Remote Protocol Halo, Aurora and Sirius Yes
(SW-P-08) Controller (serial control)
297
Routers & Kaleido-X
Router Protocols
Text
database
Company Protocol Routers/Controllers download
Sony Sony HKSPC (GVGNP Sony routers (requires HKSPC No
Emulator) card); GVG routers (Ethernet)
Thomson/Grass GVG 7000 Native Protocola Concerto-series routers, Yes
Valley Encore-series control panels
Thomson/Grass Jupiter ASCII Jupiter VM 3000 system No
Valley (Philips) communications protocol controller, Venus-series and
Trinix-series routers
ES-Switch protocol (serial)b Jupiter VM 3000 system Yes
controller
Utah Scientific PL-160/PL-320 AVS-1B No
RCP-1 SC-1, SC-2, SC-3 series No
RCP-3 SC-4 series (Ethernet only) Yes
a. For Thomson / Grass Valley Series 7000 devices, our current implementation of the Series 7000
Native Protocol supports serial devices, in addition to some Encore system controller models, which
are also supported over Ethernet. For other Series 7000 devices you wish to control via Ethernet, use
Sony HKSPC (GVGNP Emulator).
b.The ES-Switch protocol is only supported with KMV-3901/3911 multiviewers.
Built-in Communications Protocols

The multiviewer itself can be controlled by external devices (e.g. Kaleido-RCP2, router
control panels) or applications (e.g. router control software application, Remote Control
Gateway) via built-in communications protocols. Such devices or applications can be used
to command monitor wall operations (e.g. source assignment) or routing operations.
A router control device or application can control a Kaleido-X (7RU) or Kaleido-X16
multiviewer’s internal router module, or any multiviewer’s logical sources and monitor wall
destinations, via the KX Router logical router. It can also control other logical routers
configured within your multiviewer system. In the case of the KX Router logical router, the
device or application must support the NVISION Ethernet protocol - Compact router protocol.
The supported communications protocols are listed in the following table, with an
indication of the supported connection types (TCP/IP or serial), and the dedicated port
number on the multiviewer, in the case of a TCP/IP protocol.
Company Protocol TCP/IP (port) Serial

Miranda Kaleido Remote Control Protocol Yes (13000) Yes
Miranda (NVISION) NVISION Ethernet protocol - Compact router Yes (5194) No
Nevion (Network Network Compact N.A. Yes
Electronics)
Network Modular Yes (4381) No
Snell (Pro-Bel) SW-P-08 Yes (14000) Yes
SW-P-02 Yes (2000) Yes
298
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Serial Connections
The physical cabling required to connect a multiviewer to an external serial device (such as
a router, production switcher, or router controller) can vary from one device to another. It is
important to check the manufacturer’s documentation to get the proper pinout so it
matches up with the multiviewer.
The RS-422 ports at the back of a Kaleido-X16 multiviewer or at the back of a KXO-Dual or
KXO-Dual3 card (in the case of the Kaleido-X multiviewer models) use an RJ-45 connector.
Miranda provides two adapters, which map the RS-422 signals to the more common DE-9
form factor:
• To connect a serial device whose RS-422 port is wired to the SMPTE slave wiring
specifications, use the straight adapter (Miranda part number 1737-3000-102).
• To connect a serial device whose RS-422 port is wired to the SMPTE master wiring
specifications, use the crossover adapter (Miranda part number 1792-3700-100).
The DE-9S pinouts for these two adapters are as follows:
Straight adapter Crossover adapter

Pin (1737-3000-102) (1792-3700-100)
1 Not connected Not connected
2 RX– TX–
3 TX+ RX+
7 RX+ TX+
8 TX– RX–
Note: Some routers have RS-232 ports, which will require the use of a RS-
232 to RS-422 converter (externally powered ones work best).
Sample Third-Party Serial Pinouts

Example #1: Ross Synergy100 (RS-422)
1 Not connected 4 Ground 7 TX+
2 TX– 5 Ground 8 RX–
3 RX+ 6 Not connected 9 Not connected
299
Routers & Kaleido-X
Q&A
The Miranda 1737-3000-102 (straight) adapter can be connected directly to the Ross
Synergy 100:
RJ-45 DE-9 male DE-9 female

Pinout of each RS-422 Pinout of straight adapter Pinout of RS-422
port’s RJ-45 connector (Miranda part no. 1737-3000-102) connector on SMPTE
on the multiviewer slave device
Standard wiring between multiviewer and devices wired to SMPTE “slave” specification (e.g. most
routers, Ross Synergy switchers, Nevion ETH-CON)
Example #2: Philips VM-3000 (RS-422)

1 Ground 4 Not connected 7 RX+
2 RX– 5 Not connected 8 TX–
3 TX+ 6 Not connected 9 Not connected
The Miranda 1792-3700-100 (crossover) adapter can be connected directly to the Philips
controller:
RJ-45 DE-9 male DE-9 female

Pinout of each RS-422 Pinout of crossover adapter Pinout of RS-422
port’s RJ-45 connector (Miranda part no. 1792-3700-100) connector on SMPTE
on the multiviewer master device
Standard wiring between multiviewer and devices wired to SMPTE “master” specification (e.g. Philips
Jupiter router control system, Miranda Presmaster PCS)
Alternatively, use the Miranda 1737-3000-102 (straight) adapter but with a crossover cable
between the multiviewer and the adapter.
Q&A
Q: Is the internal router used to change inputs to the multiviewer in order to direct
signals to the monitor wall?
A: No, an internal router card is not needed to display video on the monitor wall. The
outputs of the internal router do not feed into the multiviewer’s inputs—they come
from the multiviewer’s inputs via the midplane.
300
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Q: What is the main purpose of having an internal router?

A: The internal router allows you to share the inputs connected to a Kaleido-X or
Kaleido-X16 multiviewer with other equipment (e.g. QA monitors, vectorscopes),
reducing or eliminating the need to have an expensive standalone external router. The
internal router allows you to have one piece of equipment (the multiviewer) that serves
two integrated purposes: displaying video inputs on the monitor wall, and sharing them
with other equipment. For example, instead of having a router in front of the
multiviewer to split feeds between the multiviewer and a vectorscope monitor, you can
use the multiviewer as a router. Your feeds enter at a single point, and one of the outputs
can go to a vectorscope or quality control (QC) monitor, so that instead of a large,
expensive station router in front you can have a smaller one—you don’t lose outputs for
QC.
Q: Is there a matrix GUI available for controlling routers via the multiviewer?
A: Yes. The Kaleido-X software (version 4.00 and later) incorporates the single bus and
matrix view from iControl Router Control Software.
Q: Is the “External Router” item in the Equipment library always used to add a router?
A: Yes. This is done for consistency with iControl. Other types of equipment (production
switchers, controllers, tally boxes) have their own specific entries in the Equipment
library.
Q: Can there be more than one external router?

A: Yes. Every router or router control panel that is connected to a serial port on the
multiviewer corresponds to an External Router in XEdit. Similarly, every router with a
unique IP address connected via TCP/IP to the multiviewer is considered a unique
External Router. If the multiviewer is connected to a series of physical routers in a
cascade configuration, the cascade corresponds to a single External Router in XEdit,
where each router is a Level.
Q: Why was the iControl Router Manager integrated into XEdit version 3.00?
A: Previously, a version of the iControl Router Manager appeared as a separate
application within XEdit. This could lead to some issues, such as two devices being
configured on the same serial port. Since Router Manager is now integrated, XEdit is
more “aware” of the router configuration information, and can prevent such
misconfigurations.
Q: Is router management backward compatible?

A: Yes. Router configurations made in version 2.20 will be preserved when upgrading to
version 3.00 (or later). However, even though this has been tested on a large number of
configurations, it is recommended that the router settings be reviewed before and after
the upgrade in order to ensure that there are no errors.
Q: What is a “Network router”?

A: The phrase “Network router” has the obvious connotation of a router available on a
network. However, in the context of Miranda’s Monitoring and Control applications, it
can also refer to a device now manufactured by Nevion (www.nevion.com)—formerly
Network Electronics Ltd.—such as a VikinX router.
301
Routers & Kaleido-X
Detailed Directions
Q: What are the three different Router Controller items (i.e. Network Compact and the
two Pro-Bel items) in the Equipment library?
A: They are all used for controlling either the multiviewer’s internal router, or any logical
router.4 The only difference is the protocol used to communicate with the multiviewer.
Q: My internal router card shows up in the Routers list in XEdit as “OPTION A (Video
120 × 48)”. Does this mean it has 120 inputs and 48 outputs?
A: No. Each card can route up to 96 inputs to 24 physical outputs, and so has an actual
size of 96 × 24. “120 × 48 “refers to the size of the router card when including other
internal connections that are used for router expansion.
Detailed Directions
Importing Router Configurations from an NV9000 System Controller

XEdit can import router configurations from an NV9000 system controller and share its
KX Router logical router’s configuration with iControl Application Servers and RCP-200
Advanced Remote Control Panels. Refer to the “Component Compatibility” section of the
Kaleido-X Release Notes for related version information.
Although it is possible to partly configure your system by using XEdit in offline mode, you
must work in online mode, to import NV9000 router configurations (see Using XEdit Online,
on page 67).
Note: The current version of the Kaleido-X software does not officially
support aliases. If you wish to include aliases from an NV9000 router
configuration within your multiviewer configuration, please contact
Technical Support (see Contact Us, on page 453).
To import external router configurations from an NV9000 system controller

1 In XEdit’s main window, click the System tab, and then click Router configurations on
2 In the Tools pane, click the Physical routers folder.
3 Click Import NVISION config.

The Import Configuration window appears.
4.Controlling a logical router from an upstream router control device or application is supported since
version 3.00 of the Kaleido-X software.
302
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
4 In Import Configuration, type the host name or IP address of the NV9000 system
controller, click Show only router profiles if appropriate, and then click Get router list.
IMPORTANT
The number of outputs on a physical router may impact
performance, both on the multiviewer and on the NV9000.
If your physical routers have more than a few hundred outputs,
Miranda recommends that you create profiles (see Profile, on
page 293), limited to the necessary outputs for your monitoring
purposes, in NV9000-SE Utilities, and then import those profile
configurations instead of the full router configuration into your
multiviewer system configuration.
All physical levels and profiles known to this NV9000 system controller appear under
Import preview.
The name of every NV9000 physical level or profile is followed with an ID, and
dimensions. For example, in the case of NV32X8_PL1 (ID 6) [32x8] above, the part
303
Routers & Kaleido-X
NV32X8_PL1 is the name of an NV9000 physical level, whose ID (internal to the NV9000
system) is 6, and which has 32 sources and 8 destinations.
Note: You can see these NV9000 physical level names and IDs in NV9000-SE
Utilities PhysLevels table. Refer to the NV9000-SE Utilities User’s Guide, for
more information.
5 Select the router creation mode that best suits your purposes.
• By default, Create several routers with one level per router is selected, which
means that XEdit will create one single-level physical router and one single-level
logical router, for every selected router or profile. This is appropriate from most use
cases.
• If you wish to have only one router with several levels instead, select Create one
router with multiple levels.
6 Select the NV9000 physical levels or profiles you wish to control from your multiviewer,
by clicking the corresponding check boxes.
Example: One router with two levels

will be created.
Example: Three routers will be created.
7 Click OK.
The selected router configurations are imported into your multiviewer system.
• If you selected Create several routers with one level per router, then, once the
import has completed, your multiviewer’s configuration includes new external
routers whose names are based on the NV9000 system controller’s IP address
prefixed with N9000, and followed with the ID of the NV9000 physical level (e.g.,
“N9000 10.5.1.92 6,” where “10.5.1.92” is the controller’s IP address, and “6” is the
NV9000 physical level ID).
304
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
New external routers
NV9000 physical level ID

NV9000 system controller IP address
Prefix
Three external routers were added to the system.
The Routers list includes new physical, and logical routers with the same names.
The new physical routers and associated logical routers have one level for every
router you imported from the NV9000 system controller.
New physical router imported from NV9000

Physical level
New logical router

Logical level
Three physical routers, and three logical routers were added, each with a single level whose
name matches the name of the corresponding NV9000 physical level.
• If you selected Create one router with multiple levels, then, once the import has
completed, your multiviewer’s configuration includes one new external router
whose name is based on the NV9000 system controller’s IP address prefixed with
N9000 (e.g., “N9000 10.6.0.81”).
New external router
NV9000 system controller IP address

Prefix
One external router was added to the system.
305
Routers & Kaleido-X
The Routers list includes one new physical router, and one new logical router with
the same name. The new physical router and associated logical router have one
level for every router you imported from the NV9000 system controller.
New physical router

Physical levels
New logical router

Logical levels
One physical router, and one logical router were added, each with two levels whose names
match the names of the corresponding NV9000 physical levels.
If you intend to import other router configurations from the same NV9000 system
controller, separately, then you must rename the physical router associated with
the configuration you just imported. Otherwise, if you use the Create one router
with multiple levels option again, then any configuration you import next will
replace the current one. See Renaming Physical Routers below.
9 Click the Channels/Sources tab.
10 In the filtered System list, right-click the external router you just imported, and then
click Create logical sources on the menu.
The sources table now includes entries for your router sources.
306
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
11 Sort the sources table as appropriate for your purposes, if you wish, and then define IDs
for the new sources, using the incremental copy tool as needed. You may also want to
set a category.
Source IDs Category
Note: If this router is subject to frequent dimension changes, then you may
want to select Activate automatic sources creation (see step 10). When the
router is reconfigured with larger dimensions in NV9000-SE Utilities, you will
need to import the router configuration from the NV9000 again, but the
appropriate number of sources will be automatically added to the sources
table, at the same time, with their assignments based on the current
template (see Defining Physical Assignments, on page 165). On the other
hand, if the number of sources for this router becomes smaller, then you will
need to delete the unnecessary entries from the sources table manually.
12 On the File menu, click Save, and then click the Destinations tab.
307
Routers & Kaleido-X
13 In the Destinations tab, adjust the number of destinations if you wish, by typing the
desired number in the Size box, and then click Auto map if needed to configure all
KX Router destinations as monitor wall destinations.
14 Click the System tab, and then click Router connections on the second-level tab bar.
15 Specify the appropriate physical connections between your multiviewer inputs and the
external router outputs that feed them. See Router Connections on page 333, for
details.

17 Open the layout you wish to use, and then assign monitor wall destinations to monitors
in your layout, as required. See Assigning Logical Sources or Monitor Wall Destinations
to Monitors on page 209 for details.
You may also assign a logical source to each monitor, if you wish.
18 For every monitor to be used as a monitor wall destination, specify the appropriate text
level, based on the information you wish the UMDs to display. See Configuring
Dynamic UMD Text on page 242, for details.
19 On the File menu, click Save, and then click the LOAD button on the toolbar.
The layout appears on the monitor wall.
Renaming Physical Routers

To rename a physical router
1 In the Routers list, click the physical router you wish to rename.
2 In the Router configuration tab, type the new name in the Router name box, and then
press Enter.
You may rename the associated logical router, for consistency.
308
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Configuring an External Router

The process of creating and configuring an external router (e.g. a third-party router or
router control panel) for use with your Kaleido-X system consists of 4 steps:
• defining the physical router
• adding one or more physical levels
• creating one or more logical routers
• adding one or more logical levels
Step 1 – Defining a Physical Router

To configure an external router
1 Open XEdit and load the database associated with the multiviewer for which you wish
to configure an external router.
2 Drag External Router from the Equipment library onto the root of the System
hierarchical list in the Description/Calibrations pane.
3 Enter a descriptive name to act as a device identifier for the external (physical) router.
A new physical router appears in the System list.
309
Routers & Kaleido-X
4 Click the Interconnects tab, draw a line between the multiviewer and the External
Router icons to establish a connection (i.e. add a connection properties entry to the
database), and then click the line.
Click the line to configure

the connection properties
5 In the Properties tab, choose a connection type from the Connect to list. This can be a
serial connection (on a Kaleido-X each output card has one RS-422 port, a Kaleido-X16
has one or two RS-422 ports), or a network (TCP/IP or UDP/IP) connection.
At this point, there are still no properties associated with the new physical router.
6 Click the Router configurations tab.
Notice that, in the Routers list, under Physical routers, XEdit has added the new
physical router.
310
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Note: A physical router associated with the multiviewer’s own internal

router module is also predefined. In the case of a multiviewer that does not
have any router card, there will be no entries in the Levels list for this
physical router).
7 Select the appropriate protocol in the Router protocol list.
Once you have chosen a protocol, you can click Help to view tips on its use.
Note: The connection type and serial port specified earlier (see step 5), if
any, appear here automatically. These values can be changed, if necessary.
Any changes will also appear under the Properties tab.
• In the case of a serial connection, you can specify serial communication

parameters: the bit rate (bps), the number of data bits, parity, stop bits and flow
control.
311
Routers & Kaleido-X
• If the connection type is TCP/IP or UDP/IP, you must specify the router’s IP address
and port number.
8 Click Use protocol defaults to specify the default parameters for the selected protocol
(this can be useful to begin if you do not have access to your specific router’s
documentation).
At this point, you have created a new physical router.
Step 2 – Adding Physical Levels

There is not always just one connection per router. Sometimes, the connection is to one of
several routers in a cascade configuration. For example, in the case of Nevion (Network
Electronics) VikinX routers, the multiviewer sends commands to one router in the cascade,
which passes it on to the other routers via an internal communications mechanism (MIDI in
this case). Each router in the cascade has an ID. To represent this arrangement in XEdit, the
router connected to the multiviewer is considered the physical router, with all of the routers
in the cascade represented by a physical level.
Even if the multiviewer is connected directly to a router (i.e. no intermediary device), you
still use the mechanism of defining a physical level. The distinction here is that there would
only be one physical level.
To add one or more physical levels
1 In the Router configurations tab, click Add level.
312
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
2 In the Physical Level Configuration window, type a name in the Level name box (e.g.
“Video”).
3 Type the appropriate value in the Level or frame ID box (whether a level ID or a frame ID
is relevant depends on the protocol in use).
Note: This value identifies and must match the ID of the physical router in
a cascade (there is sometimes a jumper on the router that is used to set its
ID, or it may be done by changing a configuration setting using software
that comes with the router). The Kaleido-X software uses this ID to issue a
command via the serial port (e.g. “Change this crosspoint on router ID 2”).
When the command is sent to routers on a MIDI bus, each router will
examine the command, check its ID, and ignore it unless the ID matches its
own.
4 Click Edit.
5 In the Edit Level Size window, type the appropriate number of sources and
destinations for this physical router.
Note: The three option buttons labeled Video, Audio and Other are used
for Nevion (Network Electronics) routers only, for which levels must be
classified as either Video or Audio. These settings are ignored by routers
from other manufacturers.
6 Click OK, and then click OK again in the Physical Level Configuration window.
313
Routers & Kaleido-X
At this point, you have added a level to a physical router, which appears in the Levels
list under the Router configurations tab, and in the Routers list in the Tools pane.
New physical level
For example, if the physical router is a controller talking to a cascade of routers using a
specified protocol, you might have defined one of these, a video router, as Level 0 in the
cascade, with 16 sources and 16 destinations (16 × 16).
7 You can continue to add levels for other routers in the cascade. The screens below, for
example, show how to define a 32 × 32 level for a Nevion (Network Electronics) audio
router.
It is fairly typical to have an audio and a video router connected to the same serial port.
When a crosspoint switch is sent out over the serial port, it addresses both routers, so
that the audio follows the video switch.
Step 3 – Adding Logical Routers

Logical routers add another layer of refinement over the control of a router. In a typical
situation, a very large router (e.g. 1024 × 1024) might be used to control a TV station. The
station manager does not want just anyone to be able to change any source to any
destination, because some of these destinations go straight to air. If someone accidentally
changes a crosspoint on the monitor wall, and the feed goes live, the error could have
314
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
serious consequences. To avoid such problems, it is desirable to give operators access only
to those crosspoints they need, by creating logical routers.
To add a logical router
1 In the Routers list, click the Logical routers folder, and then click Add router under the
Router configurations tab.
A new sub-folder is added to the Logical routers folder. This new folder is automatically
selected, and a third-level tab bar appears under Router configurations, with the
Configuration tab selected.
New logical router
2 Type a name (e.g. “SmallLogicalRouter”) in the Logical router name box. This is the
name that will appear on monitor wall in the Assign [router] input menu. Ignore the
Logical router matrix ID box for now. Type the desired number of sources and
destinations (e.g. 16 × 4).
Updated logical router
315
Routers & Kaleido-X
The subfolder that represents the new logical router is renamed automatically,
reflecting your changes.
IMPORTANT
Once you have configured the logical router, it is important not
to change its name.
Doing so will disable any settings that refer to the existing router
name, including:
• logical source assignments for source or destination label,
• external router connection configurations,
• monitors and background actions associated with the logical
router,
• automatic crosspoint changes on video monitors (router source
property).
If you change the name back to the original, everything should
work as before.
3 Click Add level.

4 In the Logical Level Configuration window, type a Logical level name (e.g. “Video”).
The Logical level ID is not important at this point.
5 The logical level must be associated with a physical router level. Click Add, and then
select the appropriate physical level from the list that appears.
6 Click OK, and then click OK again in the Logical Level Configuration window.
The new logical level appears in the Levels list, and also under the new sub-folder that
represents the logical router in the Routers list.
316
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
New logical level
Next, you must specify the relationship between the logical level destinations (4 in this
example) and the physical destinations (16 in this example).
7 Click the Destination mapping tab.
The Destination mapping table includes rows for each of the logical destinations (4 in
this example), with columns for entering a text label (e.g. “Main Out”, “Preview”, etc.)
and the corresponding physical router destination (this column’s heading corresponds
to the logical router level specified earlier–“[0] Video” in this example).
8 Click in a row in the physical level column.

A menu appears listing all of the available outputs associated with that physical level.
9 Choose a physical output for this logical destination, and then proceed in the same
fashion for the other destinations, or click Auto map to automatically enter physical
outputs, in sequential order, starting from the first one in the list.
317
Routers & Kaleido-X
Auto map button Physical outputs are automatically populated

• If you have already specified a physical output, the sequence starts from that one,
then autofills from there.
• If the one you specified is in a row part way down the table, auto-mapping fills in
the rows below, then continues the sequence starting at the top of the table.
This feature is particularly useful when mapping a large number of destinations.
Note: If you make a mistake, click Clear mapping, and then click Yes in the
confirmation message that appears to delete the entries in the physical
output column of the table. This does not affect the Labels column.
10 To import labels from a CSV file (i.e. a comma-delimited file such as might be exported
from an Excel spreadsheet), click Import labels, navigate to the CSV file that contains
the labels you wish to import, select it, and then click Open.
Note: The file must be formatted as three columns with no heading row.
Column 1 should contain numbers from 1 to N (the number of sources),
column 2 should contain the source labels, and column 3 should contain the
destination labels. Columns are delimited by commas, without spaces.
Sample label file:
1,VTR 1,OUT 1
2,VTR 2,OUT 2
3,CAM 1,OUT 3
4,CAM 2,OUT 4
5,SAT 1,PGM
6,SAT 2,PVW
Alternatively, select the Get labels from physical level check box, to import labels
directly from a router at runtime.
Note: Labels are imported at runtime (i.e. they only appear on the monitor
wall, not in XEdit). This feature applies to the following router protocols only:
• ETL Matrix
• Evertz Quartz Type 1
• HRS-1801
• NVISION Ethernet protocol - Enterprise router
• Snell (Pro-Bel) General Remote Control Protocol (SW-P-08)
• Thomson / Grass Valley GVG 7000 Native Protocol
• Utah Scientific RCP-3 Protocol
The list of supported protocols appears at the bottom of the Source
mapping and Destination mapping tabs.
318
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
As with destinations, the sources of the logical level must be associated with sources on
the physical router.
11 Click the Source mapping tab. The table works in the same way as for destinations,
except that the number of rows is determined by the number of sources specified
when the logical level was created.
Auto mapping example: Specify Input 4 in Row 2, then click Auto map. The auto
mapper starts by putting Input 1 in Row 1, detects the entry in Row 2, so picks up the
sequence by putting Input 5 in Row 3, Input 6 in Row 4, etc.
IMPORTANT
You can have the same physical sources and destinations mapped to
multiple logical routers. The software does not prevent this. In the case of
destinations, care must be taken to avoid conflicts when using auto
mapping.
At this point, you have completed the source and destination mapping for a logical
level (e.g. “[0] Video”). Additional levels can be created. For example, it is often
necessary to switch the audio at the same time as the video. If you have a video router
and an audio router, and you select Video 2 on the former, you probably want the
associated audio to switch as well. To accomplish this, define a new logical level for the
audio.
12 Create a new logical level (e.g. “[1] Audio”), and associate it with a physical router Audio
level.
319
Routers & Kaleido-X
The new level appears under the logical router in the Routers list.
13 Click the Destination mapping tab.

A new column appears, corresponding to the new logical Audio level. The audio
destinations can be mapped to correspond to the video destinations. Use the Auto
map button as needed.
14 Proceed in the same fashion with the source mapping.
320
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
If the audio mapping mirrors the video mapping, then, when a video switch is made
(e.g. from Video 1 to Video 2), the corresponding audio will follow (i.e. the same
command will switch a crosspoint in both the physical video router and the physical
audio router).
Note: Miranda’s Router Control Software includes applications for

controlling routers (single bus and matrix) where you can operate in all
follow mode (change all levels), or in breakaway mode.a When you make a
crosspoint change in a logical router, you can change all of the logical levels,
or just specific ones. When controlling the monitor wall, only the “all
follow” mode is supported. If you need to set up breakaway switches, you
must use other software—e.g. Miranda’s Router Control Software—, or a
router controller—e.g. a device that supports the Snell (Pro-Bel) SW-P-08
protocol.
a. The all follow mode is more typically used. An example of a breakaway would be
switching Video 4 with Audio 5 instead of Audio 4 because Audio 5 is in another
language.
At this point, you have completed the definition of an external router.
Configuring a Router Controller

There are two categories of router controllers that can be used to control the routers
connected to (controlled by) a multiviewer:
• Simple router controllers, such as the Nevion (Network Electronics) VikinX Compact, or
devices that support the Snell (Pro-Bel) SW-P-02 protocol.
• Intelligent router controllers that support the Snell (Pro-Bel) SW-P-08 protocol.
Adding a Simple Router Controller

A VikinX Compact router controller, on any control panel that supports the Snell (Pro-Bel)
SW-P-02 protocol, can issue switching commands to a specific router connected to
(controlled by) the multiviewer, which will act as a protocol translator.
321
Routers & Kaleido-X
Adding a VikinX Compact Router Controller

To add a VikinX Compact (or equivalent) router controller
1 Click and drag Router controller (VikinX Compact) from the Equipment library to the
System hierarchical list.
2 When prompted, type a name, and then click OK.
3 Click the Interconnects tab, draw a line between the multiviewer and the new router
controller, and then click the line.

4 In the Properties tab, click the RS-422 communication port box, and then choose a
multiviewer output from the list.
322
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Note: Simple router controllers can also communicate with Kaleido-X via
TCP/IP. This type of connection is enabled automatically, and allows such
controllers to issue commands to the multiviewer’s internal router module.
5 In the Interconnects tab, click the router controller icon. Under the Properties tab, a list
of settings appears, with default values for the serial communication parameters: the
bit rate (bps), the number of data bits, parity, stop bits and flow control. Select a logical
router (e.g. SmallLogicalRouter) from the Router list.
This is the logical router that will be controlled by the router control panel. When the
multiviewer receives commands over the serial port on the output card selected in
step 4, it will know these are destined for the logical router corresponding to
“SmallLogicalRouter”.
Note: The VikinX Compact protocol allows you to specify one logical router
only (it is a one-to-one controller protocol).
Adding a Snell (Pro-Bel) SW-P-02 Router Controller

To add a control panel that uses the SW-P-02 protocol
• Refer to procedure above but, at step 1, select Router controller (SW-P-02) from the
Equipment library instead of Router controller (VikinX Compact).
Adding an Intelligent Router Controller

An intelligent router controller is one that can issue switching commands to any router
connected to (controlled by) the multiviewer. In order to be able to do this, it must attach a
unique identifier to each command that will allow the Kaleido-X software to direct the
command to the appropriate device. This unique identifier is the “Logical router matrix ID”,
which is similar to the “Level or frame ID” for a physical router, but identifies a logical router.
323
Routers & Kaleido-X
So, for example, if you press a button on the external panel that is set up to make a
crosspoint change on logical router matrix ID 0, the Kaleido-X software will receive this
command, look up matrix ID 0 to find the physical router it is mapped to, and then forward
the crosspoint change to the physical router using the appropriate protocol. In such cases,
the Kaleido-X software acts as a “protocol translator” for the control panel.
To add a Snell (Pro-Bel) SW-P-08 (or equivalent) router controller
1 Click and drag Router controller (SW-P-08) from the Equipment library to the System
hierarchical list.
2 When prompted, type a name for the router controller, and then click OK.
3 Click the Interconnects tab, draw a line between the multiviewer and the new router
controller, and then click the line.

4 In the Properties tab, click the RS-422 communication port box, and then choose a
multiviewer output from the list.
324
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
5 In the Interconnects tab, click the router controller icon. Under the Properties tab, a list
of settings appears, with default values for the serial communication parameters: the
bit rate (bps), the number of data bits, parity, stop bits and flow control.
However, in this case, there is no Router box for specifying which logical router is to be
controlled. This is because the SW-P-08 protocol allows the controller to pass the
identifier for the logical router with a command (i.e. it tells the multiviewer to make a
crosspoint change for logical router X). The ID that it passes is the logical router matrix
ID (refer to Step 3 – Adding Logical Routers, on page 314).
6 Click the Router configurations tab to view (or set) the logical matrix ID.
325
Routers & Kaleido-X
Configuring a Multiviewer’s Internal Router
Notes
• The logical router matrix ID must be manually entered on the Snell (Pro-
Bel) controller—this is usually done via a Web interface, but is sometimes
done over a serial connection. Some controllers allow you to program
individual buttons, or groups of buttons.
• The Snell (Pro-Bel) controller can also use the logical router level IDs (e.g.
[0] Video, [1] Audio) when it sends commands, allowing you to target just
video crosspoints, just audio crosspoints, or both.
IMPORTANT
You must always configure a logical router for a physical external router. There
is no way to control a physical external router directly.

To control your multiviewer’s internal router, it must be configured in the context of the KX
Router logical router.
Configuring the Internal Router in a Kaleido-X16

To configure a Kaleido-X16 multiviewer’s internal router
1 Click the Router configurations tab, and then navigate to the Kaleido-X16-D (Internal
Router) or Kaleido-X16-S (Internal Router) folder under Physical routers, in the
Routers list.
The router protocol, connection type, host name and levels are predefined (and cannot
be modified). Under Kaleido-X16-D (or S) (Internal Router), the physical level ROUTER
326
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
OUTPUTS (Video 16 × 2) or ROUTER OUTPUTS (Video 16 × 1) was automatically

created and configured to the right size.
Notes
• The following ports are always active and can be used for controlling a
Kaleido-X over TCP/IP, via the associated protocols:
• port 14000 (SW-P-08)
• port 2000 (SW-P-02)
• port 4381 (VikinX Modular)
• port 5194 (NVISION Ethernet protocol - Compact router)
• When controlling a multiviewer, by using one of the TCP/IP router
protocols, the router level to be controlled must be configured in XEdit
(see step 6 under Creating a Single Multiviewer System, on page 77). No
other communication configuration is required in XEdit.
2 Navigate to the KX Router folder, under Logical routers, and then click the [0] Video
level.
In a factory-default configuration, the physical level ROUTER OUTPUTS is automatically

included in the KX Router logical level [0] Video.
IMPORTANT
Controlling the multiviewer’s internal router by using any other logical router
than KX Router is not supported. The ROUTER OUTPUT physical level must be
added to the first level (i.e. [0] Video), under KX Router.
3 If the physical level is not included—for example, someone may have removed it from
your configuration—, then you must add it to this logical level. In the Router
configurations tab, click Add.
327
Routers & Kaleido-X
The Select Levels window appears, listing all available physical levels.
4 Select the physical levels you wish to add to KX Router’s first logical level, and then click
OK.
The selected levels appear in the Physical levels list.
5 Click the [1] KX Router (16 × 34) folder under Logical routers in the Routers list.
The third-level tab bar appears under Router configurations, with the Configuration
tab selected.
6 Source and destination mapping is not done automatically. Click the Source mapping
tab, click a cell in the [0] Video logical level column, and then choose an input from the
list.
Sample label file:
1,VTR 1,OUT 1
2,VTR 2,OUT 2
3,CAM 1,OUT 3
4,CAM 2,OUT 4
5,SAT 1,PGM
6,SAT 2,PVW
Auto map works as described in Step 3 – Adding Logical Routers on page 318.
Note: The Get labels from physical level feature is not yet supported for
internal router cards.
KX Router also has a Logical router matrix ID, which can be used by an external router
control device or application to control the internal router modules.
328
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Logical router matrix ID
Configuring the Internal Router in a Kaleido-X (7RU)

To configure a Kaleido-X (7RU) multiviewer’s internal router cards
1 Make sure that the System list reflects your multiviewer’s router card configuration. To
add an internal router card, right-click OPTION A or OPTION B in the System list, and
then click Insert KXO-24Router on the shortcut menu.
A KXO-24Router card fills the selected slot.
2 Click the Router configurations tab, and then navigate to the Kaleido-X (7RU)
(Internal Router) folder under Physical routers, in the Routers list.
The router protocol, connection type, host name and levels are predefined (and cannot
be modified).
329
Routers & Kaleido-X
Notes
• The following ports are always active and can be used for controlling a
Kaleido-X over TCP/IP, via the associated protocols:
• port 14000 (SW-P-08)
• port 2000 (SW-P-02)
• port 4381 (VikinX Modular)
• port 5194 (NVISION Ethernet protocol - Compact router)
• When controlling a multiviewer, by using one of the TCP/IP router
protocols, the router level to be controlled must be configured in XEdit
(see step 6 under Creating a Single Multiviewer System, on page 77). No
other communication configuration is required in XEdit.
3 Click OPTION A (or B) under Kaleido-X (7RU) (Internal Router) in the physical routers
list. Note that the physical levels are automatically created—OPTION A (Video 120 × 48)
and OPTION B (Video 120 × 48)—and configured to the right size.
330
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Note: “120 × 48” refers to the physical router size including internal
connections used for router expansion. The actual size of each router card is
96 × 24. Refer to Configuring Router Card Expansion in the Kaleido-X (7RU)
Hardware Description & Installation Manual, for more information.
4 Navigate to the KX Router folder, under Logical routers, and then click the [0] Video
level.
In a factory-default configuration, the physical levels OPTION A and OPTION B are

automatically included in the KX Router logical level [0] Video. If the physical levels
(OPTION A, or B) for your actual router cards are not included—for example, this would
be the case if you just added a router card to your system configuration—, then you
must add them to this logical level.
IMPORTANT
Controlling the multiviewer’s internal router by using any other logical router
than KX Router is not supported. The physical levels OPTION A and OPTION B
must be added to the first level (i.e. [0] Video), under KX Router.
5 In the Router configurations tab, click Add.
The Select Levels window appears, listing all available physical levels.
331
Routers & Kaleido-X
6 Select the physical levels you wish to add to KX Router’s first logical level, and then click
OK.
The selected levels appear in the Physical levels list.
7 Click the [1] KX Router (96 × 80) folder under Logical routers in the Routers list.
The third-level tab bar appears under Router configurations, with the Configuration
tab selected.
8 Source and destination mapping is not done automatically. Click the Source mapping
tab, click a cell in the [0] Video logical level column, and then choose an input from the
list.
Sample label file:
1,VTR 1,OUT 1
2,VTR 2,OUT 2
3,CAM 1,OUT 3
4,CAM 2,OUT 4
5,SAT 1,PGM
6,SAT 2,PVW
Auto map works as described in Step 3 – Adding Logical Routers on page 318.
It is also useful to have manual control over the source/destination mapping in the
event a router card is removed.
Note: The Get labels from physical level feature is not yet supported for
internal router cards.
KX Router also has a Logical router matrix ID, which can be used by an external router
control device or application to control the internal router modules.
Logical router matrix ID
332
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Note: In the case of a Kaleido-X (7RU), signals entering the input cards are
made available to the internal router cards via the midplane (i.e. there is no
cabling between the BNC outputs on the router cards and the BNC inputs on
the KXI cards).
Configuring the Internal Router in a Kaleido-X (14RU)

Once two Kaleido-X (7RU) systems are in a Kaleido-X (14RU) expansion configuration,
thereby giving you access to any source from either frame in your layouts, their respective
router cards are not automatically shared between the system’s Frame A and Frame B. To be
able to choose a source from one frame and send it to a router output on the other frame,
you must have connected the router cards of one frame to those of the other using special
cables plugged into the expansion ports on the router cards themselves, and then, in XEdit,
you must have specified how the cards are connected. Refer to “Configuring Router Card
Expansion” in the Kaleido-X (7RU) Hardware Description & Installation Manual, for details.
Router Connections
To be able to control an upstream router from the monitor wall, or to control your
multiviewer as a router from an external control panel, you must specify physical
connections between a number of multiviewer inputs and external router outputs that
feed them. This is equivalent to defining the tie lines between two routers: your upstream
router and your multiviewer’s KX Router logical router. When two routers are
interconnected, a tie-line manager module allows sources from the upstream router to be
routed transparently to the selected destinations. For example, when you want to assign a
source from the upstream router to a video monitor on the monitor wall, the Kaleido-X
software uses this information to allocate a tie line (i.e. one of the multiviewer’s physical
input connectors that you reserved for this purpose, and the upstream router’s output it is
connected to), and initiate the appropriate crosspoint change on the upstream router.
333
Routers & Kaleido-X
Router Connections
Assign Source window on the

monitor wall
DVI outputs to monitor wall
INPUTs 1 to 96 entering KXI

cards
OUTPUTs 1 to N exiting router,

some of which are physically
connected to KXI INPUTs
SOURCES (e.g. CAM_1,
SAT_1)entering router
1 An operator right-clicks a monitor and assigns a logical source by using the Assign
Source window.
Note: It is also possible to select a source from the Assign [router] input
menu. However, as of version 5.20 of the Kaleido-X software, Miranda
strongly recommends configuring the KX Router logical router to cover all
routing purposes within the multiviewer system.
2 The Router connections tab in XEdit allows you to map physical connections between
a number of INPUT connectors on the multiviewer and the upstream router’s OUTPUTs
that feed them, which allows the Kaleido-X software to determine the crosspoint
switch needed.
3 The multiviewer sends this command to the external router, over a serial or TCP/IP
connection, using the appropriate protocol.
4 The external router redirects the specified source signal.
5 The new signal follows the physical connection to one of the multiviewer inputs
reserved for this purpose, is processed, and appears on the monitor wall.
334
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
To configure router connections

1 Click the Router connections tab, which lists all multiviewer inputs and, for each, the
associated output connector from a router. For each multiviewer input you wish to
connect to an external router (e.g. INPUT A – Video 01), click the first menu (under
Router) and choose a physical router level (e.g. “MyRouter” – Video).
Maps to BNC The name of Maps to OUTPUT

connectors on the the physical BNC connectors on
multiviewer router the physical router
Note: Unconnected means that this multiviewer input is not connected to a

router output. For example, the input might be directly connected to a
source signal.
2 Click the second menu and choose the appropriate output (e.g. “Output 1 [1]”).
In this example, the Kaleido-X software registers that Output 1 from the router has a
cable that connects to the BNC connector corresponding to Video 1 on the
multiviewer’s INPUT A module. This means that when you select a router source to be
assigned to a monitor on the monitor wall, the Kaleido-X software will be able to
determine whether the multiviewer’s INPUT A – Video 01 connector is available, and, if
so, request the appropriate crosspoint change for “Output 1” of “MyRouter”.
3 Use the incremental copy tool to assign the next router outputs to contiguous
multiviewer inputs.
335
Routers & Kaleido-X
Router Connections
Notes
• Using the incremental copy tool in the Router column only copies the
selected router to the next rows.
• Using the incremental copy tool in the Port column inserts the next output
ports from the selected router in sequence, based on their Destination ID,
until the last output port has been mapped, at which point using the
incremental copy tool further will clear the subsequent cells.
• When using the tool in the Port column, the Router column is populated
accordingly.
• It is possible to select the same output port more than once.
336
Tally Interface Devices
This chapter describes how Kaleido-X can be configured to receive dynamic labels and
status from tally interface devices.
Overview
Miranda’s multiviewer systems support most production switchers and other tally interface
devices such as UMD controllers and automation systems, via serial or network connection.
The multiviewer can dynamically update monitor wall elements to reflect text and status
updates from the device.
337
Key Concepts
Key Concepts
Optional Drivers for Controlling Tally Interface Devices from the
Multiviewer
Optional drivers are available to extend your Kaleido-X system with the ability to control
tally interface devices such as the ones listed in the tables below. Contact your sales
representative for details.
Production Switchers
Company Device/System
Thomson/Grass Valley Kayenne, Kalypso, Zodiak, KayakDD, Kayak SD/HD, DD35, XtenDD
HD/SD series
Ross Synergy series
Snell & Wilcox Kahuna
Sony DVS-9000, MVS-8000, MFS-2000
UMD Controllers
TSL UMD Controller (serial, TCP/IP or UDP/IP)
Thomson/Grass Valley Andromeda UMD Controller
Image Video TSI-1000 Tally System Interface (requires option from Image Video)
Automation Systems
Encoda (Harris) D-Series Playout Automation
Sundance Digital Fastbreak NXT Automation (requires option from Sundance Digital)
Detailed Directions
Configuring Serial Tally Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Ross Video Production Switcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Sony Production Switcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Kahuna Production Switcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Kayak Production Switcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Kayenne Production Switcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Zodiak Production Switcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Serial Port Test Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Configuring Serial Tally Systems

This section covers the configuration of the Kalypso, Andromeda, Serial to TCP/IP
Dispatcher and TSL serial devices, which can be added to a multiviewer system to receive
338
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
and interpret serial tally information from peripheral devices. The illustrations, options or
properties shown below may vary, depending on your actual system.
To configure a Kalypso, Andromeda, Serial to TCP/IP Dispatcher, or TSL serial device
the second-level tab bar. The main pane displays the System hierarchical list, and the
Tools pane displays the equipment library when the root of the System list is selected.
2 Drag the appropriate peripheral device from the equipment library onto the root of the
System hierarchical list. Alternatively, right-click the list root, and then click the
appropriate peripheral device on the shortcut menu.
A window appears, prompting you for a device identifier.
3 Type a name for the peripheral device, and then click OK.
4 Click the Interconnects tab.
5 Click the multiviewer icon and hold the mouse button, while dragging the pointer
towards the peripheral device icon.
A line representing the connection between the multiviewer and the device appears.
Connection between the multiviewer and the device (example using Kalypso, same for all
devices)
6 Click the connection line between the multiviewer and the device.
7 In the Properties pane, select the appropriate element from the RS-422
communication port list.
339
Ross Video Production Switcher
Depending on the multiviewer model, the available RS-422 ports are designated as
follows:
KMV-3901/3911 RS-422
Kaleido-X16 Port 1, and Port 2
Kaleido-X (14RU) Frame A – Output A, B, and C; Frame B – Output A, B, and C
Kaleido-X (7RU) Output A, B, C, and D
Kaleido-X (4RU) Output A, and B
8 Click the peripheral device icon in the Interconnects tab.

9 In the Properties pane, set the serial communications properties for the device.
Serial communications properties (example showing the default properties for a Kalypso device)
The set of properties will vary, depending on the device. Refer to the manufacturer’s
documentation for your specific device as needed.

A multiviewer can receive dynamic source names and tally information from a Ross Video
production switcher (Synergy 2, 3, 4 SD/MD and Vision models). The procedures below
describe how to set up the multiviewer to interface with a Ross Video switcher.
340
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
To set up the Ross Video production switcher

1 Enable the contribution serial tally interface on one of the switcher’s ports, by using the
switcher’s installation menu: from the HOME menu, press More > Setup > Installation
> Comm Setup, and then configure the serial tally device as follows:
Menu Field Value Sub-value

Type Com Port [any REMOTE or
PERIPH port
(depending on
device), or the
EDITOR port (on a
Synergy 100 panel)]
Device Serial Tally
SelectDevice Device Contrib
Comm Setting Baud 38 400-115 200
Parity NONE
Comm Type Type RS-422
Extra Option Option Rate 26
Option Data Txfr Complete
Option Start None
Option At Black All Off
Note: For more information on installing port devices, please refer to your
Ross switcher documentation. The communication parameters listed above
are recommended values. Other values may also work, but remember that
both the switcher and the multiviewer must be configured with the same
values.
2 Physically connect one end of an RJ-45 straight-through cable to the multiviewer’s

RS-422 port.
3 Using the straight DE-9S-to-RJ-45 adapter (part no. 1737-3000-102), connect the other
end of the cable to the enabled serial tally port on the switcher.
Note: Since the protocol is unidirectional, only the transmit pins are
required from the switcher’s remote port. See RS-422 Connection Diagram,
on page 22 for pinouts on the multiviewer.
Required pins Signal

7 TX+
2 TX-
To set up the multiviewer

1 Open XEdit.
341
3 Drag the Kalypso device from the equipment library onto the root of the System
hierarchical list. Alternatively, right-click the list root, and then click Insert Kalypso on
the shortcut menu.
Note: On the multiviewer, Kalypso is the module that receives and

interprets serial tally information from Ross Video production switchers.
4 Type a name for the Kalypso device, and then click OK.
6 Position the pointer over the multiviewer icon, then click and drag towards the Kalypso
device icon.
Connection between the multiviewer and the device
9 In the Interconnects tab, click the Kalypso device icon.
342
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
10 In the Properties pane, set the serial communications properties for the remote port
on the Ross Video switcher as follows:
Baud rate 38 400-115 200

Data bits 8
Parity NONE
Stop bits 1
11 In the Channels/Sources tab, configure logical sources using text sources and system
tallies from the Kalypso serial tally device.
Note: Refer to the table below for a list of valid source IDs and their
meaning in the context of the Kalypso serial tally protocol.
Source IDs Kalypso

1 - 92 Inputs 1 - 92
93 M/E 1 PGM A
94 M/E 1 PGM B
95 M/E 1 PGM C
96 M/E 1 PGM D
97 M/E 1 PVW A
98 M/E 1 PVW 2
99* M/E 2 PGM A
100* M/E 2 PGM B
101* M/E 2 PGM C
102* M/E 2 PGM D
103* M/E 2 PVW A
104* M/E 2 PVW 2
343
Source IDs Kalypso

105* M/E 3 PGM A
106* M/E 3 PGM B
107* M/E 3 PGM C
108* M/E 3 PGM D
109* M/E 3 PVW A
110* M/E 3 PVW 2
111 Pgm-Pst PGM A
112 Pgm-Pst PGM B
113 Pgm-Pst PGM C
114 Pgm-Pst PGM D
115 Pgm-Pst PVW A
116 Pgm-Pst PVW 2
117 Test Signal
118 Black
119 Background 1
120 Background 2
121 Still Store 1
122 Still Store 2
123 Still Store 3
124 Still Store 4
125 Still Store 5
126 Still Store 6
127 Still Store 7
128 Still Store 8
* 2-M/E systems do not have these sources.

12 In the Layouts tab, create layouts and assign logical sources created in step 11 to
monitors that can display text (e.g. UMD) and alarms (e.g. UMD, video, text alarm).

14 On the Configure menu, point to Database, and then click Export to export the
database to your multiviewer.
344
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
15 On the multiviewer, load the layout containing the monitors assigned to dynamic text
and tallies coming from the Ross Video switcher.
You should see source names and tallies from the Ross Video switcher on the monitor
wall.
Sony Production Switcher

A multiviewer can receive dynamic source names and tally information from a Sony
switcher. The procedure below describes how to set up a multiviewer to interface with a
Sony production switcher (DVS-9000 series, MVS-8000 series or MFS-2000 series).
Setting Up a Sony Switcher

To set up a Sony switcher
1 Enable serial tally on one of the switcher’s ports (refer to your Sony Production Switcher
System User’s Guide for details).
Note: There are no serial tally connections on the Sony switcher model
DVS-9000. See DVS-9000 Switchers on page 345 for details.
2 Physically connect one end of an RJ-45 straight cable to the multiviewer’s RS-422 port.
3 Using a DE-9S-to-RJ-45 crossover adapter (Miranda part no. 1792-3700-100), connect
the other end of the cable to the enabled serial tally port on the Sony switcher. See RS-
422 Connection Diagram, on page 22 for pinouts on the multiviewer.
DVS-9000 Switchers
Since there are no serial tally connections on the DVS-9000 switcher, you will need an
additional device—either a Device Control Unit (DCU) or a System Control Unit (SCU)—
between this switcher model and the multiviewer. Use a DCU model MKS-8700 or DCU-
8000, or an SCU model MKS-8010A or MKS-8010B.
Note: MKS-2700: The 1 RU DCU model MKS-2700 does not have a serial
tally connection, so serial tally must come from a MKS-8010A or MKS-8010B
SCU.
• On a DCU (MKS-8700 or DCU-8000), use the connectors labeled Serial Tally 1 and Serial
Tally 2.
Serial Tally 2
Serial Tally 1
Sony Device Control Unit Pack (DCU-8000)
345
Sony Production Switcher
• On an SCU (MKS-8010A or MKS-8010B), use the 15-pin connector labeled EDITOR

PANEL, with an adapter.
EDITOR PANEL
Sony System Control Unit (MKS-8010A)
EDITOR PANEL
Sony System Control Unit (MKS-8010B)
To use a serial tally from an SCU model MKS-8010A or MKS-8010B, a 15-pin-to-9-pin

adapter is required, with pinouts as follows:
MKS-8010A or MKS-8010B SCU Serial tally device

(15-pin) (Signal) (9-pin)
2 RX- 2
3 TX+ 3
10 RX+ 7
11 TX- 8
4 GND 4
No adapter is required for SCU model MKS-8010, which has a DE-9 connector with the
following pinout:
MKS-8010 SCU
(9-pin) (Signal)
2 RX-
3 TX+
7 RX+
8 TX-
4 GND
In addition, on Sony menu page 7367, you must enable R and G serial tallies on the SCU
port.
Note: See RS-422 Connection Diagram, on page 22 for pinouts on the

multiviewer.
346
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Setting Up a Multiviewer to Interface with a Sony Production Switcher

To set up the multiviewer to interface with the Sony production switcher
1 Open XEdit.
3 Drag the Sony production switcher device from the equipment library onto the root of
the System hierarchical list. Alternatively, right-click the list root, and then click Insert
Sony serial tally on the shortcut menu.
4 Type the name of the Sony production switcher, and then click OK.
6 Position the pointer over the multiviewer icon, then click and drag towards the Sony
production switcher icon.
9 In the Interconnects tab, click the Sony production switcher icon.
347
Kahuna Production Switcher
10 In the Properties pane, set the serial

communications properties for the Sony device as
follows:
Baud Rate 38 400

Data Bits 8
Parity ODD
Stop bits 1
11 In the Channels/Sources tab, create logical sources using text and alarms levels
coming from the Sony serial tally device.

and tallies coming from the Sony switcher.
You should see source names and tallies from the Sony switcher on the monitor wall.

A multiviewer can receive dynamic source names and tally information from a Kahuna
production switcher. The procedures below describe how to set up a multiviewer to
interface with a Kahuna switcher.
To set up the Kahuna switcher
348
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual

the other end of the cable to the appropriate RS-422 control port on the Kahuna
switcher. See RS-422 Connection Diagram, on page 22 for pinouts on the multiviewer.
The illustration below shows the location of the RS-422 ports on an 11RU Kahuna
switcher. The RS-422 ports (highlighted) are numbered 1 – 8, from right to left. Refer to
the Kahuna Install Manual for more details on the RS-422 control ports.5
RS-422 ports
(1 – 8)
The Kahuna has DE-9 connectors with the following pinout:

9-pin Signal
2 RX-
3 TX+
7 RX+
8 TX-
4 GND

multiviewer.
3 On the Kahuna switcher’s GUI panel, press the ENG CONFIG button.
The Engineering Config menu appears on the touch screen.
5.The Kahuna Install Manual is available here:

https://kahuna.snellgroup.com/kahunaclub/kahunacare/documents.php
349
4 Touch the Protocols button on the screen to bring up the Engineering Config – Serial
Port Protocols menu.
5 In the list of RS-422 ports, select the one to which you connected the crossover cable.
6 Set the communications parameters for the selected port as follows, using the rotary
controls on the right of the GUI panel:
Protocol Serial Tally

Baud Rate 115 200
Parity NONE
Data Bits 8
Stop bits 1
Port Type Master
7 On the Kahuna switcher’s GUI panel, press the PERIPH button

The Peripherals menu appears.
8 Touch the Tally Control button on the screen to bring up the Peripherals – Tally
Protocol menu.
9 Select the RS-422 port that is connected to the multiviewer, and set its serial protocol
options as follows:
Extension Enable On
Full Table Enable On
Notes
• Refer to the Kahuna User Instruction Manual for further details on setting up
the port protocols and tally protocol parameters (see
https://kahuna.snellgroup.com/kahunaclub/kahunacare/docu
ments.php).
• Although it is possible to define “user configuration” source names on the
Kahuna switcher, these are not transmitted over the serial tally interface.
The switcher only transmits the “engineering configuration” source names.
To set up the multiviewer

1 Open XEdit.
3 Drag the Kahuna production switcher device from the equipment library onto the root
of the System hierarchical list. Alternatively, right-click the list root, and then click Insert
Kahuna on the shortcut menu.
350
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
4 Type a name for the Kahuna production switcher, and then click OK.
6 Position the pointer over the multiviewer icon, then click and drag towards the Kahuna
7 Click the connection line between multiviewer and device.

9 In the Interconnects tab, click the Kahuna production switcher icon.

communications properties for the Kahuna device as
follows:
Baud Rate 115200
Data Bits 8
Parity NONE
Stop bits 1
11 In the Channels/Sources tab, create logical sources

using Text and Alarm elements coming from the
Kahuna’s serial tally information.
351
Note: Refer to the table below for a list of valid source IDs and their
meaning in the context of the Kahuna serial tally protocol.
Source IDs Kahuna

1 - 80 Inputs 1 - 80
81 Store 9
82 Store 10
83 Store 11
84 Store 12
85 Store 13
86 Store 14
87 Store 15
88 Store 16
89 DVE 1 Output 1
90 DVE 1 Output 2
91 DVE 1 Output 3
92 DVE 1 Output 4
93 M/E 1 Output 1
94 M/E 1 Output 2
95 M/E 1 Output 3
96 M/E 1 Output 4
97 Unused
98 Unused
99 M/E 2 Output 1
100 M/E 2 Output 2
101 M/E 2 Output 3
102 M/E 2 Output 4
103 Unused
104 Unused
105 M/E 3 Output 1
106 M/E 3 Output 2
352
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Source IDs Kahuna

107 M/E 3 Output 3
108 M/E 3 Output 4
109 Unused
110 Unused
111 Pgm-Pst Output 1
115 Unused
116 Unused
117 DVE 2 Output 1
118 DVE 2 Output 2
119 DVE 2 Output 3
120 DVE 2 Output 4
121 Store 1
122 Store 2
123 Store 3
124 Store 4
125 Store 5
126 Store 6
127 Store 7
128 Store 8

and tallies coming from the Kahuna switcher.
353
Kayak Production Switcher
You should see source names and tallies from the Kahuna switcher on the monitor wall.

A multiviewer can receive dynamic source names and tally information from Thomson
Grass Valley production switchers that support the ACOS protocol, including the KayakDD,
Kayak HD/SD, DD35, and XtenDD HD/SD series. The procedures below describe how to set
up a multiviewer to interface with these Thomson Grass Valley switchers, for which the
generic name Kayak switcher will be used.
Note: The on-air tally feature was introduced in version 6.9.3 of the ACOS
protocol, which is only available with the Kayak series of Thomson Grass
Valley production switchers. Other features such as retrieving dynamic
source or destination names, and changing crosspoints are available on all
ACOS-enabled production switchers.
Configuring the Kayak Switcher

Once you have established a serial connection between the switcher and your multiviewer,
you will need to enable the ACOS protocol on the switcher’s serial port by using the
Sidepanel software.
To set up the Kayak switcher
the other end of the cable to one of the RS-422 control ports on the Kayak switcher. The
illustration below shows the location of the RS-422 ports on a 4RU Kayak HD switcher.
The RS-422 ports (highlighted) are numbered 1 – 8, from top to bottom. Refer to your
switcher’s Installation and Service Manual for more details.6
6.Manuals and Release Notes for all Grass Valley production switchers are available here:
http://www.grassvalley.com/docs/all_switchers.html#manuals
354
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
The Kayak switcher’s 8 control ports have DE-9 female

connectors with the following pinout:
Pin Signal
1 and 9 Chassis Ground
2 RX-
3 TX+
7 RX+
8 TX-
4 and 6 Signal Ground

multiviewer.
3 Install the Sidepanel software (available on the Kayak Software CD) on a PC or laptop, if
you have not already done so. (Refer to your switcher’s Release Notes for installation
instructions.)
4 Launch the Sidepanel software, and navigate to the Install > E-Box menu.
5 Click the Router tab.
6 Under Automation Control 1, select the appropriate serial port (i.e. the one to which
the multiviewer is connected) and the protocol type (only “acos_vxxx” should be
available).
This completes the configuration required on the switcher. The ACOS protocol is now
enabled on the serial port used for the connection between the switcher and the
multiviewer. The multiviewer system will be able to send commands to the switcher,
and the switcher will respond accordingly.
Configuring the Multiviewer

For your multiviewer to receive tally status, input names and output names from a Kayak
switcher, and to display the switcher’s contribution on the monitor wall as visual tally and
dynamic text information, you need to configure your multiviewer’s Kayak serial tally
service, by performing the following tasks in XEdit:
• set up the communication parameters for the serial connection;
• configure logical sources by assigning input names, output names, and tally status
from the switcher to the logical sources’ text or alarm levels;
• assign alarm and text levels from logical sources to layout elements such as UMDs or
alarm monitors.
Establishing Serial Communication between the Kayak Switcher and the

Multiviewer
To set up the multiviewer’s communication parameters
1 Open XEdit.
355
3 Drag the Kayak production switcher device from the equipment library onto the root
Kayak on the shortcut menu.
4 Type a name for the Kayak production switcher, and then click OK.
6 Position the pointer over the multiviewer icon, then click and drag towards the Kayak

9 In the Interconnects tab, click the Kayak production switcher icon.
356
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual

communications properties for the Kayak device as
follows:
Baud Rate 38400
Data Bits 8
Parity NONE
Stop bits 1
Assigning Kayak Tallies, Input Names, and Output

Names to Logical Sources
To configure your logical sources
• In the Channels/Sources tab, configure logical sources using text sources and system
tallies from the Kayak’s serial interface.
Notes
• Kayak devices provide up to 512 text sources, and up to 256 × 5 system
tally sources.
• The current version of the XtenDD HD/SD switchers software does not
provide tally sources.
• DD35 and the Kayak series switchers only provide RED (On Air) tally
sources. This is a limitation in the current version (6.9.3) of the ACOS
protocol.
• Refer to the table below for a list of valid sources, depending on your
switcher model, and their meaning in the context of the ACOS protocol.
Input
Number DD35 XtenDD HD XtenDD SD KayakDD Kayak SD/HD
0x00 BLACK BLACK BLACK BLACK BLACK
0x01..0x60 Input1...62 Input 1..90 Input 1..90 Input 1..32 Input 1..96
(0x01..0x3E) (0x01..0x5A) (0x01..0x5A) (0x01..0x20) (0x01..0x60)
0x80 VideoStore
357
Input
0x81 Montage
processor 1
0x82 Montage
processor 2
0x85 DVX1 DVX1 DVX1
0x86 DVX2 DVX2 DVX2
0x87 DVX3 DVX3 DVX3
0x88 DVX4 DVX4 DVX4
0x89 RamRec1 RamRec1 RamRec1 RamRec1
0x8A RamRec2 RamRec2 RamRec2 RamRec2
0x8B RamRec3 RamRec3 RamRec3 RamRec3
0x8C RamRec4 RamRec4 RamRec4 RamRec4
0x8D RamRec5
0x8E RamRec6
0x90 ColorBGD1 ColorBGD1 ColorBGD1 ColorBGD1 ColorBGD1
0x91 ColorBGD2 ColorBGD2 ColorBGD2 ColorBGD2
0x92 ColorBGD3 ColorBGD3 ColorBGD3
0x98 ColorBGD ME
0x99 ColorBGDTest
0xA0 PP-Main PP-Main PP-Main PP A PP A
0xA1 ME1-Main ME1-Main ME1-Main M1 A M1 A
0xA2 ME2-Main ME2-Main ME2-Main M2 A
0xA3 ME3-Main ME3-Main ME3-Main M3 A
0xA4 MEhA
0xA8 PP_UTIL_D
0xA9 PP_UTIL_E
0xAA ME1_UTIL_D
0xAB ME1_UTIL_E
0xAC ME2_UTIL_D
0xAD ME2_UTIL_E
0xAE ME3_UTIL_D
0xAF ME3_UTIL_E
0xB0 PP-PVW PP-PVW PP-PVW PPp1 PPp1
0xB1 ME1-PVW ME1-PVW ME1-PVW M1p1 M1p1
358
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Input
0xB4 Mhp1
0xB8 VideoStore1 VideoStore1
0xB9 VideoStore2 VideoStore2
0xBA VideoStore3 VideoStore3
0xBB VideoStore4 VideoStore4
0xBC VideoStore5 VideoStore5
0xBD VideoStore6 VideoStore6
0xC0 PP C
0xC1 Layer ME1 PP D
0xC2 Layer ME2 M1 C
0xC3 Layer ME3 M1 D
0xC4 M2 C
0xC5 M2 D
0xC6 M3 C
0xC7 M3 D
0xC8 PPKey PPKey
0xC9 ME1Key ME1Key
0xCA ME2Key ME2Key
0xCB ME3Key ME3Key
0xD0 PP Clean PP Clean PP Clean PP B (PP PP B
Clean)
0xD1 ME1 Clean ME1 Clean ME1 Clean M1 B (ME1 M1 B
Clean)
0xD2 ME2 Clean ME2 Clean ME2 Clean M2 B
0xD3 ME3 Clean ME3 Clean ME3 Clean M3 B
0xD4 PP UtilA PP UtilA PPp2 (PP MEh B
Clean
Preview)
0xD5 PP UtilB PP UtilB
0xD6 PP UtilC PP UtilC
0xD7 ME1 UtilA ME2 UtilA M1p2 (ME1
Clean
Preview)
0xD8 ME1 UtilB ME1 UtilB PPp2
0xD9 ME1 UtilC ME1 UtilC M1p2
359
Kayenne Production Switcher
Input
0xDA ME2 UtilA ME2 UtilA M2p2
0xDB ME2 UtilB ME2 UtilB M3p2
0xDC ME2 UtilC ME2 UtilC Mhp2
0xDD ME3 UtilA ME3 UtilA
0xDE ME3 UtilB ME3 UtilB
0xDF ME3 UtilC ME3 UtilC
0xE0..0xEF Virtual Input Virtual Input Virtual Input Virtual Input Virtual Input
00...15 00...15 00...15 00...15 00...15
0xF0 WHITE WHITE WHITE WHITE WHITE
Configuring Layout Elements

To configure layout elements
1 In the Layouts tab, create layouts and assign the logical sources you configured (see
“Assigning Kayak Tallies, Input Names, and Output Names to Logical Sources” above) to
monitors that can display text (e.g. UMD) or alarms (e.g. UMD, video, text alarm status).
2 Depending on your purposes, assign the appropriate text or alarm levels to specific
components within the monitors (e.g. assign an alarm level to a tally component in an
UMD, or a text level to the UMD text component).

On the monitor wall, you can now load the layout containing the monitors that were
assigned dynamic text and tallies provided by the Kayak switcher. Input and output names,
as well as tally status from the Kayak switcher will be visible on the wall. Any changes made
by the switcher’s operator will be immediately reflected.

A multiviewer can receive dynamic source names and tally information from a Grass Valley
Kayenne Video Production Center. The procedures below describe how to set up a
multiviewer to interface with this family of production switchers.
360
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Configuring the Kayenne Switcher

To establish a serial connection between the switcher and your multiviewer, you need to
identify the serial port you wish to use for tally contribution in the switcher’s Engineering
Setups, by using the Kayenne touch screen menu panel or the Kayenne Menu application.
To set up the Kayenne switcher
the other end of the cable to one of the 8 RS-422 control ports on the Kayenne Video
Processor Frame. The illustration below shows the location of the RS-422 ports on a
4RU Kayenne frame. The RS-422 ports (highlighted) are numbered 1 – 8, from top to
bottom.
The 8 RS-422 control ports at the back of a Kayenne Video

Processor frame have DE-9 female connectors. When any of
them is designated as the tally contribution port, it is
automatically configured with the following pinout:
Pin Signal
1 and 9 Chassis Ground
2 RX-
3 TX+
7 RX+
8 TX-
4 and 6 Signal Ground

multiviewer’s side.
3 On the Kayenne touch screen menu panel, touch the Eng Setup menu button, the
Ports & Devices category button, and then the Serial Tally Ports tab.
The Serial Tally Ports menu appears.
361
4 In the port selection area, touch the port you wish to use as the tally contribution port.
5 In the Baud Rate / Parity area, touch 115.2k, and None.
This sets the baud rate to 115,200 and the parity to None.
Assuming the required sources and outputs have been defined, this completes the
configuration required on the switcher. The multiviewer system will be able to send
commands to the switcher, and the switcher will respond accordingly. Refer to the Kayenne
Installation and Service Manual for more details.7

For your multiviewer to receive tally status, source names and output names from a
Kayenne switcher, and to display the switcher’s contribution on the monitor wall as visual
tally and dynamic text information, you need to configure your multiviewer’s Kayenne
serial tally service, by performing the following tasks in XEdit:
from the switcher to the logical sources’ text or alarm levels;
alarm monitors.
Establishing Serial Communication Between the Kayenne Switcher and the

Multiviewer
1 Open XEdit.
3 Drag the Kayenne production switcher device from the equipment library onto the
root of the System hierarchical list. Alternatively, right-click the list root, and then click
Insert Kayenne on the shortcut menu.
4 Type a name for the Kayenne production switcher, and then click OK.
6 Position the pointer over the multiviewer icon, then click and drag towards the
Kayenne production switcher icon.
362
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual

8 In the Properties pane, select the appropriate serial port from the RS-422
9 In the Interconnects tab, click the Kayenne production switcher icon.

communications properties for the Kayenne device
as follows:
Baud Rate 115200
Data Bits 8
Parity NONE
Stop bits 1
11 Set the appropriate output numbers to use for tally

calculation, based on your switcher’s configuration.
The current version of the Kaleido-X software supports monitoring of up to 6 tallies
from a Kayenne Video Processor Frame. By default, in XEdit, Tally 1 corresponds to the
Kayenne’s output 1 (which typically carries the Program signal), and Tally 2 corresponds
to the Kayenne’s output 5 (typically the Preview signal). The following table lists the
default output assignments on a Kayenne Video Processor Frame. Refer to the Kayenne
ME A ME B ME C ME D
Output # Signal Output # Signal Output # Signal Output # Signal
1 Pgm A 13 ME1 A 25 ME2 A 37 ME3 A
2 Pgm B 14 ME1 B 26 ME2 B 38 ME3 B
363
ME A ME B ME C ME D
Output # Signal Output # Signal Output # Signal Output # Signal
3 Pgm C 15 ME1 C 27 ME2 C 39 ME3 C
4 Pgm D 16 ME1 D 28 ME2 D 40 ME3 D
5 Pgm pA 17 ME1 pA 29 ME2 pA 41 ME3 pA
6 Pgm p2 18 ME1 p2 30 ME2 p2 42 ME3 p2
7 Aux 1 19 Aux 4 31 Aux 8 43 Aux 14
8 Aux 1 20 Aux 4 32 Aux 9 44 Aux 15
9 Aux 2 21 Aux 5 33 Aux 10 45 Aux 16
10 Aux 2 22 Aux 6 34 Aux 11 46 Aux 17
11 Aux 3 23 Aux 7 35 Aux 12 47 Aux 18
12 Aux 3 24 Sw Pvw 36 Aux 13 48 Aux 19
Assigning Kayenne Tallies, Input Names, and Output Names to Logical Sources
The Kayenne contribution tally protocol provides information on up to 96 external sources,
up to 4 eDPM video/key pairs, up to 6 image store outputs, up to 48 programmable
switcher outputs, up to 2 complete operator suites with the associated alternative source
names, and a few more signals from the Kayenne Video Processor Frame. In XEdit’s
Channels/Sources tab, configure logical sources using text sources and system tallies from
the Kayenne’s serial interface. You will find these elements by expanding the filtered system
list that appears in the Tools pane.
1 In the Channels/Sources tab, add the required number of text and alarm levels for your
purposes (see Creating and Configuring Logical Sources, on page 157).
You may, for example, add one text level to monitor source labels from the Kayenne
switcher, and two alarm levels to monitor Program and Preview tallies.
2 Click a cell that corresponds to the appropriate text level of a logical source.
364
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Kayenne elements available from the filtered system tree, for assignment to text levels in the
Sources table
In the case of the Kayenne Output 1 to Output 48, from which elements can be
assigned to text levels in your multiviewer’s logical sources, the Kaleido-X software
supports 4 display modes for the labels:
Level 1 The label represents the initial background feed.

Level 2 The label represents the initial and the previous
background feed
Level 3 The label represents the previous background feed
Level 4 The label represents the current background feed
(not yet supported)
All other Kayenne signals represented in the filtered System list, are associated with a
single Input label.
4 If your logical sources include more text levels to be associated with the Kayenne
switcher, then repeat step 2 – step 3 for the current logical source’s remaining text
levels.
5 Click a cell that corresponds to the appropriate alarm level of the current logical source.
6 In the filtered System list, navigate to the tally element you wish to monitor, and drag it
365
Kayenne elements available from the filtered system tree, for assignment to alarm levels in the
Sources table
Note: In the case of a Kayenne system involving ISO recorders controlled

via GPI, when a GPI command is used to take a recorder off air, related tallies
may not be updated on the multiviewer side. In addition, the following
Kayenne features are not supported:
• Pgm-Pst Look Ahead Preview (LAP) tallies (“Next On Air”)
• Bus tallies
• Tracing of upstream tally tributaries
7 If your logical sources include more alarm levels to be associated with the Kayenne
switcher, then repeat step 5 – step 6 for the current logical source’s remaining alarm
levels.
Text level based on dynamic Alarm levels based on tallies
labels from Kayenne sources from the Kayenne device


You can now assign the logical sources you previously configured (see “Assigning Kayenne
Tallies, Input Names, and Output Names to Logical Sources” above) to monitors that can
display text (e.g. UMD) or alarms (e.g. UMD, video, text alarm status) in a layout. Depending
on your purposes, you will assign the appropriate text or alarm levels to specific
components within the monitors (e.g. assign an alarm level to tally components in an UMD,
or a text level to the UMD text component).
366
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
To configure layout elements for dynamic text and tally reporting

2 In the Tools pane, select one of the logical sources you previously configured (see
“Assigning Kayenne Tallies, Input Names, and Output Names to Logical Sources” above)
from the filtered Channels/Sources list, and then drag it onto the appropriate monitor.
3 Repeat step 2 until you have assigned all the sources you wish to monitor to the
appropriate monitors in your layout.
4 Click the first UMD whose dynamic text and tally reporting behavior you with to set,
after unlocking the composite monitor that contains it if applicable (see Unlocking a
Composite Monitor, on page 260).
5 In the Properties pane, click the Left tally source level box, and then select the alarm
level you wish to monitor.
Alarm level selection for the left tally in a UMD
6 Click the Right tally source level box, and then select the appropriate alarm level, if
applicable.
7 Click the Text label level box, and then select the text level you wish to monitor.
367
Zodiak Production Switcher
Text level selection for the text label in a UMD

text and tally status when this layout is loaded on the monitor wall.
11 If you are working in offline mode, then you must export the database to your
multiviewer: on the Configure menu, point to Database, and then click Export.
assigned dynamic text and tallies provided by the Kayenne switcher. Input or output
names, as well as tally status from the Kayenne switcher will be visible on the monitor wall.
Any changes made by the switcher’s operator will be immediately reflected on the monitor
wall.

A multiviewer can receive dynamic source names and tally information from a Grass Valley
Zodiak Digital Production Switcher. The procedures below describe how to set up a
multiviewer to interface with this family of production switchers.
Configuring the Zodiak Switcher

To establish a serial connection between the switcher and your multiviewer, you need to
identify the serial port you wish to use for tally contribution in the switcher’s Engineering
Setups, by using the Zodiak touch screen menu panel or the Zodiak Menu application. You
also need to configure or take note of the communications settings and use the same
values on the multiviewer’s side. The procedure below is an example using the default
values typically used on Grass Valley production switchers.
To set up the Zodiak switcher
368
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual

the other end of the cable to one of the 4 RS-422 control ports on the Zodiak Video
Processor Frame. The illustration below shows the location of the RS-422 ports on a
Zodiak frame. The RS-422 ports (highlighted) are labeled Serial 1 – 4 (J4 – J7).
The 4 RS-422 control ports at the back of a Zodiak Video Processor frame have DE-9
female connectors with the following pinout:
Pin Signal
1, 4, 6, and 9 Chassis ground
2 RX-
3 TX+
7 RX+
8 TX-

multiviewer’s side.
3 From the Zodiak Home menu, touch the Eng Setup menu button, and then the Ports &
Devices category button.
The Physical Serial Port Assignment menu appears.
4 In the port selection area, touch the port you wish to use as the tally contribution port.
5 In the Baud Rate area, touch 38.4k.
6 In the Parity area, touch None.
This sets the baud rate to 38,400 and the parity to None.
Assuming the required sources and outputs have been defined, this completes the
configuration required on the switcher. The multiviewer system will be able to send
commands to the switcher, and the switcher will respond accordingly. Refer to the Zodiak
369

For your multiviewer to receive tally status, source names and output names from a Zodiak
switcher, and to display the switcher’s contribution on the monitor wall as visual tally and
dynamic text information, you need to configure your multiviewer’s Zodiak serial tally
service, by performing the following in XEdit:
from the switcher to the appropriate logical sources’ text and alarm levels;
alarm monitors.
Establishing Serial Communication Between the Zodiak Switcher and the

Multiviewer
1 Open XEdit.
3 Drag the Zodiak production switcher device from the equipment library onto the root
Zodiak on the shortcut menu.
4 Type a name for the Zodiak production switcher, and then click OK.
6 Position the pointer over the multiviewer icon, then click and drag towards the Zodiak

8 In the Properties pane, select the appropriate serial port from the RS-422
370
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
9 In the Interconnects tab, click the Zodiak production switcher icon.

In the Properties pane, the serial communications
properties for the Zodiak device are the following,
by default:
Baud Rate 38400
Data Bits 8
Parity NONE
Stop bits 1
10 Set these properties to match the values used on

the switcher.
11 Select the appropriate outputs to use for the Preview Out and Program Out tally
calculation, based on your switcher’s configuration.
The current version of the Kaleido-X software supports monitoring of one Preview
output and one Program output from any of the Zodiak switcher’s physical or internal
M/E units (Pgm-Pst PVW A, and B; M/E 1 PVW, M/E 2 PVW, M/E 3 PVW; Pgm-Pst PGM A,
and B; M/E 1 PGM, M/E 2 PGM, M/E 3 PGM), from up to 13 Aux bus outputs, or from the
additional switched preview output.
Assigning Zodiak Tallies, Input Names, and Output Names to Logical Sources
The Zodiak contribution tally protocol provides information on up to 128 external sources,
up to 13 Aux bus outputs, and the switched preview output from the Zodiak Video
Processor Frame, in addition to the Preview and Program outputs you selected (see step 11,
on page 371, under Establishing Serial Communication Between the Zodiak Switcher and
371
the Multiviewer). In XEdit’s Channels/Sources tab, configure logical sources using text
sources and system tallies from the Zodiak’s serial interface. You will find these elements by
expanding the filtered system list that appears in the Tools pane.
1 In the Channels/Sources tab, add the required number of text and alarm levels for your
purposes (see Creating and Configuring Logical Sources, on page 157).
You may, for example, add one text level to monitor source labels from the Zodiak
switcher, and two alarm levels to monitor Program and Preview tallies.
2 Click a cell that corresponds to the appropriate text level of a logical source.
Zodiak elements available from the filtered system tree, for assignment to text levels in the
Sources table
In the case of the Zodiak outputs (the Preview and Program Outputs you selected, Aux
Output 1 to Aux Output 13, and the Switched Preview Output), from which elements
can be assigned to text levels in your multiviewer’s logical sources, the Kaleido-X
software supports 4 display modes for the labels:
Level 1 The label represents the initial background feed.

Level 2 The label represents the initial and the previous
background feed
Level 3 The label represents the previous background feed
Level 4 The label represents the current background feed
(not yet supported)
The Zodiak external sources represented in the filtered System list (Input 1 to Input
128), are associated with a single Input label.
372
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
4 If your logical sources include more text levels to be associated with the Zodiak
switcher, then repeat step 2 – step 3 for the current logical source’s remaining text
levels.
5 Click a cell that corresponds to the appropriate alarm level of the current logical source.
6 In the filtered System list, navigate to the tally element you wish to monitor, and drag it
7 If your logical sources include more alarm levels to be associated with the Zodiak
switcher, then repeat step 5 – step 6 for the current logical source’s remaining alarm
levels.
Text level based on dynamic Alarm levels based on tallies
labels from Zodiak sources from the Zodiak device


You can now assign the logical sources you previously configured to monitors that can
display text (e.g. UMD) or alarms (e.g. UMD, video, text alarm status) in a layout. Depending
on your purposes, you will assign the appropriate text or alarm levels to specific
components within the monitors (e.g. assign an alarm level to tally components in an UMD,
or a text level to the UMD text component).
To configure layout elements for dynamic text and tally reporting
373
2 In the Tools pane, select one of the logical sources you previously configured (see
“Assigning Zodiak Tallies, Input Names, and Output Names to Logical Sources” above)
from the filtered Channels/Sources list, and then drag it onto the appropriate monitor.
3 Repeat step 2 until you have assigned all the sources you wish to monitor to the
appropriate monitors in your layout.
4 Click the first UMD whose dynamic text and tally reporting behavior you with to set,
after unlocking the composite monitor that contains it if applicable (see Unlocking a
Composite Monitor, on page 260).
5 In the Properties pane, click the Left tally source level box, and then select the alarm
level you wish to monitor.
Alarm level selection for the left tally in a UMD
6 Click the Right tally source level box, and then select the appropriate alarm level, if
applicable.
7 Click the Text label level box, and then select the text level you wish to monitor.
374
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Text level selection for the text label in a UMD

text and tally status when this layout is loaded on the monitor wall.
11 If you are working in offline mode, then you must export the database to your
multiviewer: on the Configure menu, point to Database, and then click Export.
assigned dynamic text and tallies provided by the Zodiak switcher. Input or output names,
as well as tally status from the Zodiak switcher will be visible on the monitor wall. Any
changes made by the switcher’s operator will be immediately reflected on the monitor wall.
Serial Port Test Agent

During a setup, it is sometime not clear if the wiring between the multiviewer and a
peripheral device is correct or if the peripheral device sends the expected data. One can
connect a serial-port test agent as a peripheral device in XEdit, export the database to the
multiviewer, and then read, on a Web page, the data received on the serial port.
To use a serial port test agent
1 Select the Serial port test device in the equipment library and drag it onto the root of
the System hierarchical list. Alternatively, right-click the list root, and then click Insert
Serial port test on the shortcut menu.
2 Click the Interconnects tab in the main window.
3 To connect the test device to the multiviewer, click the multiviewer’s icon, or the
device’s, and drag the pointer towards the other.
4 Click the test device’s icon, and adjust the port settings to match those of the actual
peripheral device you wish to test.
5 Click the connection line between the device and the multiviewer.
375
When connected, the serial-port test agent will log all data received from the serial port
to a file that you can read using a Web browser.
Once the database is exported to the multiviewer, the serial-port test agent starts. The
agent opens the serial port and start writing to a log file the data that is received on the
port. To access the log file, point your browser to http://[IP
address]/logs/comm.log.
Note: The part [IP address] represents the IP address of the output card
(or of the multiviewer itself, depending on the model) where the test agent
is connected. You can find the IP address on XAdmin’s System Configuration
page (see Configuring a Multiviewer’s IP Settings, on page 395).
Kaleido Remote Control Protocol
This chapter explains where to obtain information on how the Kaleido-X system can
execute commands received via a Gateway, allowing third-party developers and individual
users remote access to some Kaleido functions.
Overview
The Kaleido-X system can execute commands received through a Gateway, allowing third-
party developers and individual users remote access to some Kaleido functions. For more
information, refer to the Kaleido Remote Control Protocol (Gateway) User’s Guide (Ref. #
M770-0900-XXX), available on the DVD that shipped with your system, and from Miranda’s
support portal.
Note: The term Kaleido is used to describe features common to the Kaleido
family. Features exclusive to any one of these products are described using
the full product name, e.g. Kaleido-X.
377
Using the Serial to TCP/IP Dispatcher
Overview
The Serial-to-TCP Dispatcher is a piece of software designed to run on a separate PC or
embedded into a product (such as the Kaleido-X) and act as a bridge between a serial
device and the TCP/IP network.
Note: For more information, refer to the Serial-to-TCP Dispatcher Protocol

guide (Ref. # M819-0300-XXX), available on the DVD that shipped with your
system.
379
Administration and Servicing
This chapter explains how to configure the Kaleido-X network communications, and how to
enable hardware and software options. It also describes where to find system status and
version information, for troubleshooting or servicing purposes.
Key Concepts
Term Description
Kaleido-RCP2 The Kaleido-RCP2 is a multi-function remote control panel designed for
use with Miranda's Kaleido-X series multiviewer models. Ethernet
connectivity allows multiple RCP users to access multiple Kaleido-X
systems, allowing convenient access to real-time operating features.
RCP-200 The RCP-200 advanced remote control panel for Densité cards, Kaleido
multiviewers, and NVISION/third party routers provides a highly intuitive
graphical interface. It simplifies video/audio signal processing and
control in both single and multi-user environments.
Audio Bridge The Audio Bridge Terminal (ABT) is an external audio
Terminal multiplexer/serializer for the Kaleido-X series multiviewer models.
XEdit XEdit is a Java Web Start client used to create layouts for the monitor
wall, and to configure the multiviewer, from your PC or laptop.
XAdmin XAdmin is a Web client that your system administrator uses to manage
the multiviewer system.
System snapshot The Kaleido-X system generates data to keep track of certain events. This
data is stored as log files that can be extracted from the system as a
compressed ZIP archive created when requested by the user for specific
purposes (e.g. troubleshooting). This ZIP archive is called a system
snapshot.
System status A system status refers to a live summary from within XAdmin. This
summary is based on the health status of each module in your
multiviewer system (see Viewing a Multiviewer’s Status Information, on
page 433).
Version Each software, firmware, and hardware release for the various elements
that constitute your Kaleido-X system (e.g. XEdit, XAdmin, etc.) is
associated with a version number (see Viewing Kaleido-X Version
Information, on page 435).
381
Default IP Settings
Default IP Settings
Multiviewers are shipped with the following IP settings.
Kaleido-IP default IP settings
Kaleido-IP-6 Kaleido-IP-4 Kaleido-IP-2
Management IP address (LAN1) 10.0.3.70 10.0.3.70 10.0.3.70
Network mask 255.255.0.0 255.255.0.0 255.255.0.0
Default gateway 10.0.0.1 10.0.0.1 10.0.0.1
Data port 1 IP address (LAN2) 172.30.3.70 172.30.3.70 172.30.3.70
Network mask 255.255.0.0 255.255.0.0 255.255.0.0
Data port 2 IP address (LAN3) 172.30.3.71 172.30.3.71 —
Network mask 255.255.0.0 255.255.0.0
Data port 3 IP address (LAN4) 172.30.3.72 172.30.3.72 —
Network mask 255.255.0.0 255.255.0.0
Data port 4 IP address (LAN5) 172.30.3.73 —
Network mask 255.255.0.0 255.255.0.0
Data port 5 IP address (LAN6) 172.30.3.74 —
Network mask 255.255.0.0 255.255.0.0
Kaleido-MX, Kaleido-Modular-X default IP settings

Dual Quad
System IP address 192.168.3.31 192.168.3.30
Network mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
Gateway 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
Output A IP address 192.168.3.31 192.168.3.31
Output B IP address — 192.168.3.32
Densité CPU-ETH2 controller default IP settings

IP address 1 192.168.3.1
Network mask 255.255.255.0
Gateway 0.0.0.0
IP address 2 0.0.0.0
Gateway 0.0.0.0
382
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
KMV-3901/3911 default IP settings

System IP address 192.168.3.31
Gateway 192.168.3.1
Kaleido-X16 default IP settings

System IP address 10.0.3.70
Gateway 10.0.0.1
Kaleido-X default IP settings

14RU
4RU 7RU (expansion)
System IP address 10.0.3.70 10.0.3.70 10.0.3.70
Network mask 255.255.0.0 255.255.0.0 255.255.0.0
Gateway 10.0.0.1 10.0.0.1 10.0.0.1
Output A 10.0.3.69 10.0.3.66 10.0.3.66
Output B 10.0.3.68 10.0.3.67 10.0.3.67
Output C — 10.0.3.68 10.0.3.68
Output D/EXP — 10.0.3.69 —
Output A (frame B) — — 10.0.3.61
Output B (frame B) — — 10.0.3.62
Output C (frame B) — — 10.0.3.63
Note: If the IP address of the multiviewer has been changed (i.e. it no

longer corresponds to the as-shipped configuration), it is still possible to
determine the current setting. To determine the IP address of your
multiviewer, see Finding a Multiviewer’s System IP Address and Application
Version, on page 400.
Hardware and Software Options

You can purchase various software and hardware options to expand your multiviewer’s
capabilities. The following tables list options that can be enabled and disabled via the
XAdmin Status and Options page (see Enabling Options, on page 411).
383
Note: The Kaleido-IP currently supports extraction of CC/subtitling and

XDS data (1 license/program), and display rotation. It is not yet possible to
enable or verify these options in XAdmin’s Status and Options page, for this
multiviewer model. Contact Technical Support for activation and
configuration instructions (see Contact Us, on page 453).
Kaleido-MX input options

Option Part No. Feature
3G KMX-IN-8-OPT-3GBPS 3 Gbps signal format license (8 inputs)
KMX-IN-16-OPT-3GBPS 3 Gbps signal format license (16 inputs)
CC/XDS KMX-IN-8-OPT-CSX CC/subtitling and XDS data license (8 inputs)
KMX-IN-16-OPT-CSX CC/subtitling and XDS data license (16 inputs)
Dolby E KMX-IN-8-OPT-DOLBY Dolby metadata extraction license (8 inputs)
KMX-IN-16-OPT-DOLBY Dolby metadata extraction license (16 inputs)
Loudness KMX-IN-8-OPT-LOUDNESS Loudness level measurement license (8 inputs)
KMX-IN-16-OPT-LOUDNESS Loudness level measurement license (16 inputs)
Kaleido-MX output options

Second Head KMX-OUT-OPT-OP2 Second head output enable license for KALEIDO-
Activation MX-8X1, KALEIDO-MX-16X1 and KALEIDO-MX-
24x1
Kaleido-Modular-X input options

3G KMX-IN-8-OPT-3GBPS 3 Gbps signal format license (8 inputs) for KMX-
3901-IN-8-D
KMX-IN-16-OPT-3GBPS 3 Gbps signal format license (16 inputs) for KMX-
3901-IN-16-D and KMX-3901-IN-16-Q
CC/XDS KMX-IN-8-OPT-CSX CC/subtitling and XDS data license (8 inputs) for
KMX-3901-IN-8-D
KMX-IN-16-OPT-CSX CC/subtitling and XDS data license (16 inputs)
for KMX-3901-IN-16-D and KMX-3901-IN-16-Q
Dolby E KMX-IN-8-OPT-DOLBY Dolby metadata extraction license (8 inputs) for
KMX-3901-IN-8-D
KMX-IN-16-OPT-DOLBY Dolby metadata extraction license (16 inputs) for
KMX-3901-IN-16-D and KMX-3901-IN-16-Q
384
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Kaleido-Modular-X input options (continued)

Loudness KMX-IN-8-OPT-LOUDNESS Loudness level measurement license (8 inputs)
for KMX-3901-IN-8-D
KMX-IN-16-OPT-LOUDNESS Loudness level measurement license (16 inputs)
for KMX-3901-IN-16-D and KMX-3901-IN-16-Q
Kaleido-Modular-X output options

Second Head KMX-OUT-OPT-OP2 Second head output enable license for KMX-
Activation 3901-OUT-S
KMV-3901/3911 input options

3G KMV-39N1-8XN-OPT- 3Gbps signal decoding option (8 inputs)
3GBPS
KMV-39N1-4XN-OPT- 3Gbps signal decoding option (4 inputs)
3GBPS
Embedded KMV-39N1-8XN-OPT-AUD Embedded audio extraction license (8 inputs)
Audio
KMV-39N1-4XN-OPT-AUD Embedded audio extraction license (4 inputs)
Additional KMV-3911-4X1-OPT-4IN KMV-3911-4x1 additional inputs 5-8 license
Inputs
KMV-3901/3911 output options

Second Head KMV-39N1-NX1-OPT-OP2 Output two enabled license
Activation
SDI KMV-3911-NX1-OPT-SDI HD-SDI monitoring output for KMV-3911 (1 SDI
Monitoring O/P output)
Output
KMV-3911-NX2-OPT-SDI HD-SDI monitoring output for KMV-3911 (2 SDI
O/P outputs)
3Da KMV-39NN-8x2-OPT-3DLA Stereoscopic display license (line alternate
mode) for KMV-3901/3911-8x2
KMV-39NN-8x1-OPT-3DLA Stereoscopic display license (line alternate
mode) for KMV-3901/3911-8x1
KMV-39NN-4X2-OPT-3DLA Stereoscopic display license (line alternate
mode) for KMV-3911-4x2
KMV-39NN-4X1-OPT-3DLA Stereoscopic display license (line alternate
mode) for KMV-3911-4x1
a. After enabling the 3D support option in XAdmin, refresh the current layout or load another one, for
the change to be reflected on the monitor wall.
385
Kaleido-X (4RU, 7RU, and 14RU) input options

Option Part No. Feature Notes
3G KXS-3Gbps 3Gbps format license One 3G option key is needed per
input card.
CC/XDS KXS-CSX CC/subtitling and XDS One CC/XDS option key is needed per
data license input card. Extraction of CC 608,
CC 708, XDS and Subtitling WST
metadata is activated as a single
option.
Dolby E KXS-Dolby Dolby metadata One Dolby E option key is needed per
extraction license input card.
Embedded KXS-HD-EMB HD/SD-SDI embedded One HD/SD-SDI embedded audio
Audio audio license option key is needed per input card.
KXS-SD-EMB SD-SDI embedded One SD-SDI embedded audio option
audio license key is needed per input card.
Loudness KXS-Loudness Loudness level One Loudness option key is needed
measurement license per input card.
Kaleido-X (4RU, 7RU, and 14RU) output options

Option Part No. Feature Notes
Display 90- KXS-Rotator Display rotation One Display 90-Degree Rotation
Degree license option key is needed per output card.
Rotation
3Da KXS-3DLA Stereoscopic display One 3D option key is needed per
license (line alternate output card.
mode) for Kaleido-X
Kaleido-X16 input options

3G KXS-X16-3Gbps 3Gbps format license (1/frame)
CC/XDS KXS-X16-CSX CC/subtitling and XDS data license (1/frame)
Dolby E KXS-X16-Dolby Dolby metadata extraction license (1/frame)
Embedded KXS-X16-HD-EMB HD/SD-SDI embedded audio license (1/frame)
Audio
KXS-X16-SD-EMB SD-SDI embedded audio license (1/frame)
Loudness KXS-X16-Loudness Loudness level measurement license (1/frame)
386
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Kaleido-X16 output options

Display 90- KXS-X16-Rotator-S Rotation license for Kaleido-X16-S
Degree
KXS-X16-Rotator-D Rotation license for Kaleido-X16-D
Rotation
SDI KXS-X16-HDM-S HD-SDI monitoring output for Kaleido-X16-S
Monitoring
KXS-X16-HDM-D HD-SDI monitoring output for Kaleido-X16-D
Output
3Da KXS-X16-3DLA-S Stereoscopic display license (line alternate mode) for
Kaleido-X16-S
KXS-X16-3DLA-D Stereoscopic display license (line alternate mode) for
Kaleido-X16-D
Kaleido-X16 router options

SDI Router KXS-X16-RTR16x2 Dual router output option (1/frame)
Output
Dashboard Messages
The following tables explain messages that may appear in the Status dashboard (lower right
corner) and in the Upgrade dashboard (lower left corner), on the Monitor wall. An “x” in the
7RU, 4RU, X16, or KMV column indicates that the message applies to a specific multiviewer
model, namely Kaleido-X (7RU), Kaleido-X (4RU), Kaleido-X16, or KMV-3901/3911.
Status dashboard messages
Message Description 7RU 4RU X16 KMV
PSU A absent PSU A is absent, overheating, has a DC circuitry x
fault condition, or no current is drawn from it.
PSU B absent PSU A is absent, overheating, has a DC circuitry x
PSU A 48 V This message indicates that either PSU A is x
absent, overheating, has a DC circuitry fault
condition, or that no current is drawn from it.
PSU B 48 V PSU A is absent, overheating, has a DC circuitry x
PSU A 48 V Fuse PSU A fuse is broken. x x
PSU B 48 V Fuse PSU B fuse is broken. x x
PSU A 12 V PSU A is absent, overheating, has a DC circuitry x
387
Dashboard Messages
Status dashboard messages (continued)

PSU B 12 V PSU A is absent, overheating, has a DC circuitry x
PSU A AC PSU A power cord is unplugged. x
PSU B AC PSU B power cord is unplugged. x
PSU A Vendor ID not relevant x
Unknown
PSU B Vendor ID not relevant x
Unknown
PSU A Temperature not supported x
PSU B Temperature not supported x
Duplicate IP self-explanatory x x x x
Address Detected
Ethernet Link The output card to which this display monitor is x x x x
Down connected has lost its network connection
Fan 1 (replace Fan 1 is running too low, based on the x
whole module if in thresholds set at hardware level, or is broken.
error)
error)
error)
error)
error)
error)
error)
error)
error)
388
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Status dashboard messages (continued)

Rear Fan 1 (replace Fan 1 is running too low, based on the x
error)
error)
error)
error)
error)
error)
critical temp status not supported x x
high temp status not supported x x
Board High Temperature alarm, based on the threshold set x x
Temperature by the software.
Board Temperature Board temperature measurement. x x
Blower North East Blower North East is running too low, based on x
(replace whole the thresholds set at hardware level, or is broken.
module if in error)
Blower South East Blower South East is running too low, based on x
module if in error)
Blower North West Blower North West is running too low, based on x
module if in error)
Blower South West Blower Sort West is running too low, based on x
module if in error)
389
Dashboard Messages
Upgrade dashboard messages

Error during This message will appear on an expansion frame x
firmware upgrade. with expansion enabled and with cards in frame
Firmware upgrade B running software/firmware older than version
cannot proceed 3.00. To upgrade these cards, transfer them to
until legacy KXO frame A.
(<3.00) are
removed from
frame B.
Error during This message will appear as a side effect of the
firmware upgrade. presence of cards in frame B running a version
Card presence older than version 3.00. The upgrade will not be
from frame B could permitted on any card in the frame until these
not be verified. cards are removed from frame B. To upgrade
these cards, transfer them to frame A.
Error during This message will appear if duplicate IP x x
firmware upgrade. addresses are detected between different KXO
Duplicate IP has cards in the frame. As long as this is the case, no
been detected. We upgrade is possible. You must resolve the
cannot continue duplicate IP address issue before resuming the
checking the upgrade.
Firmware version.
Error during This message will appear if software cannot x x
firmware upgrade. retrieve firmware version from the card(s). This
The current may indicate an issue with the hardware.
firmware version
could not be
verified.
Error during This message will appear if software cannot x x
safemode upgrade. retrieve Safemode version from the card(s). This
The current may indicate an issue with the hardware.
safemode version
could not be
verified.
Error during This message will appear as a side effect of the x
safemode upgrade. presence of cards in frame B running a version
Card presence older than version 3.00. The upgrade will not be
from frame B could permitted on any card in the frame until these
not be verified. cards are removed from frame B. To upgrade
these cards, transfer them to frame A.
Cannot upgrade This message will appear on an expansion frame x
card in this slot (if if frame B contains cards running
any). Please software/firmware older than version 3.00. The
remove card from upgrade will not be permitted on any card in the
[slot number]. frame until these cards are removed from frame
B. To upgrade these cards, transfer them to
frame A.
390
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Upgrade dashboard messages (continued)

Cannot upgrade This message will appear on an expansion frame x
card in this slot. if frame B contains cards running
Move card to frame software/firmware older than version 3.00. The
A or swap with upgrade will not be permitted on any card in the
card in Frame A. frame until these cards are removed from frame
Upgrade will B. To upgrade these cards, transfer them to
proceed after frame A.
current upgrade.
Cannot continue This message will appear on an expansion frame x
the upgrade until with expansion enabled and with cards in frame
card in this slot is B running software/firmware older than version
moved to frame A. 3.00. To upgrade these cards, transfer them to
frame A.
Network Considerations & Port Usage
Network Considerations
Kaleido-X, Kaleido-X16, Kaleido-Modular

Kaleido-X, Kaleido-X16, and Kaleido-Modular multiviewers generate a low to moderate
amount of client-to-server data traffic, and therefore have a minimal bandwidth impact on
a network.
Kaleido-IP
In the case of a Kaleido-IP multiviewer, it is possible to add and configure up to 3000
programs without exceeding the network’s bandwidth or the unit’s decoding resources.
Refer to the Kaleido-IP video inputs section (under “Supported Input/Output Formats”), in
the Kaleido-X Release Notes, for details on the number of streams and total streaming
bandwidth supported.
The Kaleido-IP multiviewer joins a multicast group only when decoding is required, that is
when a source is being monitored on the wall. In addition, streams that are not decoded are
joined momentarily in a polling manner—one stream at a time—to update the PMT and
PAT information. The Kaleido-IP leaves the multicast group as soon as a change of layout
implies that a different set of streams must be decoded.
However, if your situation involves frequent changes of layout (e.g., loading a new layout to
the monitor wall every minute), then, when you are creating or editing a layout, make sure
to terminate XEdit’s connection to the Kaleido-IP once configuration tasks are completed
(see Disconnecting from a Multiviewer, on page 69).
391
TCP/UDP Port Usage

The various Kaleido-X services require access to specific ports. In networks where a firewall
is present between device A and device B, the ports used to communicate from device A to
device B must be open on the incoming (external) side of the firewall.
Note: All necessary ports are open by default on the multiviewer. There is
no mechanism provided for changing the default settings.
From Client to Multiviewer

The following ports must be open on the Client (e.g. workstation running XEdit):
Service Port Transport Notes

HTTP 80 TCP Used by XEdit and XAdmin
5122 TCP Used by XEdit for “keep alive” (heartbeat)
5432 TCP Used by XEdit for export operations
13000 TCP Online connection
13100 TCP Used for calibration data from XEdit
RCP2 5120 TCP Used to listen for Kaleido-X discovery packets
10000 TCP For RCP2 protocol
5120 UDP On multicast 230.8.8.9 for RCP2 protocol
5121 UDP For RCP2 protocol
From Multiviewer to Client

Java RMI 1024–5000a TCP Remote Method Invocation (client/server
49152- communication). Dynamic Allocation of ports.
65535b Required for communication between client
and Application Server.
a. For Windows XP and earlier
b.For Windows 7
From Multiviewer to Multiviewer

The following ports, used for inter-frame communications, are open by default on all
Kaleido-X systems:

SSH 22 TCP Secure Shell Login is required to login to a
multiviewer for maintenance.
Java Jini 4160 TCP Responsible for discovery and
communications between devices/services on
a network.
392
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual

HTTP 8080 TCP
8082 TCP Internal communication
8087 TCP Used for debugging purposes
8090 TCP Web service
32769 TCP filenet-rpc
5120 UDP On multicast 230.8.8.9 for RCP2
7572 UDP On multicast 230.8.8.8 for “keep-alive”
(heartbeat)
7571 UDP For “keep-alive” (heartbeat)
From iControl to Multiviewer
Transpo
Service Port rt Notes
Java RMI 32768– TCP Remote Method Invocation (client/server
65535 communication). Dynamic Allocation of ports.
Required for communication between client
and Application Server. This range can be
restricted to match specific security
requirements. A minimum of 4000 ports
should be allocated.
From Multiviewer to/from Remote Control Panel

The following ports, used for communications to/from RCP-200 and Kaleido-RCP2 control
panels, are open by default on all Kaleido-X systems:

RCP2 5120 TCP Used to listen for Kaleido-X discovery packets
5120 UDP On multicast 230.8.8.9 for RCP2 protocol
5121 UDP For RCP2 protocol
HTTP 80 TCP Used by the RCP-200 to obtain information
from the multiviewer’s system database
13000 TCP Used by the RCP-200 to control the
multiviewer via the gateway
393
From Multiviewer to Peripheral Devices

SMTP 25 TCP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol, for e-mail alerts.
From Peripheral Devices to Multiviewer

The following ports must be open on peripheral devices (e.g. router controllers):
Port Transport Notes

2000 TCP Used to control the Kaleido-X internal router via the Snell
(Pro-Bel) SW-P-02 protocol
4381 TCP Used to control the Kaleido-X internal router via the Nevion
(Network) protocol
5194 TCP Used to control the Kaleido-X internal router via the NVISION
Ethernet protocol - Compact router protocol.
14000 TCP Used to control the Kaleido-X internal router via the Snell
(Pro-Bel) SW-P-08 protocol
Router drivers also use default ports:
Driver Port Transport Notes

ETL 4000 TCP
GVG 7000 Native 12345 TCP
NVISION Ethernet 9193 TCP
protocol - Enterprise
router
VikinX Modular 4381 TCP
Quintech 9100 TCP
Sony HKSPC 12345 TCP GVGNP Emulator
Utah RCP-3 5001 TCP SC-4 Ethernet
Snell (Pro-Bel) SW-P-02 2000 TCP
Snell (Pro-Bel) SW-P-08 14000 TCP
Note: This is configurable in XEdit—you can choose any UDP or TCP/IP port
to use for communications between the multiviewer and an external router.
394
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
From Multiviewer to/from SNMP Devices

SNMP 161 UDP Simple Network Management Protocol, used
for communications between multiviewer
and peripheral devices (e.g. sending get, get-
next, and set commands to an SNMP agent,
and receiving the response).
162 UDP Simple Network Management Protocol, used
for receiving traps (alerts) from peripheral
devices.
From Multiviewer to/from NTP Server

The following ports, used for communications to/from Network Time Protocol servers, are
open by default on all Kaleido-X systems:

NTP 123 TCP Used for Network Time Protocol
synchronization. Port needs to be open in
both directions.
Detailed Directions
Assigning an IP Address to Each Device in Your System

Multiviewers and most peripheral devices that are part of a Kaleido-X system communicate
through a TCP/IP network. Configuring your system’s network parameters includes the
following:
• Assigning an IP address, and specifying the appropriate network mask, gateway
address, and a system name for each multiviewer. Refer to Default IP Settings, on
page 382, and to Configuring a Multiviewer’s IP Settings, on page 395.
• Configuring the RCP-200, or Kaleido-RCP2, if available. Refer to Configuring the RCP-
200, on page 402, or to Configuring the Kaleido-RCP2, on page 406.
• Configuring the Audio Bridge Terminal (ABT), if available. Refer to Configuring an Audio
Bridge Terminal, on page 409.
Configuring a Multiviewer’s IP Settings

To change the Kaleido-X’s system IP address, and adjust your system’s configuration
1 Configure your client PC with an IP address in the same range as the IP address of the
multiviewer (see Changing the Client PC’s IP Address, on page 400).
2 Open a Web browser window and type the multiviewer’s IP address in the address
bar.10
395
Firefox users:
page 421.

The XAdmin Status and Options page appears.
Internet Explorer and Chrome users:

4 Click System configuration, in the navigation area on the left of the page.
396
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
The System Configuration page appears, showing the current system name, IP settings,
as well as the date and time settings.
In the case of a Kaleido-X, Kaleido-X16, or KMV-3901/3911 model, the default system

name corresponds to your order number. In the case of a Kaleido-IP, the default system
name is K-IP.
5 Type a different name for your system if you wish.
Notes
• In the case of a Kaleido-IP multiviewer, the system name must comply
with RFC 1123, because it is also used as the device’s host name. Up to 8
characters are allowed, limited to A-Z, a-z, 0-9, and the hyphen. The system
name cannot start or end with an hyphen.
• For the other multiviewer models, only lower-ASCII characters are allowed
in the system name. Braces and tilde are not allowed.
In the absence of a reference signal, a Kaleido-X or Kaleido-X16 will process its video
inputs at a default frame rate of 59.94 Hz.
6 If your system requires a 50 Hz frame rate, to match the input signal data sampling rate,
in the absence of a reference signal, then select the corresponding check box.
Note: The 50 Hz system frame rate option applies to the Kaleido-X and
Kaleido-X16 multiviewers only.
7 Adjust the date and time settings, as required.

Clocks in your layouts will then display date and time in the applicable format.
8 Enter the appropriate IP information: frame or card IP addresses, network mask, and
default gateway.
397
9 In the case of a Kaleido-IP, to omit network configuration for an unused data port, clear
the corresponding Enabled check box.
By default, all network adapters are set to auto-negotiate. The connection speed and
duplex mode will be set automatically based on the corresponding port settings on the
associated switch. The current speed and link mode are displayed next to Detected link
mode, for every network adapter.
10 Should your network configuration require specific speed and duplex mode settings,
select the appropriate value from the Configured link mode list.
Note: As required by the IEEE-802.3 standard, section 28D.5, 1000 Mbps

full-duplex communication is only supported via auto-negotiation.
11 Click Save.
The new settings are saved locally.
12 Click OK.
The Apply settings button becomes available.
13 Click Apply settings.

The Kaleido-X system must be restarted for changes to the network configuration to
take effect. A message appears prompting you to reboot the system immediately.
14 Click OK.
Note: Settings cannot be applied to a multiviewer system while an

upgrade is in progress. If the multiviewer does not reboot after 10 seconds
or so, try clicking Apply settings again after a minute or two, until the
multiviewer reboots.
15 Remember to change your client PC’s IP address to one that matches the new subnet.
You will also need to edit the XAdmin URL in your Web browser's address bar, in order
to log on to the multiviewer again.
398
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Configuring a Multiviewer’s IP Settings Without a Client PC
Notes
This section does not apply to the KMV-3901/3911, Kaleido-XQUAD,
Kaleido-MX, and Kaleido-Modular-X. For these multiviewers, you can
configure the network settings by using XAdmin, the Densité controller’s
local control panel (or a control panel in iControl, if available). See
Configuring a Multiviewer’s IP Settings on page 395, or refer to the Quick
Start Guide for your multiviewer, for details.
In the case of a Kaleido-IP, changing the multiviewer’s network settings from
the monitor wall is not yet supported.
With a Kaleido-X, or Kaleido-X16, you can set the IP address, system name, and other
parameters via a control panel, directly on the monitor wall.
To change the multiviewer’s system IP address, and adjust your system’s configuration
1 Connect a mouse to any USB port on the multiviewer.
2 Right-click anywhere on the monitor wall. On the shortcut menu, point to Monitor
wall, and then click System Configuration.
3 Change the configuration settings as necessary, and then click OK.
4 Click Yes when prompted to restart the system.
399
Finding a Multiviewer’s System IP Address and Application Version

To find the system IP address, system name and application version
• Right-click anywhere on the monitor wall. On the shortcut menu, point to Monitor
wall, and then click Show dashboard to display the dashboard associated with the
current output head.
A small window appears, revealing the system IP address and the system version.
Partial view of a monitor wall display showing dashboard at the bottom right
System IP address
Application version
System name Room name
Enlarged view of dashboard.
Changing the Client PC’s IP Address

Both the client computer that you will use to communicate with the multiviewer (via
XAdmin and XEdit) and the multiviewer itself must have IP addresses within the same
subnet. The following procedure applies to a typical Windows XP system. For Windows 7,
see Changing an IP Address on Windows 7, on page 402.
400
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Changing an IP Address on Windows XP

To change the IP address of a client PC that has Windows XP
1 On the Windows XP Start menu, point to Control Panel, right-click Network
Connections, and then click Open on the shortcut menu.
2 In Network Connections, right-click Local Area Connection, and then click Properties
on the shortcut menu.
3 In Local Area Connection Properties, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) from the list on
the General tab, and then click Properties.
The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window opens.
4 On the General tab, click Use the following IP address.

5 Type an IP address in the same range as the default IP address of the Kaleido-X
multiviewer. For example, if the IP address of the Kaleido-X multiviewer is “10.0.3.70”,
then the IP address of your client PC could be “10.0.3.123”. If you are unsure, contact
your network administrator.
6 Type a subnet mask in the same range as that of the Kaleido-X.
7 Click OK.
8 In Local Area Connection Properties, click OK.
401
Changing an IP Address on Windows 7

To change the IP address of a client PC that has Windows 7
1 Click the Start button, and then click Control Panel. In the search box, type “adapter”,
and then, under Network and Sharing Center, click View network connections.
2 In Network Connections, right-click Local Area Connection, and then click Properties.
If the system prompts you for an administrator password or confirmation, type the
password or provide confirmation.
The Local Area Connection Properties window opens.
3 On the Networking tab, under This connection uses the following items, click
Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4), and then click Properties.
The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window opens.
4 On the General tab, click Use the following IP address.
5 Type an IP address in the same range as the default IP address of the multiviewer. For
example, if the IP address of the multiviewer is “10.0.3.70”, then the IP address of your
client PC could be “10.0.3.123”. If you are unsure, contact your network administrator.
6 Type a subnet mask in the same range as that of the multiviewer.
7 Click OK.
8 In Local Area Connection Properties, click OK.
Configuring the RCP-200

The RCP-200 is shipped with an IP address of 10.0.3.200. On installation, you should consult
your system administrator and replace this address with an appropriate address for your
local network configuration (see Configuring the RCP-200’s IP Settings, below). Once your
RCP-200 has an active connection to the network, you must then register the multiviewers
you wish to operate from the RCP-200 (see Specifying Multiviewers for the RCP-200, on
page 403), and their respective KX Router logical routers (see Specifying Lookup Servers for
the RCP-200, on page 403). Once this is completed, you will be able to control the monitor
wall from the RCP-200 (see Logging on to the RCP-200, on page 403).
Configuring the RCP-200’s IP Settings

To assign an IP address to the RCP-200
1 Press the CONFIG button, located between the two screens on the front of the RCP-200.
2 Touch the COMM category at the top of the right-hand screen.
3 Touch the ETHERNET tab on the right-hand screen.
4 In the SELECT area, rotate the leftmost control knob to select IP ADDRESS.
5 Use the four control knobs in the CHANGE area to set the new address.
The current address is displayed in the CURRENT box for reference, and the new
address you are setting appears in the MODIFIED box, as well as at the controls.
6 Press the SAVE control knob to store the new address.
7 Repeat from step 4 to configure the NETWORK MASK and GATEWAY settings.
8 Press the RESTART control knob to apply the changes.
The panel will go dark for about 15 seconds before the startup screens appear.
402
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Specifying Multiviewers for the RCP-200

To specify a multiviewer for the RCP-200
2 Touch the COMM category on the right-hand screen.
3 Touch the KALEIDO DISCOVERY tab on the right-hand screen.
4 Use the four control knobs in the ADD TO LIST area to dial in the IP address of the
multiviewer you wish to operate.
The address appears in the TO ADD box.
5 Press the ADD control knob.
The multiviewer’s IP address appears in the LOOKUP LIST area.
6 Press the CONFIG button, located between the two screens on the front of the RCP-200
to end the configuration process and return to normal operation.
Specifying Lookup Servers for the RCP-200

The RCP-200 needs to connect to a lookup server in order to control devices, including a
multiviewer’s KX router logical router.
To specify a lookup server for the RCP-200
2 Touch the COMM category on the right-hand screen.
3 Touch the DISCOVERY tab on the right-hand screen.
4 Use the four control knobs in the ADD TO LIST area to dial in the IP address of the
multiviewer you wish to operate.
The address appears in the TO ADD box.
5 Press the ADD control knob.
The multiviewer’s IP address appears in the LOOKUP LIST area.
6 Press the CONFIG button, located between the two screens on the front of the RCP-200
to end the configuration process and return to normal operation.
Logging on to the RCP-200
Note: In a default system configuration, a multiviewer’s video outputs are

assigned to specific rooms:
• On a Kaleido-X (7RU), the two DVI/VGA outputs from each of the dual-
head Output cards A, B, C and D are assigned to ROOM1, ROOM2, ROOM3
and ROOM4 respectively.
head Output cards A and B are assigned to ROOM1 and ROOM2
respectively.
• On a Kaleido-X (14RU) expansion system, the two DVI/VGA outputs from
each of the dual-head Output cards A, B and C of each of Frame A and
Frame B are assigned to ROOM1, ROOM2, ROOM3, ROOM4, ROOM5 and
ROOM6 respectively.
403
• On a Kaleido-X16-D, the HDMI outputs from each of the Output modules

are assigned to ROOMX16.
• On a KMV-3901/3911, Kaleido-XQUAD, or Kaleido-XQUAD-DUAL, the
HDMI outputs are assigned to ROOM1.
• On a Kaleido-MX, or Kaleido-Modular-X, the HDMI outputs are assigned to
ROOM1.
To log on to a Kaleido-X room from the RCP-200

1 On an RCP-200 with an active connection to the network, press the LIST button.
All devices, and Kaleido-X rooms, detected by the RCP-200 appear on the left screen.
Kaleido-X rooms are listed in the form [multiviewer name]\[room name].
If a room belongs to a cluster system, its name appears once for each of the member
multiviewers (e.g. if two multiviewers, KX1 and KX2, are configured as a cluster, and
ROOM1 includes displays fed by both multiviewers, then both KX1\ROOM1 and
KX2\ROOM1 will be listed. To determine the one you should select, review the
following:
• Has the RCP user configuration you wish to use been replicated on every member
of the cluster (see Replicating RCP Users Across a Cluster System, on page 86)?
• Do you need to control an external router whose configuration is available only
from one or some specific members of the cluster?
• Does your system configuration include actions that were configured only on one
or some specific members of the cluster?
• Do you need to control a timer from the monitor wall in a cascade room?
If any of the above elements is available only from one or some specific members, then
make sure you select the room name prefixed with the appropriate multiviewer name.
In the case of a cascade room, unless you remember which multiviewer you were
connected to when you added the timer you need to control, you will have to proceed
by trial and error.
2 Touch the room you wish to access (press the DOWN or UP soft keys to scroll the list as
needed).
The list of users assigned to this room appears on the right-hand screen.
3 Touch the user name under which you wish to log on, enter your password, and then
touch LOG IN.
The following message appears on the right-hand screen: PLEASE SELECT A ROUTER
FROM THE LEFT-HAND SCREEN, prefixed with the name of the multiviewer that
appeared before the room name you selected in step 2.
4 In the list on the left-hand screen, touch the KX Router logical router associated with the
same multiviewer (you can see the multiviewer name, its IP address, and the size of that
particular KX Router).
404
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
5 Touch the Video level, in the area to the right of the router list, if it is not selected
already, and then push SELECT.
The room’s monitor wall control panel appears on the right-hand screen, with the
ASSIGN CHANNEL category selected. If a mouse is connected to the RCP-200, then after
touching WALL MOUSE you should be able to see and move the mouse pointer on the
monitor wall.
• If the room you selected belongs to a cascade system, touch a monitor showing a
source you can identify as coming from a different multiviewer than the one indicated
with the room name you selected in step 2.
• If the room you selected belongs to a cluster system, rotate the HEAD knob (or touch
the DISPLAY SELECT category) to display a head view from a different member of the
cluster, and then touch a monitor.
The ROUTER SELECT category becomes selected instead of ASSIGN CHANNEL, and the
right-hand screen shows the message prompting you to select a router from the left-
hand screen, prefixed with the name of the multiviewer, which means that you still
need to complete the correlation between some monitor wall destinations and the
representation of the KX Router logical router for this multiviewer. See Correlating
Monitor Wall Destinations and KX Router Logical Routers for the RCP-200 below.
Repeat this for one head, with one layout, for every multiviewer that is part of the
cluster of cascade. If you need to connect to a different instance of the same room then
you will have to establish the correlation again, to be able to operate the monitor wall
from the different context.
Notes
• The RCP-200 will remember your user credentials until you log out
explicitly (by touching LOG OUT at the upper-right corner of the control
panel).
pointer.
For more information on the RCP-200, please refer to the RCP-200 Guide to Installation and
portal.
Correlating Monitor Wall Destinations and KX Router Logical Routers for

the RCP-200
To operate the monitor wall from the RCP-200’s category/index router view, your system
must have been configured to be controlled as a router. In a layout, the RCP-200 can only
control monitors that have been assigned a monitor wall destination. The first time you log
on to a room from the RCP-200, you will be prompted to select a router from the left-hand
screen. By selecting the appropriate KX Router logical router, you will establish the
correlation between your multiviewer’s monitor wall destinations and the RCP-200’s
representation of the multiviewer’s KX Router logical router. In the case of a cluster or
cascade system, you will also be prompted to select a router, the first time to try to assign a
source to a monitor located in a part of the layout that belongs to a different member of the
405
cluster or cascade. You only need to do this once, for every multiviewer that is part of a
cluster (or cascade).
To correlate a monitor wall destination in a layout and the corresponding KX Router
logical router
1 In the list on the left-hand screen, touch the KX Router logical router associated with the
multiviewer whose name was indicated in the message prompting to select a router
(you can see the multiviewer name, its IP address, and the size of that particular KX
Router).
2 Touch the Video level, in the area to the right of the router list, if it is not selected
already, and then push SELECT.
The RCP-200 will remember the association with the KX Router logical router’s
destinations for the current multiviewer’s monitor wall destinations.
Configuring the Kaleido-RCP2

The Kaleido-RCP2 is a multi-function remote control panel designed for use with Miranda’s
Kaleido-X. Ethernet connectivity allows multiple RCP users to access multiple Kaleido-X
systems, allowing convenient access to the real-time operating features of the Kaleido-X.
When logged on to a Kaleido-X via its Ethernet connection, the RCP user can control
various operating features of the Kaleido-X.
Before you can use the Kaleido-RCP2 to operate your Kaleido-X, you must set up the
Ethernet connection between the two devices. By default, the Kaleido-RCP2 is shipped with
DHCP enabled, so it will automatically be assigned an IP address by a DHCP server. If no
DHCP server is present on the network, the Kaleido-RCP2 will default to the static IP address
10.0.3.191.
Notes
• The Kaleido-RCP2 is powered through the RJ-45 Ethernet connector.
There is no power ON/OFF button, so the device is ON whenever a
powered Ethernet cable is connected.
• If you purchased more than one Kaleido-RCP2 units, keep in mind that
they all ship with the same default static IP address. Make sure to assign
them different static IP addresses before connecting them to the network
if DHCP is not used.
• The time-out period before the Kaleido-RCP2 defaults to its static address
is 1 minute. To speed up the initialization, disable the DHCP option.
406
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Assigning a static IP address to the Kaleido-RCP2

To assign a static IP address to the Kaleido-RCP2
1 Press and hold the ENTER button until the ESC button lights up, to display the
configuration menu.
2 Press the 8 key (to move down the list) until ETHERNET OPTIONS appears on the LCD
display.
3 Press the ENTER key to display the ETHERNET OPTIONS menu.
4 Select the IP ADDRESS menu using the 2 key (to move up in the list) or the 8 key (to
move down the list), and then press ENTER.
5 Using the numeric keypad, type the chosen IP address, and then press ENTER.
6 Select the NETWORK MASK menu using the 2 key (to move up in the list) or the 8 key
(to move down the list), and then press ENTER.
7 Using the numeric keypad, type the chosen network mask, and then press ENTER.
You have assigned a static IP address to the Kaleido-RCP2.
Selecting a Room for the Kaleido-RCP2

To select a room for the Kaleido-RCP2
configuration menu.
2 In the ROOM SELECTION display, press ENTER again to get the room list from the
Kaleido-X systems that are currently available on the network.
3 In the room list, select the room you wish to access by pressing the 2 key (to move up in
the list) or the 8 key (to move down the list).
Note: By default, a multiviewer’s video outputs are assigned to specific

rooms:
head Output cards A, B, C and D are assigned to ROOM1, ROOM2,
ROOM3 and ROOM4 respectively.
head Output cards A and B are assigned to ROOM1 and ROOM2
respectively.
• On a Kaleido-X (14RU) expansion system, the two DVI/VGA outputs
from each of the dual-head Output cards A, B and C of each of Frame A
and Frame B are assigned to ROOM1, ROOM2, ROOM3, ROOM4, ROOM5
and ROOM6 respectively.
• On a Kaleido-X16-D, the HDMI outputs from each of the Output
modules are assigned to ROOMX16.
• On a KMV-3901/3911, Kaleido-XQUAD, or Kaleido-XQUAD-DUAL, the
HDMI outputs are assigned to ROOM1.
407
• On a Kaleido-MX, or Kaleido-Modular-X, the HDMI outputs are assigned

to ROOM1.
4 When the appropriate room name is highlighted, press ENTER to accept the new
selection.
5 When prompted, log on to the selected room. See Logging on to the Kaleido-RCP2 on
page 408.
Connecting the Kaleido-RCP2 to Other Kaleido-X Systems

The unicast IP feature enables a Kaleido-RCP2 to find up to three Kaleido-X systems on
different subnets and connect to them (via network gateways), while maintaining
connections to Kaleido-X systems in its own subnet.
Notes
• To navigate the Kaleido-RCP2 menu, press the 2 key to move up, or the 8
key to move down.
• There is no need to configure unicast IP addresses for Kaleido-X systems
on the same subnet as the Kaleido-RCP2.
To configure a unicast IP address on the Kaleido-RCP2

configuration menu.
2 Select ETHERNET OPTIONS on the LCD display, and then press ENTER.
3 Select Unicast host IP, and then press ENTER.
4 Select Enable IP 1, and then press ENTER.
The Enable IP x parameter instructs the Kaleido-RCP2 to query the selected IP address
for a list of rooms.
5 Select Host IP ADDR, and then press ENTER.
6 Using the numeric keypad, type the IP address of a Kaleido-X on a remote subnet, and
then press ENTER.
7 Repeat step 4 to step 6 to add unicast IP addresses for up to three remote Kaleido-X
systems.
Logging on to the Kaleido-RCP2

As a network device, the Kaleido-RCP2 provides access to any room configuration on any
Kaleido-X system on the network. As a security measure, access is controlled by a login
procedure.
To log on to a Kaleido-X system from the Kaleido-RCP2
1 Press the LOGIN key.
The following message will appear on the LCD display:
LOGIN Position
Admin
2 Press ENTER to select “Admin”.
A message prompting you to enter a password will appear on the LCD display.
408
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
3 Press ENTER again (by default, there is no password).

The message “Access granted” will appear on the LCD display if the login is successful. If
a mouse is connected to the Kaleido-RCP2, then you should be able to see and move
the mouse pointer on the monitor wall.
Note: If at any time the message “Target system is offline” or “No login list
available” appears on the LCD display, press the ESC, ENTER and DEL keys
simultaneously and go back to step 1.
For more information, refer to the Kaleido-RCP2 Guide to Installation and Operation, available
on the DVD that shipped with your system, and from Miranda’s support portal.
Configuring an Audio Bridge Terminal
Note: The KMV-3901/3911 is not compatible with the Audio Bridge

Terminal.
The Audio Bridge Terminal (ABT) is an external audio multiplexer/serializer for the Kaleido-
X. The Kaleido-X supports up to 128 inputs, and all of the video input connectors are
located on the rear panels associated with the KXI series of cards.
There is not enough space on the rear panels to also include the audio connectors. The ABT
provides connector space for the audio signal inputs, and multiplexes all the audio signals
into combined serial feeds on coaxial cables that connect to the KXI cards.
Note: The ABT is powered through the RJ-45 Ethernet connector. There is
no power ON/OFF button, so the device is ON whenever a powered Ethernet
cable is connected.
To configure the IP address and other network settings of the ABT

1 Connect a PC to a switch.
409
2 Referring to Changing the Client PC’s IP Address, on page 400, configure the PC with
the following network settings:
DHCP Off
Static IP address 10.0.0.1
Subnet mask 255.255.0.0
Default gateway 10.0.0.1
3 Apply power to the Audio Bridge Terminal and make sure it is connected to the same
switch as the PC. If the switch is Power over Ethernet (PoE) enabled, simply connect it to
the unit using an Ethernet cable. If not, PoE mid-span (“inserter”) equipment must be
placed between the switch and the Audio Bridge Terminal.
4 Press the RESET button (located on the right-hand side of the ABT rear panel beside the
ETHERNET/POWER RJ-45 connector) for at least 1 second. The Audio Bridge Terminal
will reboot with the following static network configuration:
DHCP OFF
Static IP address 10.0.3.190
Subnet mask 255.255.0.0
Default gateway 10.0.0.1
5 Using a Web browser on the PC, connect to the ABT using the following address:
10.0.3.190.
The home page of the ABT’s built in Web server is displayed.
6 Click Network Configuration (in the navigation pane).
The Network Configuration page is displayed.
7 Change the ABT’s network settings, as necessary, and then click Apply & Reboot.
Note: If you purchased more than one Audio Bridge Terminal unit, keep in
mind that they all ship with the same default static IP address. Make sure to
assign each of them a different static IP address before connecting them to
the network, if DHCP is not used.
For more information, please refer to the Audio Bridge Terminal Guide to Installation and
portal.
410
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Enabling Options
To enable options on a multiviewer
1 From a workstation on the same subnet, open a Web browser window and type the IP
address of the multiviewer in the address bar.11
Firefox users:
page 421.

411
Enabling Options

3 Click the arrow button at the end of the heading row that corresponds to the module
for which you wish to enable an option.
Click to expand
Click to collapse
4 Locate the entry for the option you wish to enable.

For example, to activate the Extraction of CC, Subtitling and XDS metadata option
(CC/XDS Option) for a Kaleido-X input card, you would need to locate the appropriate
card in XAdmin’s Status and Options page, expand it, and then locate the
KXI-16-CC/XDS option line.
5 Click the Enable button.
A window appears prompting you for the option key.
6 Enter the key for the specific option in the box, and then click OK.
412
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Once the option is enabled, the key is displayed, and a Disable button replaces the
Enable button.
Notes
• The Kaleido-IP currently supports extraction of CC/subtitling and XDS data
(1 license/program), and display rotation. It is not yet possible to enable or
verify these options in XAdmin’s Status and Options page, for this
multiviewer model. Contact Technical Support for activation and
configuration instructions (see Contact Us, on page 453).
• One CC/XDS Option key is needed per input card, and the extraction of CC
608, CC 708, XDS and Subtitling WST metadata are all activated as a single
option.
• After enabling the 3D Support option in XAdmin, refresh the current layout
or load another one, for the change to be reflected on the monitor wall.
• For a complete list of the options that can be enabled and disabled via the
XAdmin Status and Options page, see Hardware and Software Options, on
page 383.
Configuring Power Supply Redundancy on a Kaleido-X16

Power supply redundancy is an option on the Kaleido-X16, which can ship with a single
PSU. In order to avoid having the system dashboard display unnecessary alarms, there is a
check box in XAdmin to indicate the presence of the second PSU. By default, this option is
selected (both PSUs are monitored). Removing the check mark will stop the monitoring of
alarms for PSU B (its status is set to disabled, and therefore will not appear on the
dashboard).
PSU A removed Slot A Slot B

Location of Slot A and Slot B in the front of the Kaleido-X16 frame
To configure the PSU B Installed option in XAdmin

1 Open a Web browser window and type the IP address of the Kaleido-X16 frame in the
address bar.
413
Configuring Power Supply Redundancy on a Kaleido-X16
Firefox users:
page 421.
2 Click XAdmin.

3 In the System heading row, click the Expand details arrow ( ).

A list of system details and statuses appears below the System heading row.
4 At the top of the list, select or clear PSU B Installed, as required.
414
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
The change is applied immediately. The Power Supply B Status indicator turns gray,
indicating that probing is disabled for this alarm.
IMPORTANT
The system behavior after selecting or clearing the PSU B Installed
check box is as follows:
• When you select the PSU B Installed check box, the system
publishes a warning that PSU B has failed if there is no PSU in Slot
B. Do this when you have two PSUs installed in your frame.
• When you clear the PSU B Installed check box, the system does
not generate a warning that PSU B has failed if there is no PSU in
Slot B. Do this when you have only one PSU installed in your
frame.
Installing XEdit
The Kaleido-X Layout Editor (XEdit) is used to create layouts and configure the Kaleido-X.
When the computer with XEdit is connected to the Kaleido-X through a TCP/IP network,
you can use XEdit to modify layouts and settings directly on the Kaleido-X, or you can work
locally on the computer and then export your changes to the Kaleido-X. See Creating Room
Layouts on page 203, for more information.
XEdit is not provided as a standalone application. You download the application to your
client PC or laptop directly from the multiviewer.
Note: You can also download XEdit from Miranda’s support portal.
To install XEdit
1 From a workstation on the same subnet as the multiviewer, open a Web browser
window and type the IP address of the multiviewer in the address bar.
415
Installing XEdit
Notes
• Firefox users: If you see a security warning instead of the home page, then
refer to Registering your Multiviewer's Security Credentials with your
Browser, on page 421.
• To use XEdit, you must have Java Runtime Environment (JRE) version 1.6.0
update 20 installed on your PC or laptop. Click the link at the bottom of the
page to download the installer for the JRE version required to use XEdit.
See Installing the Java Runtime Environment on page 419, for details.
2 Click the XEdit button.

The system will automatically detect the Java Runtime Environment (JRE) version on
your computer, and, if necessary, will prompt you to install the JRE version 1.6.0
update 20 (refer to Installing the Java Runtime Environment, on page 419, for details).
3 If the Opening MEdit.jnlp window appears, click OK.
Another window appears, displaying the progress of the XEdit download.
416
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
4 If you see a security warning prompting you for confirmation before starting the
application, then select I accept the risk and want to run this application. You may
also want to select the Do not show this again for apps from the publisher and
location above check box. Click Run.
5 If you see a security warning about the Java version, click Allow this application to run
with the selected version (1.6.0_20), and then click Continue.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT click Run with the latest version on your system (Recommended).
XEdit is not compatible with Java 7.
417
Installing XEdit
Once you have chosen the Java version to run XEdit, you will not see the warning again,
unless the IP address of the home page from which you open XEdit changes.
The XEdit startup screen appears.
6 Depending on your Java settings, the Java Web Start installer may prompt you to
confirm whether you wish to have XEdit shortcuts created. Click Yes.
This will add a shortcut icon on your desktop.
Note: If the installer cannot find all of the fonts needed by XEdit, it will
download them to your PC automatically. A message will appear to confirm
the font update, and instruct you to restart the application.
Click OK to continue, and then open XEdit again, from the Kaleido-X home
page, or from the desktop shortcut (if available).
7 When prompted to specify a database, choose one from the Path list, or click Browse to
specify another location, and then click OK to continue.
8 Once the installation process has completed, XEdit’s main application window appears.
418
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Notes
• Once it has been downloaded from the multiviewer, the XEdit application
remains on your PC, and can be launched from the shortcut icon that was
created on your desktop in step 6 above.
• You may need to upgrade your Audio Bridge Terminal and Kaleido-RCP2
devices (if available) to the latest firmware. The update files can be found
on the DVD that shipped with your multiviewer. Please refer to the Kaleido-
RCP2 Guide to Installation and Operation, and to the Audio Bridge Terminal
Guide to Installation and Operation (available on the DVD) for instructions
on how to determine the firmware level, and how to perform the upgrade
for these devices.
Installing the Java Runtime Environment

XEdit is a Java Web Start application, and thus requires the Java Runtime Environment to be
installed on your system. When you try to access XEdit from the Kaleido-X home page, the
system will automatically detect the Java Runtime Environment (JRE) version on your
computer, and, if necessary, will prompt you to install version 1.6.0 update 20. Alternatively,
you can download the JRE installer from your multiviewer by clicking the link at the bottom
of the Kaleido-X home page.
To install the Java Runtime Environment
1 Click anywhere in the prompt area, on the page that appeared when Java Web Start
detected that your system was missing the required JRE version.
419
Installing XEdit
Alternatively, click the link at the bottom of the Kaleido-X home page.
Click here
2 If security warnings appear, before downloading or before opening the installer file,
then click Run.
Java Setup prompts you to accept the license agreement.
3 Review the license agreement if you wish, and then click Install to proceed.
Java Setup will update your PC or laptop.
4 Click Close once the installation has completed.
420
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Registering your Multiviewer's Security Credentials with your Browser

When you open your multiviewer’s home page, or try to access XAdmin, your browser may
report a certificate error (Internet Explorer), warn you about the site’s security certificate
(Chrome), or report an untrusted connection (Firefox). Follow the appropriate procedure
below to register your multiviewer’s security credentials with your browser:
• Suppressing Untrusted Connection Warning in Firefox, below
• Suppressing Certificate Error in Internet Explorer or Chrome, on page 422
You will be then able to access your multiviewer’s client applications without seeing the
error message again, as long as the multiviewer’s IP address does not change.
Suppressing Untrusted Connection Warning in Firefox

The first time you try to access your multiviewer’s home page in Firefox, the browser may
display the following page instead, prompting you to confirm the multiviewer’s security
credentials.
421
To register your multiviewer’s security credentials with Firefox

1 Click I understand the Risks, at the bottom of the page.
The message expands.
2 Click Add Exception.

3 In Add Security Exception, click Confirm Security Exception.
Your multiviewer's home page appears. You will now be able to access your
multiviewer's client applications without seeing the warning. This will remain effective
until the multiviewer's IP address is changed, in which case you will need follow the
procedure again.
Suppressing Certificate Error in Internet Explorer or Chrome

The first time you try to access XAdmin, from your multiviewer’s home page, in Internet
Explorer or Chrome, the browser may prompt you to confirm the multiviewer’s security
credentials.
422
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Internet Explorer’s security warning
Chrome’s security warning
423
Clicking Continue to this website (not recommended) (Internet Explorer), or Proceed

anyway (Chrome) will let you access XAdmin but the browser’s address bar will keep
indicating that the multiviewer’s identity is not verified. To suppress this warning, you need
to perform the following, in Internet Explorer, even if your preferred browser is Chrome.
To register your multiviewer’s security credentials with Internet Explorer
1 Click Continue to this website (not recommended).
The address bar now indicates the certificate error.
Special notes for users of Internet Explorer 10

• If you see a blank page instead of XAdmin’s Status and Options page, then
see Enabling the Compatibility View in Internet Explorer 10, on page 429.
• You must have administrator status to accept the certificate error. If your
user account does not have administrator status, then close your browser
and, before you open it again, right-click the Internet Explorer icon, and
then click Run as administrator:
2 Click Certificate error.

3 In Untrusted Certificate, click View certificates.
4 In Certificate, click Install Certificate.
424
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
5 In Certificate Import Wizard, click Next.
6 In Certificate Import Wizard, click Place all certificates in the following store, and
then click Browse.
425
7 In Select Certificate Store, select Trusted Root Certification Authorities, and then click
OK.
8 Back in Certificate Import Wizard, click Next.
426
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
9 Click Finish.
A security warning appears.
427
10 Click Yes.
11 Certificate Import Wizard reports that the import was successful.
12 Click OK to dismiss the message, and then click OK to close the Certificate window.
13 Close all Internet Explorer (and Chrome, if any) windows, and then open your browser
again.
You should now be able to access XAdmin, from your multiviewer home page without
ever seeing the security warning again, unless the multiviewer’s IP address is changed,
in which case you will want to repeat this procedure.
Special note for users of Chrome

Kaleido-X, Kaleido-X16, and KMV-3901/3911 multiviewers currently use an
older version of Java to generate their certificate. For this reason, every time
you open Chrome and try to access XAdmin, you may see a warning about the
site’s security certificate. Click Proceed anyway.
428
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Special note for users of Chrome (continued)
Enabling the Compatibility View in Internet Explorer 10

When you try to access XAdmin, from your multiviewer’s home page, in Internet Explorer 10,
you may see a blank page instead of XAdmin’s Status and Options page.
To enable the compatibility view for your multiviewer’s XAdmin Web client
• Click the Compatibility View button at the end of your browser’s address bar.
XAdmin’s Status and Options page appears
429
The Compatibility View mode will remain enabled for this multiviewer as long as its IP
address does not change.
Obtaining EDID Data From Displays When Using the DXF-100 Interface
The DXF-100 is a transmitter/receiver combination that allows a digital flat panel display to
be located up to 1,000 meters (3,300 feet) away from the signal source. The transmitter and
receiver are interconnected by a single multimode optical fiber, and connect to the source
and display using DVI connectors.
The DXF-100 must be configured for its target display, before it is connected to the
multiviewer, otherwise the Extended display identification data (EDID) information listed in
XAdmin’s Status and Options page for the corresponding output card will not reflect the
actual values for the target display. XAdmin would not be reporting the actual timing data
from the display, but default values corresponding to the maximum resolution supported
by the DXF-100, i.e. 1920 × 1200. The DXF-100 interface is unidirectional from the
transmitter (multiviewer) to the receiver (display). For XAdmin to show timing data from the
display, the EDID information needs to be transmitted in the reverse direction: from the
display to the multiviewer.
To obtain a display’s timing information in XAdmin
• Connect the display directly to the DVI output of the multiviewer, by using a copper
cable. (This is not always practical, since the display can be far or mounted on a wall.)
• Alternatively, connect the DXF-100 transmitter to the DVI input connector on the
display, and then connect it to its power supply. The LED will flash for a few seconds
while the transmitter reads and stores the EDID information from the display. When the
LED stops flashing, disconnect the transmitter from the display and reconnect it to the
multiviewer. The EDID information from the display will now be visible in XAdmin. The
EDID information from the display will now be visible to the multiviewer. If the
multiviewer is configured to adapt itself to the native resolution of the display, the
resolution for the output will change automatically.
Notes
• Miranda offers a more versatile bidirectional interface, the DXF-200
DVI/HDMI Optical Extension System, which has superseded the DXF-100
interface. For more information on the DXF-200, contact your Miranda
sales representative.
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Notes (continued)
• As of Kaleido-X version 4.10, the EDID auto-detection feature is enabled by
default in order to facilitate the initial setup of a Kaleido-X system.
• Prior to Kaleido-X v. 3.00, EDID information was only reported for the
master KXO-Dual card. In more recent versions, every KXO-Dual/KXO-
Dual3 card reports the EDID information for its associated displays.
For more information on the DXF-100 interface, refer to the DXF-100 DVI Fiber Optic Interface
User’s Manual (part no. M792-9500-101).
Servicing
Generating a System Snapshot

To generate a system snapshot
address of the multiviewer in the address bar.12
Firefox users:
page 421.


3 Click the Technical support link in the navigation pane.
431
Servicing
The Technical Support contact information page appears.
Click here
... or here
4 Click System snapshot.

The system snapshot generation takes a few seconds, and then the File Download
window appears.
5 Click Save.
The Save As window appears.
6 Type a new name for the file in the File name box if desired.
7 Browse to the location where you wish to save the file.
8 Click Save.
432
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Note: Depending on the file size, the download may take a few seconds.
Once the download has completed, the message “Download Complete” may appear.
9 Click Open Folder, if you wish to access the downloaded file, or click Close to dismiss
the message.
Viewing a Multiviewer’s Status Information

To view the status information for a multiviewer
address of the multiviewer, in the address bar.13
Firefox users:
page 421.

The XAdmin Status and Options page appears, displaying a list of all cards and their
statuses.
433
Servicing

• In the case of a Kaleido-X (7RU) or Kaleido-X (14RU), cards are presented in the
order they appear, from left to right when looking at the front of the chassis.
• In the case of a Kaleido-X (4RU), cards are presented in the order they appear,
starting from the top left corner down, and again from the top right corner, when
looking at the front of the chassis.
• Some heading rows may show a card type, serial number, firmware and safe mode
versions, a module status indicator, and input signal status indicators.
• The module status indicator shows whether the card (or module) is running
normally (green) or in safe mode (red).
• The signal status indicators reveals the presence of a valid input signal at the
corresponding connector.
3 Move the pointer to an input signal status indicator to view the associated signal
format.
Status indicator Card type Serial number
Version information
Input signal status
Input signal format
4 Click the arrow button at the end of each heading row to view detailed information
about the associated module.
434
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Expand details
Refresh
Reset card
Master card status

indicator
In the case of a Kaleido-X multiviewer model, you can identify which output card
currently assumes the software master role (and is thus assigned the multiviewer’s IP
address) by looking for the word “master” next to the card’s identifier, for example:
“OUTPUT A (master)”.
Viewing Kaleido-X Version Information

To view your multiviewer’s system and software version information
1 From a workstation on the same subnet, open a Web browser window and type the
multiviewer’s IP address in the address bar.14
The Kaleido-X home page appears, showing the system’s and XEdit’s software version
information at the bottom.
Firefox users:
page 421.

435
Servicing

• The Kaleido-X software version appears on the Web browser’s title bar or tab label.
• In the case of a Kaleido-X or Kaleido-X16 multiviewer, the firmware and safe mode
package numbers appear both in the relevant heading row, and within the
detailed status information.
Kaleido-X software
version number on
browser title bar or
tab label
Firmware version
information in
module heading
Status and Option page for a Kaleido-X (7RU) multiviewer
436
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Firmware version
information in
module heading
Firmware version
information in
detailed status
breakdown
Status and Option page for a Kaleido-X (4RU) multiviewer
Firmware version
in system heading
Status and Option page for a Kaleido-X16 multiviewer
Restarting and Shutting Down a Kaleido-IP Multiviewer
Restarting the Monitor Wall Software

To restart the monitor wall software
address of the multiviewer in the address bar.
Firefox users:
page 421.

437

3 Click the Restart / Shut down link in the navigation pane.

The Restart / Shut down page appears.
4 Click Restart software.


Your multiviewer’s operating system will shut down, and then start again. This may take
a while.
Once the monitor wall software has restarted, the system notifies you.
438
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
6 Click OK.
Restarting a Kaleido-IP Multiviewer

To restart a Kaleido-IP multiviewer
Firefox users:
page 421.



4 Click Restart unit.
439

Your multiviewer will shut down, and then start again, during which time you can
observe messages associated with the Linux shutdown and boot sequences on the
monitor wall display connected to Head 1. This may take a while.
Once the multiviewer has restarted, the system notifies you.
6 Click OK.
Note: Clicking the “Reset multiviewer” button on the Status and Options
page for a Kaleido-IP is equivalent to the above procedure except that, in the
first case, you get no feedback from XAdmin.
Shutting Down a Kaleido-IP Multiviewer

To shut down a Kaleido-IP multiviewer
Firefox users:
page 421.

440
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual


4 Click Shut down.


Your multiviewer will perform a clean shut down, during which time you can observe
messages associated with the Linux shutdown sequence on the monitor wall display
connected to Head 1.
6 Click OK to dismiss the confirmation message.
441
Upgrading your Multiviewer System
Upgrading your Multiviewer System

For information on upgrading your multiviewer system, please refer to the Release Notes
published with the Kaleido-X software version you wish to use. In addition to the latest
Kaleido-X documentation you can download Release Notes for previous versions of the
Kaleido-X software, from Miranda’s support portal.
442
Index
0–9 Any-source multicast transport stream . . . . . . . 94

Asia, contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
0 VU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121–122 ASM transport streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
3D monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Aspect ratio
about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
AFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
A automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197, 220
calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
ABT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
AC-3 metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 of a room display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Actions subtitling monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
assigned to monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 WSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
background actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Assigning
trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 alarms to logical sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
trigger audio monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56, 58 audio outputs to RCP users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
AFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 full screen layouts to RCP users . . . . . . . . . . 283
Africa, contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 logical sources to monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Alarm monitors room layouts to RCP users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 timers to RCP users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 timers to rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Alarms Audio
about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 level meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
debouncing, about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
debouncing, configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 monitoring delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
global . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 output, assigning to RCP users . . . . . . . . . . 284
GSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 reference level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121–122
latch, about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Audio Bridge Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381, 409
levels, in logical source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Audio level meters, scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
lookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Audio monitoring
monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 triggered by actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 58
providers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 135, 167 triggered from the Kaleido-RCP2 . . . . . . . . . 56
reporting behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 triggered from the RCP-200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Audio monitors
SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
status indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Audio scales
sub-alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229–230
virtual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 137 Auto-layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
ALM. See Audio monitors. Automatic aspect ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Americas, contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Andromeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
443
Index
B Closed captions
calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Background actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Background images holding time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
clock logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
custom safe area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 switching on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
DVI input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 text mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
on layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Cluster
Backup about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 63
audio scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
resolutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Color saturation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
retrieving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Composite monitors
about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
C creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Calibrating unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
0 VU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121–122 Configuring
audio metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 alarm thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
audio monitoring delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 aspect ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
automatic aspect ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Audio Bridge Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 audio scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229–230
closed captioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 client PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
color saturation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 IP settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
detail enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Kaleido-RCP2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
DVI keying mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Kaleido-X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 395, 399
dynamic range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
GPI lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 RCP-200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
metadata holding time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 router output signal reclocking . . . . . . . . . . 131
router field selection switching . . . . . . . . . . 130 routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
router output signal reclocking . . . . . . . . . . 131 serial devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
subtitling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 static UMD text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87, 399
Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 UMD text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Cascade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11, 63 Contact Miranda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
CC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Control panel
Certificate error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Kaleido-RCP2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Channels. See Sources. RCP-200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
China, contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Corporate office, contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Chrome Countdown timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234, 238
certificate error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Cropping
Clear duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Client PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Clocks custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Crosspoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 49–50
logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Customer support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
444
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
D E
Dashboard EDID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
disabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 E-mail address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
showing on wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Europe, contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Database Expansion system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 61
about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Extended Data Services. See Metadata monitors.
backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
recommended workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 F
retrieving backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Debouncing Factory defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Fax number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Firefox untrusted connection warning . . . . . . 421
Default layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Floating actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Detail enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Frame
Diagonal size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Dialnorm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123, 139 status information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381, 433
Digital content advisory descriptor . .27, 196, 248 version information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381, 435
Display libraries France, contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Full screen layouts
closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 assigning to RCP user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
managing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Full screen zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36, 180
Displays about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
adding to room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
aspect ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 G
diagonal size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
full screen zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 General status managers. See GSM.
height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Global alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 GPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 132
properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Graphical layout elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 182, 184, 186 GSM
rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 alarm browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Dolby E metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 sources, from external provider . . . . . . . . . 167
Dolby VANC
dialnorm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
loudness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 H
DTVCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Dual system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 HD closed captions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
DVB subtitling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 42, 196, 245 HD-SDI monitoring output
DVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
DVI keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 phase locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
DVTCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Dynamic range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Hours of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
445
Index
I Kaleido-RCP2
about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277, 381
Incremental copy adding users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 audio monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Input method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 layout presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Internal router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29, 408
Internet Explorer removing users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278–279
certificate error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 user preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
compatibility view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Kaleido-X
IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 14 RU frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
IP settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 4 RU frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
7 RU frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
K cascade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 63
cluster system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Kahuna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 395, 399
Kaleido-IP expansion system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 61
about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 62 frame status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
cascade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11, 63 internal router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
layout touring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 network considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
multicast join and leave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 version information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
network considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Kaleido-X16
restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 61
shut down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 cascade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 63
streams, ASM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 internal router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
streams, importing from spreadsheet . . . . . 88 network considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
streams, modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Kaleido-XQUAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
streams, preparing spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . 90 about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
streams, removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Kalypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338, 340
streams, SSM/SFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Kayak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
streams, unicast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Kayenne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Kaleido-Modular Keyboard input method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Keying mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
KMV-3901/3911 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 KMV-3901/3911
network considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Kaleido-Modular-X, about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 cascade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 63
Kaleido-MX, about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 network considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
KX Router logical router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
L
Languages, input method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
446
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Layouts Metadata
about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 AC-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
assigning to RCP users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 closed captions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
automatically populated grid . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 196, 248
background image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Dolby E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
background keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 holding time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 teletext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
countdown timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Metadata monitors
digital content advisory descriptor . . . . . . 248 about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27, 196
duplicating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
DVI background input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Middle East, contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
foreground keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Miranda, contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
full screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Monitor wall
loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18, 34 about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
monitors, adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 48, 209
opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 disabling dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
pan view, in XEdit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 loading layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
refreshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 mouse pointer, locating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
room layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 mouse pointer. large . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
source assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 restarting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
subtitling monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Monitors
V-chip monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
XDS metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27, 196, 248 alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137, 196, 244
zoom, in XEdit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Levels clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197, 251
in logical source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 composite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195, 255, 259
in router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292, 326–327, 330 duplicating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Libraries monitor wall destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 replication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
layout elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Loading layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 source assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 209
Logical sources. See Sources. subtitling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 196, 245
Login, monitor wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 time code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195, 232
Lookup services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196, 238
Loudness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 UMD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
LTC over IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 V-chip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 196, 250
video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195, 213
widget libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
M XDS metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 196, 248
Mouse
Markers, safe area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 large pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Matrix ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292, 326 locating on monitor wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
RCP-200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
447
Index
Multicast transport stream Phone numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

any source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Port usage
source filtered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 client PC to multiviewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
specific source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 e-mail alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Multiviewer iControl to multiviewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
cascade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 multiviewer to client PC or laptop . . . . . . . 392
cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 multiviewer to multiviewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
expansion system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 multiviewer to/from NTP server . . . . . . . . . 395
Kaleido-IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 62 multiviewer to/from RCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Kaleido-Modular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 multiviewer to/from SNMP devices . . . . . . 395
Kaleido-Modular-X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 router controller to multiviewer . . . . . . . . . 394
Kaleido-MX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Preferences, RCP user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Kaleido-X (14RU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 61 Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Kaleido-X (4RU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 61 Processing delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Kaleido-X (7RU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 61 Production switchers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Kaleido-X16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 61 Kahuna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Kaleido-XQUAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Kalypso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
KMV-3901/3911 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Kayak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Kayenne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
status information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381, 433 Ross Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
version information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Snell & Wilcox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Sony . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Zodiak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
N Profiles, NV9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Program config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Network impact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Nominal level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121–122 R
NV9000 router control system
importing configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 RCP2. See Kaleido-RCP2.
profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 RCP-200
about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
audio monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
O category/index panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Office hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
OP-47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383, 411 Reclocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Overscan Reference levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121–122
about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Refreshing layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Region editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261–262
Remote control panel
Kaleido-RCP2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
P RCP-200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Resolutions
Panning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 automatic detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Passthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
PC configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Peripheral devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 338 custom, creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182, 184
Phase locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
448
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Restoring S
database backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
factory defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Safe area
Rooms free-form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
assigning layouts to RCP users . . . . . . . . . . . 283 markers, toggling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Serial devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Serial port test third-party device . . . . . . . . . . . 375
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Serial to TCP/IP Dispatcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Set duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
display aspect ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 SFM transport streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
display diagonal size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Slots, virtual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
display height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
display position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Snell & Wilcox production switcher. See Kahuna.
display properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 SNMP traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
display resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182, 184, 186 Sony production switchers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
display rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Source-filtered multicast transport streams . . 92
display width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Sources
displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63, 157
full screen layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 alarm levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
full screen zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 assigning to monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . 44–45, 209
layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
mouse pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 EXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 external providers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
pan view, in XEdit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 full screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
zoom view, in XEdit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Ross Video production switchers . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Sources table
Router controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 resizing columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Routers sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
cards, SDI signal reclocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 SSM transport streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Status
crosspoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 49–50 alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
field selection switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
importing from NV9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Subtitling
KX Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326–327, 330 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
logical levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 holding time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
matrix ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292, 326 standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
physical levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 text mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Subtitling monitors
about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27, 196
aspect ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Support, contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Switchers. See Production switchers.
449
Index
System Transport streams

about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 ASM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 SFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
cascade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11, 63 SSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 63, 81 unicast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Traps, SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Troubleshooting, system snapshot . . . . 381, 431
dual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 TSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 61
Kaleido-IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 62
Kaleido-Modular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 U
Kaleido-X (14RU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 61
Kaleido-X (4RU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 61 UMD
Kaleido-X (7RU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 61 about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Kaleido-X16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 61 editing text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Kaleido-XQUAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 static text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
KMV-3901/3911 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 text font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Under monitor displays. See UMD.
phase locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Underscan
retrieving backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
status information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 United Kingdom, contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Untrusted connection warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
version information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
T V
Tally interface devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 V-chip monitors
Technical support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27, 196
Teletext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Version information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381, 435
Text mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 223 Video monitors
Third-party devices about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
serial port test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 aspect ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
TSL (serial) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Time code monitors cropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 full screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 overscan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37, 218
Timers resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 safe area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39, 215
assigning to RCP users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 underscan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37, 218
assigning to rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Virtual card slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
W
Web site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
450
Kaleido-X
User’s Manual
Widget libraries XEdit

about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62, 381
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Widgets. See Monitors. opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Width, display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Workflow, database management . . . . . . . . . . 108 virtual card slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
WSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
WST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Z
X Zero VU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121–122
Zodiak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
XAdmin Zooming
about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 layout, in XEdit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
virtual card slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
XDS. See Metadata monitors.
451
Contact Us
Miranda Technical Support

For technical assistance, please contact the Miranda Technical Support center nearest you:
Americas Asia
Office hours: 9:00 a.m. – 9:00 p.m. (EST) Office hours: 9:00 a.m. – 5:00 p.m. (GMT+8)
Telephone: 1-800-224-7882 Telephone: +852 2539 6987
Fax: +1 514 335 1614 Fax: +852 2539 0804
E-mail: support@miranda.com E-mail: asiatech@miranda.com
Europe, Middle East, Africa, UK China

Office hours: 9:00 a.m. – 6:00 p.m. (GMT) Telephone: +86 10 5873 1814
Telephone: +44 118 952 3444 E-mail: asiatech@miranda.com
Fax: +44 118 952 3401
E-mail: eurotech@miranda.com
France EMERGENCY After Hours (Global)

Office hours: 9:00 a.m. – 5:00 p.m. (GMT+1) Toll Free: 1-800-224-7882 (US and Canada)
Telephone: +33 1 55 86 87 88 Telephone: +1 514 333 1772
Fax: +33 1 55 86 00 29
E-mail: eurotech@miranda.com
Corporate Head Office

Miranda Technologies
3499 Douglas-B.-Floreani, St-Laurent, Quebec, Canada H4S 2C6
Telephone: +1 514 333 1772
Fax: +1 514 333 9828
Web: www.miranda.com

Kaleidox 16

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Kaleidox 16

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Kaleidox 16

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User’s Manual

Terms and Conditions

Title Kaleido-X User’s Manual

Part Number M770-2800-120

Revision 10 July 2013, 11:20 am

3 Operation of the Monitor Wall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Triggering Actions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

4 Managing Kaleido-X Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

5 Calibrating the Kaleido-X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

6 Configuring Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Detailed Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

7 Logical Sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

8 Setting Up Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

9 Creating Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

10 Creating Actions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Creating Monitor Wall Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

11 Managing RCP Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

12 Routers & Kaleido-X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

13 Tally Interface Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

14 Kaleido Remote Control Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

15 Using the Serial to TCP/IP Dispatcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

16 Administration and Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

This chapter describes new features in Kaleido-X version 7.00.

New Features and Enhancements in Kaleido-X Version 7.00

About this Document

Note: In line with our commitment to environmental preservation, only the

Overview of single card functionality

Kaleido-Modular KMV-3901/3911 Features

Kaleido-X16-D system overview

Kaleido-X (4RU) system overview

Kaleido-X (7RU) system overview

Kaleido-X (14RU) Expansion

Kaleido-X (14RU) expansion system overview

Cluster system overview

Verifying your System Configuration

Verifying a Multiviewer’s Internal Statuses and Options

The Kaleido-X home page appears.

2 Click the XAdmin button.

1.The multiviewer must have Kaleido-X software version 2.10 or later.

Internet Explorer users:

Status indicator Card type Serial number

Note: In the case of a Kaleido-IP multiviewer, there are currently no options

In the case of a Kaleido-X16 or Kaleido-Modular multiviewer, the relevant indicators are

Verifying an Audio Bridge Terminal

Color Board Status

Color Board Status

Color Board Status

To load a layout on the monitor wall

Monitor wall shortcut menu

Note: By default, each room is associated with one multiviewer output or

3 Choose a default layout from the layout browser.

Example of a default layout showing 16 video streams

Cabling diagram showing KMV-3911 rear panel.

RS-422 Connection Diagram

Pinout of each RS-422 RJ-45 DE-9 male DE-9 female

Pinout of each RS-422 RJ-45 DE-9 male DE-9 female

Action Shortcut key

This section introduces the Kaleido-X monitor wall features.

Red border indicates